Home

QAD ERP 2 User Guide Volume 6: Master Data

1. Maintenance Individual License Maintenance 1 22 16 16 Country USA Authority US COM License Number 2898 CD 9993 Start Date 01 01 2002 End Date 12 31 2002 Licensee Address 01000000 Producer Address 01000000 Intermediate Consignee Addr Final Consignee Address Comments O Item Number 88 4000 Max Amount 4 1 00 Currency USD Enter the country code authority code and license number Leave Country blank if this license applies to all countries Specify the start and end dates for the license and the address codes Licensee The company granted the license Producer The manufacturer of the product under license Use this field if the license applies to a single item Intermediate Consignee An intermediate distribution point Final Consignee A distribution point that is the final destination Enter an item number if this license is for one item Specify maximum per shipment values annual shipment values and currency for this item FAQAD 185 186 192 193 196 Changing or Merging 180 User Guide Master Data Introduction Addresses functions enable you to enter a wide range of records used elsewhere in the system from customers and suppliers to credit terms and freight codes Table 6 1 lists programs in the Addresses Taxes menu and shows where address codes are used Table 6 1 Addresses Taxes Menu 2 Menu Name Where Used 2 1 2 3 2 5 2 7 2 9
2. Table 3 2 Customer Conditions Item Conditions Valid Conditions Bill to Salesperson 2 Article Item Number Class Site Break Category Product Line List Type Sort Name Buyer Planner Site Number Type Description 1 Type Region User Field 1 Description 2 User Field 1 Salesperson 1 User Field 2 Group User Field 2 Wildcard Enter one of the following wildcards period a single position wildcard For example 2 indicates any selection with 2 in the second position asterisk a multiple position wildcard For example 2 indicates any item with 2 in the last position FAQAD 56 User Guide Master Data From For a condition enter the beginning range to be included in the analysis code To For a condition enter the ending range to be included in the analysis code Linking Sets of Analysis Codes By linking analysis codes you can organize customers and items in a variety of ways Item analysis codes can be linked only to other item codes and customer codes only to other customer codes Analysis code linking uses OR logic For example if code ABC links A B and C any customer meeting the criteria for A B or C is included in ABC Link analysis codes in Analysis Code Link Maintenance 1 8 7 Fig 3 8 E Code Link Analysis Code Link Maintenance aintenance 1 8 7 Type Customer Code Retail Retail Customers Linked Code Club Club Shoppers Description EAEE Type Valid values are item or
3. Rate for Item Tax Class and Tax Date y No Matching Rate Selected Rate for Tax Usage and Tax Date y No Rate for Tax Date Error Displays and No Rate is Selected Remaining tax rate fields must be blank FAQAD 356 User Guide Master Data If GTM finds a matching rate it uses this rate for the tax calculation Otherwise the following message displays Error Tax rate does not exist Tax Type Tax Class Tax Usage P See Fixing The message displays the tax type tax class and tax usage not found and Cominon Tax no tax is calculated If this happens investigate the problem Problems on age 386 M PB Table 13 2 describes the tax rate selection criteria for different transaction amounts Table 13 2 Tax Rate Selection Item Tax Class Tax Usage Tax Date Criteria Inventory items Item tax class if any Transaction tax Transaction tax date usage if any Memo items Transaction tax Transaction tax Transaction tax date class if any usage if any Trailer charges 1 Tax class from Transaction tax Transaction tax date trailer charge detail usage if any if any 2 Trailer charge tax class if any 3 Transaction tax class if any Specifying Tax Data All transactions subject to tax have tax data windows accessible in the header line item and trailer frames Figure 13 3 illustrates the tax pop up in the Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 header
4. Use Statistical Procedure Maintenance 2 22 1 19 to enter valid codes if your country requires this information for electronic data interchange EDI transactions Use Region Maintenance 2 22 1 22 to enter valid codes if your country requires this information Setting Up Addresses for Declarants and Agents When printing Intrastat Declarations for declarants and agents the system prints company address information in the declaration header Use Intrastat Control 2 22 24 to establish defaults for declarant and agent addresses It is common for companies to submit one consolidated Intrastat P See Setting Up a declaration monthly requiring the setup of only one company address If poros m Fach multiple monthly declarations are required as when company sites are Site on located in different countries you must set up multiple company page 272 addresses FAQAD 268 User Guide Master Data Setting Up Intrastat Control Use Intrastat Control 2 22 24 to set system wide parameters for Intrastat processing and system wide defaults for Intrastat data fields Fig 8 4 Intrastat Control 2 22 24 b See Manually Creating Intrastat History on page 278 b See User Guide Distribution A for information on EMT AQAD Intrastat Control Use Intrastat Imp Exp Defaul Intrastat Net Weight UI Intrastat Net Weight Minimu Flow Indicator Arrivals 1P Flow Indicator Dispatches 1P Reference Date Logic
5. GTM does not adjust sales commission reporting Commissions are always based on item prices including tax Adjust your commission structure to compensate Tax Elements Every country in the world has a unique system for assessing taxes However most systems share common elements Business transactions can be subject to many kinds of taxes sales taxes domestic import duties inventory transfer taxes royalty fees and so on In GIM a tax that is peculiar to a region and individually calculated and reported is a tax type Regions that assess tax include countries or groups of countries states provinces counties districts and cities In GTM a region that assesses tax Is a fax zone Within a tax zone a tax type can affect all people and items or only some of them In GTM customers suppliers and items can be grouped by tax class Similarly a tax can be assessed at a different rate based on a customer s operation or how items are used GT M can group people and items by tax usage QAD 314 User Guide Master Data Fig 11 1 GTM Example FAQAD The three factors that can determine which tax types apply to a transaction are the ship from and ship to tax zones and the tax class of the customer or the supplier In GIM the set of tax types for a specific ship to ship from zone and tax class combination is a tax environment A tax type can have multiple tax rates for different item tax classes tax usages
6. M Tax Method 01 Accrue Tax at Receipt v Update Tax Allowed Accrue Tax at Usage Allow Tax Included Discount Tax at Invoice EC Sales List O Discount Tax at Payment O EC Process Work Comments O Sales Tax Account 2400 Sales Tax Absorbedi5950 AP Tax Account 1400 P Baso AP Tax Retained Tax Type Enter the tax type to which the rate applies Item Tax Class If the tax rate applies only to a specific line item or trailer charge tax class enter it here Leave this field blank if the tax rate applies regardless of tax class Do not set up rates by customer or supplier tax class Tax Usage If the tax rate applies only to a specific tax usage enter it Leave blank if the tax rate applies regardless of tax usage Effective Specify the starting date for using this tax rate in tax calculations If you do not specify a date the system inserts the record creation date When you enter multiple tax rates the default effective date is the one in the last record entered Tax Code Enter a code identifying this tax rate If you do not enter a code the system increments it automatically from the Last Tax Code in Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 You can use prefixes to designate groups of tax rates but be aware that future tax rates will have the same prefix unless you override it Tax code has no significance for auditing or accounting purposes Description Enter the description of the tax rat
7. EC Sales List Set to Yes to include sales and purchases that use these tax rates in the EC Sales Listing 2 13 15 8 a report submitted to the government as verification that recoverable purchase VAT claimed by your company is correct for the amount of VAT it collected on sales Accrue Tax at Receipt Determines when GL entries for purchase tax amounts are created For recoverable taxes set this to No because the tax point is receipt of supplier invoice Value Added Taxes VAT Value added taxes are common in Europe and Canada In certain European countries it is a legal requirement to calculate VAT amounts based on invoice totals This is accomplished by setting Tax By Line to No in Tax Rate Maintenance This setting by itself is not sufficient to ensure that purchase receipts and AP transactions are taxed on the order total You must set three other fields appropriately Percent Recoverable The percentage of purchase tax that can be recovered for the tax rate must be set to 100 Accrue Tax at Receipt This field determines when GL entries for purchase tax amounts are created For VAT taxes set this to No so that GL transactions are created for tax amounts during vouchering not receipt Allow Tax Included Set this field to No so that GIM does not reverse calculate tax amounts Implementing GTM 349 Tax on Tax In a tax on tax situation one tax amount is included in the calculation for another tax amount For example
8. Master Data Yes then a blank status is assigned Otherwise if the Status field is blank and Active is No the system assigns the status based on another default as described in Table 5 4 Attribute Order of Precedence Table 5 4 shows the search order the system uses to determine default inventory attributes during receipt If values have not been defined in any of these programs the default attribute is blank Table 5 4 Attribute Search Order of Location of Inventory Menu Order Precedence Status Values Number Field Name Active 1 Work Order Maintenance 16 1 Receipt Status Yes Work Order Attribute 1 22 4 Receipt Status Yes Maintenance 2 Item Site Inventory Data 1 4 16 PO Rept Status Yes Maintenance WO Rept Status Yes 3 Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 PO Rept Status Yes WO Rept Status Yes 4 Inventory Detail 34 1 Inventory Status N A Maintenance Location Maintenance 1 1 18 Inventory Status N A 6 Site Maintenance 1 1 13 Inventory Status N A Figure 5 7 illustrates how these rules can be applied In this example assume that all of the items are in the same lot and have the same reference number Item A which has a default inventory status of 5 cannot be received into Location L This is because the same item already exists in this location with the same lot and reference numbers and a different status Item A can be received into Locations M or N with a status of 5 since neither of thes
9. peg 4 0016 variance 6 m 4 00 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Purchase Goods Receipt Entries created for received 1 ae T MEE item cost 1 but not tax i Voucher Confirmation os ae Entries created for item ea eceipls On m 00 cost 2 variance 3 tax 0 40 00 on item cost 4 and tax on 10 00 variance 5 amp 4 00 AP Usage Variance Inventory 40 00 10 00 2 4 00 5 Processing GTM 373 Fig 13 14 GL Entries for AP Rate Variance GL Entries for AP Rate Variance Standard Cost Standard Cost Non Recoverable Tax Non Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Purchase Purchase Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts Price Variance item cost 1 and tax 2 100 00 eme 3950 10 00 Voucher Confirmation Purchase Accounts AP Rate Entries created for item Order Receipts Payable Variance cost 3 variance 4 tax 100 00 8 3 100 00 30 00 2 on item cost 5 and taxon 999 amp m 3 00 6 variance 6 9 300 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt Purchase Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts item cost 1 but not tax 100 00 5 D 100 00 Voucher Confirmation F rclidso Piscints Order Receipts Payable Entries created for item 100 00 2 100 00 cost 2 variance 3 tax 8 30 00 on item cost 4 and tax on 10 00 item cost var
10. 0 0 0 eee eee eee nee 206 Freight List Maintenance 0 0 cece eee eee 207 Freight Zone Maintenance 0 0 0 cece eee eee ee 208 Freight Class Maintenance 0 00 e eee eee eee eee 208 Freight Charges Maintenance 0 ce eee eee eee eee 209 Freight Terms Maintenance 0 0 ce eee eee eee ee 210 Changing or Merging Address Codes 0 0 0 e ee eee eens 211 Chapter 7 Logistics Accounting s 213 Introduction scere rb epp hee alae Rol aca ees et 214 Logistics Charges ii siue bee eei tack ee bao Erde bid taaes 214 Pending Vouchers 3 0 ssi ee we dwelt ade ea end 217 Logistics Accounting Programs 0 0 c eee eee eee ee 218 Setting Up Logistics Accounting 0 0 eee eee eee 222 Setting Up GL Accounts 1 0 0 gioa deai a kE eee eee 222 Setting Up NRM Sequence Numbers 0 000008 224 FAQAD Contents Setting Up the Control Program 0 0 0c eee eee eee 225 Defining Logistics Charge Codes 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 227 Defining Detailed Logistics Accounts 0 00020 e eee 230 Calculating Taxes for Logistics Charges 0005 233 Accrual Currency 0 0 eee eee tenes 235 Accruing Inbound Logistics Charges 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 235 Creating Logistics Cost Elements 0 0020 e eee eee 236 Updating Item Costs 0 2c eee 237 Defining Terms of T
11. 13 5 and Formula Maintenance 15 5 Maintaining Process Records Important To use these functions Processes must be Yes in Enable PCC Formula Maintenance 15 22 Use Process Data Maintenance to add edit deactivate and copy processes These functions work just like the Routing Data Maintenance functions except for differences in maintained data fields The differences are the same as those between Routing Maintenance 14 13 1 and Process Definition Maintenance 15 13 Maintaining Item Specifications To use these functions Item Specifications must be Yes in Enable PCC Item Spec Maintenance 19 1 22 Use Item Specification Maintenance to manage changes to quality tests associated with an item You can copy item specifications defined in the Quality Management module and modify them in the PCO A submenu provides two selections Copy ltem Specification From Quality Module Copies item specification records into the PCO Displays the current sequence of steps for a given parent item and routing P See Maintaining Product Structure Records on page 125 b See Maintaining Routing Records on page 127 FAQAD 130 User Guide Master Data Fig 4 24 Copy Item Specification From Quality Module Tip PCR PCO Close 1 9 14 displays almost the same information Fig 4 25 PCO Trailer Maintenance FAQAD ecqmcpy p Copy Item Specification from Quality Module Number PCO00007 ID Database Title
12. 2 98 00 Disc Tax Amt 98 00 10 9 80 Net Order Total 98 00 9 80 107 80 If the customer is late the discount tax amount reverts to the non discounted tax amount of 10 00 and the payment amount to apply changes to 110 00 Retained Taxes In some countries the government declares that large customers of small suppliers are required to remit tax amounts directly to the government instead of to the supplier Customers of these suppliers pay the purchase amount minus tax to the supplier but are required to calculate post and periodically pay the tax amounts on their purchases directly to the government Implementing GTM 351 Use Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 to specify the GL accounts sub accounts and cost centers for AP Retained Tax To designate a tax rate as a retained tax set the field to Yes Absorbed Taxes Absorbed sales tax is a liability you can incur whenever your company is liable for tax but does not charge it to the customer For example if you give an item to a customer you may still pay tax even though the item s sales price is zero Absorbed sales tax is also called withheld or retained sales tax Use Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 to specify the GL accounts sub accounts and cost centers for Sales Tax Absorbed To designate a tax rate as an absorbed tax set the field to Yes Reverse Calculated Taxes Sometimes item amounts already include tax For transaction documents and reporting
13. Account Control but you can change it Inventory activity typically occurs at the site where orders are processed However in a multi site environment you can ship receive or issue inventory from a different site If the other site has different costs for an item a variance occurs This variance is posted to the Transfer Variance account If the two sites are in different entities an intercompany transaction may also be posted The system automatically updates costs at both the central and remote sites When the transfer from and transfer to sites are in different entities the system automatically generates the appropriate intercompany balancing entries using the Intercompany Inventory Control debit and credit accounts defined in Entity Code Maintenance 25 3 1 1 Items Sites 31 b See page 39 for details b See Automatic Locations on page 36 for details b See Associating Domains with Sites on page 32 b See User Guide Distribution A QAD 32 User Guide Master Data FAQAD When the two sites are in the same entity a balancing debit or credit is posted to the Transfer Clearing account defined in Inventory Control 3 24 Associating Domains with Sites Each site must be associated with a domain When a site is associated with the current working domain it is considered a primary site otherwise it is a connection record pointing to the domain where the actual site related data is mai
14. Some commodity codes require that an item be tracked in a specified unit of measure If the line UM differs from the supplementary UM when Intrastat history records are created the line quantity is converted to the supplementary UM Setting Up Intrastat Item Data Use Item Intrastat Data Maintenance 2 22 6 to associate Intrastat data with inventory items involved in Intra EU transactions The values entered here appear in orders as defaults and can be changed at order entry Create a record for each EU country Authority INSTAT Country GER Germany Item Number 44 100 CONTROL UNIT HOME USE Commodity Codes P Country of Origin P Intrastat Item Authority For Intrastat purposes always set this to INSTAT Country Enter a country code Intrastat 271 Fig 8 5 Commodity Code Maintenance 2 22 3 Fig 8 6 Item Intrastat Data Maintenance 2 22 6 FAQAD 272 User Guide Master Data Item Number Enter an item number Commodity Enter a commodity code To associate a commodity code with a country you must also associate it with that country in Commodity Code Maintenance 2 22 3 Country of Origin Enter a country of origin code Intrastat Item Enter Yes to have the system automatically create Intrastat history records for the item For items for which you do not want Intrastat records created such as intangible goods or items related to motorized vehicles enter No Setting Up a Company Address
15. Use Price Lists by Item Inquiry 1 10 1 6 to review price list detail sorted by item code Copying a Price List Use Price List Copy 1 10 1 8 to quickly create new price lists based on existing ones You can copy a price list into any currency or adjust existing price lists with increased or decreased prices The system makes a copy of the source price list under the target price list code with a start date of today Specific prices Amount Type List Price or Net Price are multiplied by the Adjustment Percent and the Cur Conv Factor then rounded to the specified number of decimal places Discount and markup percentages are copied as they are in the source price list rice List Copy Source Price List PR 00001 P Source Currency USD P UM UM Cust Supplier ctl P tenc 0 P Start 06 28 2002 fl Adjustment 95 Round to Two Decimal Places Round to Nearest Whole Number Round to Nearest Ten Round to Nearest One Hundred Round to Nearest One Thousand x xx x 00 x0 00 x00 00 xD00 00 Fig 3 20 Price List Copy 1 10 1 8 Target Price List PR 00002 P Target Currency FRF P 1 o o 5 5 A Expire B Curr Conv Factor Clear Target List Create Target List Merge Lists Update 1 Print Audit Trail O Output Batch ID O Q Source Price List Enter the code identifying the price list from which the information is copied Source Currency Currency code used by the source price list T
16. 15 9 For processes Process Definition Maintenance 15 13 Process Definition Copy 15 16 Process Formula Maintenance 15 18 For item specifications Item Specification Maintenance 19 1 13 Additionally set menu security on Detail Approval Maintenance 1 9 6 13 Only use this program in situations that require immediate modifications of PCO approvals QAD 142 User Guide Master Data FAQAD 157 159 173 144 User Guide Master Data P See Setting Up Compliance on page 146 Table 5 1 Compliance Menu b See Managing Controlled Substances on page 173 for Controlled Substances Menu details b See User Guide Manager Functions for details on site security FAQAD Introduction This section includes a brief description of each compliance feature Once you choose the features you will use you can begin setup Features using item data user information and other elements may require setup in additional programs Menu Description Program 1 22 Compliance Menu 1 22 1 Lot Master Maintenance clltmt p 1 22 2 Lot Master Inquiry icltmiq p 1 22 4 Work Order Attribute Maintenance clatmt p 1 22 5 Work Order Attribute Browse clbr001 p 1 22 9 Work Order Batch Browse clbr002 p 1 22 13 Lot Group Maintenance cllgmt p 1 22 14 Lot Group Inquiry cllgiq p 1 22 16 Controlled Substances Menu 1 22 19 Multi Lot Inventory Detail Update clltamt p 1 22 22 Lot Master Build clltbd p 1 22 23 Lot
17. 4 and 25 00 25 00 tax on item cost variance 6 12 50 5 AP Rate and Usage Variances AP rate variance occurs when an item s invoice cost does not match its PO cost AP usage variance occurs when an item s invoice quantity does not match its PO quantity and you close the receiver line in the voucher Figure 13 13 and Figure 13 14 show GL entries for inventory items Entries for memo items update Expensed Item Receipts instead of Purchase Order Receipts and Expensed Purchases instead of Inventory In addition for memo items an option in Accounts Payable Control 28 24 allows variances to update Expensed Item Receipts instead of the variance accounts Processing GTM 371 Fig 13 12 GL Entries for Purchase Price Variance Standard Cost Non Recoverable Tax QAD 372 User Guide Master Data Fig 13 13 GL Entries for AP Usage Variance Standard Cost Non Recoverable Tax FAQAD GL Entries for AP Usage Variance Standard Cost Non Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Purchase Purchase Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts Price Variance item cost 1 and tax 2 100 00 DIETE 10 00 10 00 Voucher Confirmation Purchase Accounts AP Usage Entries created for item Order Receipts Payable Variance cost 3 variance 4 tax G 100 00 40 00 on item cost 5 and tax on
18. 5 12 Lot Master Build 9 Lot Master Build Item Number TETEN p 1 22 22 Date and M Transaction Tas P Number fields ves Output Batch ID ovo FAQAD 166 User Guide Master Data Fig 5 13 Lot Master Maintenance 1 22 1 FAQAD You can enter any combination of item number date and transaction ID ranges Before updating the database set Update to No to generate a listing of changes that will be made Review the listing to verify that it is correct Then rerun the program with Update set to Yes Modifying Lot Master Records Use Lot Master Maintenance 1 22 1 to manually add modify or delete lot master records Adding records is not recommended since the records created with this program are not associated with an order limiting the traceability This function is typically used to add additional data Many user defined fields are provided to support custom reporting requirements Item Number I Item Number 88 4000 PLASTIC PELLETS and Lot Serial Lot Serial 44 MIL 999 001 fields Order Number Line ID Expired Inv Trans P Lot UM Created 06 17 2002 Lot UM Conversion 1 0000 User ID pnm Comments oo Specify an item number and lot serial number When you press Go the system displays the order number and line or ID that created the lot or serial number The date the record was created and the ID of the user creating the record also display You can upda
19. In the event of a recount recount information goes on the same tag The system provides two types of count tags item and bulk Use Item Tag Create 3 16 1 to create tags for selected items You can select items by item number site product line or ABC class Enter no selection criteria to create tags for all items in your system Use Bulk Tag Create 3 16 2 to create bulk tags Bulk tags are the same as item tags except that the item information on bulk tags is blank Use bulk tags to count items that do not have item tags FAQAD 306 User Guide Master Data Tip In the event of errors delete incorrect tags using Tag Delete Archive 3 16 23 then recreate and print new ones Tip At this point only the frozen inventory quantities are updated Fig 10 1 Tag Count Entry 3 16 11 FAQAD To find out how many bulk tags you need use any one of the following Tag Inquiry 3 16 8 Tag Report 3 16 13 Uncounted Tag Report Update 3 16 15 After creating count tags use Tag Print 3 16 6 to print both types of tags You can print tags on most standard size forms Default forms are set to print on 3 x 5 inch card stock You can optionally print the tag number in bar code format if your system is formatted to do so Note Before deleting bulk tags void the tags using Tag Void Status Update 3 16 7 Entering Initial Tag Counts After counting tagged items enter the count in the system using Tag Count
20. Intrastat Net Weight Minimum field 269 Intrastat Net Weight Unit of Measure field 269 inventory 285 302 accurate balances 41 availability 39 checking availability 302 data 14 18 detail records 287 impact of PCO 136 issues restrictions 39 location 34 negative balances 41 nettable 39 not available 39 overissue 41 picking 286 sites 28 status codes 39 total 288 transaction effective date 269 270 transactions 41 updating balances 307 Inventory Account Maintenance 27 inventory attributes 150 changing 159 compliance 145 149 field security 159 search order 156 status 151 Inventory Balance Freeze 305 Inventory Balance Update 304 307 inventory codes ABC Class 18 allocate single lot 19 automatic lot numbers 19 average interval 19 cycle count interval 19 location 19 location type 19 lot serial control 18 shelf life 19 site 18 Inventory Control 286 ABC tolerances 296 cycle counting 295 location search order 35 Site 18 Inventory Detail by Item Browse 302 Inventory Detail by Location 299 Inventory Detail by Site Browse 302 Inventory Detail Report 299 inventory reports Current Surplus Inventory Report 299 Detail Allocation Inventory Report 298 Inventory Detail by Location 299 Inventory Detail Report 299 Inventory Valuation as of by Loc 301 Inventory Valuation as of Date 300 Inventory Valuation by Location 300 Inventory Valuation Report 300 Item ABC Status Report Update 298 Projected Surplus Inventory 300 Reorder Report 29
21. Maintenance Voucher 10017 Control 45 00 Amount 42 50 Total Logistics Charge Selection Maintenance Logistics Charge Selection Maintenance Sel Date Internal Reference External Reference Balance 07 30 2002 1183 SWF20020730002 40 00 07 30 2002 RC1067 2 50 Supplier 00100 Order PO1054 Charge Freight Every time you select or deselect a pending voucher the system automatically updates the total of currently selected pending vouchers The total appears in the upper right corner of the screen Press Go to process the selected pending vouchers and move to the next frame FAQAD 258 User Guide Master Data Fig 7 30 Voucher Maintenance Logistics Charge Matching Detail FAQAD Logistics Charge Matching Detail Frame Logistics Charge Matching Detail consists of two frames When you access this screen after going through Logistics Charge Selection Maintenance the top frame displays selected pending vouchers Otherwise you must add pending vouchers manually Voucher Maintenance Voucher 10017 USD Control 45 00 Total 42 50 Logistics Charge Matching Detail Date Internal Reference External Reference Invoice Amount 07 30 2002 RC1067 2 50 07 30 2002 1183 SWF20020730002 40 00 Logistics Charge Matching Maintenance Determines if Internal Ref 1183 Order PO1054 Details this line is External Ref SWF20020730002 Charge Code Freight Close Line Open Amt 40 00 Date 07 30 2002 closed Invoice Amt 40
22. Most values specified in the header can be modified for each line FAQAD Processing GTM 357 Fig 13 3 Sales Order Maintenance Sales Order Maintenance Order 10001 Sold To 01000000 Bill To 01000000 Ship To 01000000 7 1 1 Header Frame Sold To Colossal Conglomerat Tax Usage P Suite 1000 Colossal Bi Tax Environment A Colossal Industrial Pa Tax Class RSE P Evanston Taxable 090876 United States of Ameri Tax Inl Order Date 01 25 1998 Line Pricing O Confirmed 01 25 1994 Required Date 01 26 1998 Manual 10 Currency USD Language Promise Date Site 10000 Taxable Due Date 01 26 1998 Channel Fixed Price 2 Perform Date Project Credit Terms 30 Pricing Date 01 26 1998 Credit Terms Int 0 00 Purchase Order Reprice Remarks ALL SHIPMENTS PER CORP CONTRACT A 0t Entered By Tax Date The transaction tax date is used to select tax rates At order entry the default tax date is the order due date At shipment and receipt the default tax date is the transaction effective date In some situations you should specify another tax date For example when processing a return you can enter the original order date You cannot override the transaction tax date for individual line items and trailer charges GIM does not use a tax rate if the transaction s tax date is outside the tax rate s effective date range Tax Usage Tax usage is used to select tax rates Tax usage defaults from the relevant
23. PCR PCO Type Maintenance 118 121 pending vouchers 217 updating 253 vouchering 254 permanent locations 35 physical inventory 303 307 creating and printing tags 305 deleting archiving old tags 304 freezing inventory balances 305 reviewing results 307 Tag Recount Entry 307 Updating Inventory Balances 307 picking logic 286 inventory 286 options 287 planning data 14 20 PO Fiscal Receiving 241 PO Receipt 205 PO Reference Date Logic field 269 PO Shipper Maintenance 241 PO Shipper Receipt logistics charges 243 Port Maintenance 267 FAQAD 398 User Guide Master Data Port of Transhipment field 270 Preference Criteria Codes 173 Price by Line Due Date field 98 Price List Copy 1 10 1 8 75 Price List Copy 1 10 2 5 94 Price List Generation by Item 92 Price List Inquiry 74 Price List Maintenance 1 10 1 1 69 Price List Maintenance 1 10 2 1 88 Price List Report 74 price lists Combination Type field 70 copying 75 creating 61 Disc Sequence field 72 incremental 63 List Price 74 manual 86 quantity break type 70 requiring 98 unit of measure 69 Price Lists by Customer Inquiry 74 Price Lists by Item Inquiry 75 pricing analysis codes 52 assigning lower net 66 best pricing 48 break categories 49 59 calculating best 66 effective date 51 52 inquiries 78 list discount table 88 promotional discount 50 tables 88 Pricing Control 51 Pricing What If Inquiry 78 Print PCR PCO 131 printing cycle count worksheets 296 ECO 107 In
24. Prefixes and number sequences are defined in PCC Control and used when Auto Number is Yes to determine the number for a new PCO or PCR If you enter a prefix that is not set up in the control program a warning displays Routing Slip Enter the routing slip associated with documents of this type The routing slip determines which groups must approve the document and in what order Distribution Enter the group to be notified when documents of this type are released and distributed with Release and Distribution 1 9 7 1 Creating PCRs and PCOs This section focuses on creating PCOs in PCO Maintenance 1 9 2 13 PCR Maintenance 1 9 2 1 is almost identical to PCO Maintenance and is not described separately It contains two additional functions that enable you to create a PCO based on an approved PCR PCO Maintenance 1 9 2 13 is a large and complex program used to create PCOs and add and modify all product change data including any of the following types Basic header data Text detail Item detail Product structure formula detail Routing process detail Item specification detail Trailer data Submenus in PCO Maintenance enable you to navigate from one PCO section to another FAQAD 120 User Guide Master Data Fig 4 16 PCO Maintenance 1 9 2 13 Header Frame b See Routing PCRs and PCOs for Approval on page 132 for details FAQAD The header frame of PCO Maintenance contains basic information
25. QO Default Price Date 51 QO Factor Rounding 51 repricing 80 sales tax absorbed account 331 account 331 Salesperson Maintenance 185 Salesperson Payments Report 186 salespersons commissions 185 territory codes and 185 Scheduled Order Maintenance 239 security PCR PCO 108 Product Change Control module 140 sequences discount 66 GTM tax types 327 setting up country codes 194 FAQAD Intrastat addresses for declarants and agents 267 PCC module 107 severity level 117 severity list 115 shelf life 19 ship to addresses temporary 187 Ship To Maintenance Intrastat country codes 273 simple interest credit limit calculation 191 single item locations 36 single lot per PO receipt 148 per receipts 154 161 Site Maintenance 30 36 site security compliance 144 Site Security Maintenance and compliance 144 sites 28 34 address records 341 multiple databases 29 overview 28 setting up 29 uses of 28 SO Reference Date Logic field 269 standard cost GIM taxes 363 inventory items 363 non recoverable tax 369 recoverable tax 363 tax for returned items 375 taxes for inventory items 369 taxes for memo items 368 taxes for returned items 369 variances 364 state codes 317 GIM 317 Statistical Procedure Maintenance 267 statistical value calculating Intrastat 283 status inventory 39 151 PCR PCO 131 Stock Availability Browse 302 Stock Journal 301 Stock Status Report 298 substitute items restricting issues to 172 sums into relationships 319
26. Start Start date defaults to today s date and defines the start date for the new pricing structure created by the copy This field is applied differently by the system in different situations If the source and target codes and currency are the same and the date entered matches the start date currently on the source price list a new price list is not created Instead the existing price list is modified according to any adjustment percentage entered In other cases when the source and target codes and currency are the same the system uses the start date as the start effective date on the target list and adds an ending effective date on the source list day before target s start date If the source and target codes are different the start date is used on the target and the source list is not affected Expire Either the last date MM DD YY target price list is effective or blank if price list is effective any date on or after start date default is blank Pricing 77 Adjustment Percent up or down target price list amounts are to be adjusted relative to source price list amounts Enter 100 0 for no adjustment or a numerical value indicating percent adjustment is needed For example 90 adjusts target price list down 10 110 adjusts target price list up 10 The default is 100 0 Curr Conv Factor Enter a conversion factor to use when the source Tip and target price list currencies are not the same The system calculates Py Sh
27. and transaction tax dates GIM selects the rate most appropriate for a particular transaction Example Figure 11 1 illustrates how these factors interact A German automobile manufacturer exports luxury cars to the United States U S tax rates depend on the class of the vehicle For example the rate for luxury cars is 30 In Global Tax Management Germany and the U S are tax zones The automobile manufacturer is a customer tax class subject to the U S import tax Luxury cars are an item tax class subject to a rate of 30 for the import tax The sales order tax environment associates the import tax with the order and GIM selects the tax rate based on the item tax class for luxury cars Ship From Ship To Customer Item Tax Tax Zone Tax Zone Tax Class Class Germany Auto Luxury D Q ms amp e Tax Environment Tax Type Tax Rate Germany to U S Import Tax 30 Tax on Sales Order 321 Setting Up 39 a Updating Other Rec Implementing Special 316 Table 12 1 Programs Used to Implement GTM b See External Interface Guide Sales and Use Tax FAQAD User Guide Master Data Implementation Overview Table 12 1 lists the activities and functions used to implement Global Tax Management GTM Activity Use this program Setting up country codes Setting up state province and county codes Setting up tax zones Setting up tax types Setting up tax classes and tax
28. deactivating product structure records and editing product structure changes already added to the PCO Records are not actually deleted Deactivating a record sets an ending effective date when the PCO is incorporated Replace Product Structure Component Used in conjunction with other PCO functions to replace one component item with another across multiple bills of material Enter an existing component item number followed by a new one The system accesses product structure records already included in the PCO searching for occurrences of the requested component It marks these product structures Deactivated end effective date set and adds new product structures for the same parent items substituting the new component for the old one AQAD Product Change Control 127 Fig 4 22 Replace Product Structure R ture Comnonent Component Component Item 22 120 Description CORD POWER USA UM EA Component Replacement List Component Item Description Multiplier Replace with Item Description Multiplier 22 130 CORD POWER UNIVERSAL O Q Multiplier Modifies the Qty Per value for the new component The quantity per of the old component is multiplied by this number to determine the quantity per for the new component As an example an old component has a quantity per of 2 The multiplier is set to 0 5 The quantity per for the new component is 1 Other detailed product structure data such as Scrap and Op are copied from t
29. repricing sales orders and quotes 80 reprinting Intrastat declarations 281 Reserved Location Browse 37 Reserved Location Maintenance 37 192 Reserved Location Report 37 reserved locations 37 creating 192 inventory status 38 primary 37 restricting component issues 172 retained tax account 331 retained taxes 350 returned items tax accrual 375 reverse calculated taxes 351 revision levels PCC 125 Rounding Method Browse 323 Rounding Method Maintenance 323 Rounding Method Report 323 rounding methods global tax management GTM 323 thresholds 324 unit 324 Route PCO for Approval 105 132 Route PCR for Approval 104 Routing Slip Copy 117 Routing Slip Maintenance 115 details 116 FAQAD 400 User Guide Master Data S Sales Account Maintenance 27 Sales Order Control accounts 205 pricing fields 98 Sales Order Maintenance Global Tax Management GTM 357 Intrastat data 274 logistics accounting 247 pricing fields 86 repricing 84 Transaction Tax Detail frame 359 View Edit Tax Details 359 Sales Order Manual Allocations allocate single lot 19 Sales Order Price Inquiry 80 84 Sales Order Pricing Report 85 Sales Order Repricing 80 sales orders customer address 186 Display SO Discounts as 52 price lists See best pricing Price SO by Line 52 repricing 80 SO Default Price Date 52 SO Factor Rounding 52 tax adjustments 352 Sales Quote Price Inquiry 84 sales quotes customer address 186 Display QO Discounts as 52 Price QO by Line 51
30. sums into zone 318 Supplier Item Maintenance 23 Supplier Maintenance 192 bank account window 199 banks 199 Intrastat country codes 273 Supplier Remit to Maintenance 192 suppliers 192 banks 198 country codes 273 lot numbers 161 171 matching blank in vouchering 226 terms of trade 238 T Tag Count Entry 306 Tag Delete Archive 304 306 Tag Inquiry 306 Tag Print 306 Tag Recount Entry 307 Tag Report 306 Tag Void Status Update 307 tax accrual 370 Tax Base Maintenance 329 tax bases 329 Tax Class Browse 322 Tax Class Maintenance 322 Tax Class Report 322 tax classes 321 Tax Detail by Transaction Inquiry 385 Tax Detail by Transaction Report 385 Tax Environment Maintenance 326 327 tax environments 324 examples 325 selection criteria 355 setting up 326 tax exemptions GTM 344 Tax Rate Copy Update 338 Tax Rate Maintenance 334 tax rates 332 copying 338 selecting 355 setting up 333 tax reporting 1099 MISC 184 addresses 184 aggregate tax 344 by exemption 344 tax transaction types logistics charges 233 Tax Type Inquiry 321 Tax Type Maintenance 321 Tax Type Report 321 Index 401 tax types 320 Tax Usage Maintenance 322 tax usages 321 Tax Zone Inquiry 319 Tax Zone Maintenance 319 Tax Zone Report 319 tax zones 317 error codes 339 hierarchies 317 318 sums into 318 taxes absorbed 351 accrued 337 capped 347 company address 184 correcting 361 discounted 349 luxury 347 processing 353 recoverable 347 363 reporti
31. supplier Port Hueneme Remit To 00100 Swift Transport Ship To 10000001 Quality Products Inc Set Voucher Prepayment Amount 0 00 Logistics Hotd amp rmount 8 88 Voucher Logistics Charges Charges to Non Disc Amt 0 00 Include Blank Suppliers O Yes Daybook Auto Select ov FAQAD 256 User Guide Master Data P See Setting Up the Control Program on page 225 Fig 7 28 Voucher Maintenance Automatic Selection gt See Internal and External References on page 218 FAQAD Voucher Logistics Charges Enter Yes to voucher logistics charges Enter No to voucher expenses Include Blank Suppliers When Match Blank Suppliers is Yes in Logistics Accounting Control you can indicate whether to display pending vouchers with blank supplier fields for selection Otherwise only pending vouchers for the specified supplier are displayed When Match Blank Suppliers is No this field is not available Auto Select Indicate whether you want to define selection criteria for retrieving pending vouchers Automatic Selection Frame When Auto Select is Yes the Automatic Selection frame illustrated in Figure 7 28 displays You can select multiple open pending vouchers for vouchering The same frame is used when receivers are selected for vouchering When vouchering logistics charges the Item Number Buyer and Approved By fields are not available since they do not apply to logistics charges V
32. when you enter a purchase order you can manually edit the system calculated tax amounts When you process the receipt copy the edited tax values from the order or recalculate taxes based on the current information If you did not manually edit the taxes in the order taxes are automatically recalculated at receipt FAQAD 362 User Guide Master Data Table 13 3 Elements that Influence GL Entries for Each Tax Point FAQAD If you enter Yes the system copies tax amounts from the earlier transaction to the one you are currently working on If you enter No the system recalculates taxes Taxes are copied exactly The system does not adjust for quantity or price differences between the two transactions General Ledger Effects During transaction processing the tax point for the tax rate determines when and for which accounts the system creates general ledger GL entries for tax amounts The tax point defaults first from Accrue Tax at Receipt in Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 then from the same setting in individual tax rate records 2 13 13 1 When the tax point is goods receipt the system creates GL entries when you record the receiving transaction When the tax point is invoice receipt the system creates entries later when you enter a confirmed voucher or confirm an existing voucher For each tax point exact GL entries vary by cost system Table 13 3 summarizes the elements that influence GL entries The subsequ
33. you must reverse calculate the tax from the item amount The system reverse calculates tax from the line item price on sales and the item cost on purchases On sales transactions it reverse calculates the taxable base by subtracting the tax amount from the total amount on the line trailer GIM supports two kinds of reverse calculations as specified by the tax method in the tax rate Example For tax method 01 the calculation works as follows Tax Amount Tax Rate Item Price 1 Tax Rate 0 10 100 00 1 10 0 10 90 90 9 09 Tax Base Item Price Tax Amount 100 00 9 09 90 91 FAQAD 352 User Guide Master Data In contrast for tax method 11 regressive taxation the calculation is as follows Tax Amount ltem Price Tax Rate 100 00 0 10 10 00 Tax Base Item Price Tax Amount 100 00 10 00 90 00 To set up a reverse calculated tax do the following In the address maintenance program set Tax In to Yes The tax included status for the customer supplier ship to address determines the default tax included status on transactions The transaction tax included status becomes the default status for line items In Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 set Allow Tax Included to Yes for all tax rates applied to items that already include tax In addition specify Tax Method 01 or 11 Tax is reverse calculated only for transactions in which the transaction or item Tax In status is Yes and the tax
34. 00 Accrued Amt 40 00 Variance Amt Vouchered Amt 0 00 The pending voucher is not closed until you close each pending voucher line Any potential variance amount is displayed This amount will be booked if you close the associated line Closing pending vouchers for logistics charges does not happen automatically like it does for receivers when you voucher the remaining open quantity on the receiver There are two scenarios where the system automatically closes a pending voucher for logistics charges e If the logistics charge has been defined with Close Accruals on First Voucher set to Yes the Close Line field in Voucher Maintenance defaults to Yes also If you do not change this setting the pending voucher is closed automatically by the system when the voucher amount equals the remaining open amount If you choose the Auto Select option and set Voucher Open Qty Amt to Yes the system automatically closes the selected pending vouchers unless you change the Close Line field to No Use the fields in Logistics Charge Matching Maintenance to maintain invoice amounts display details and close pending vouchers shown in Logistics Charge Matching Detail Logistics Accounting 259 Invoice Amt Enter the invoice amount from the logistics supplier This field defaults to the open amount on the pending voucher if Voucher Open Qty Amt was set to Yes Details If Yes a frame displays the pending voucher order line information and the accrue
35. 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 16 AQAD Customers Menu Suppliers Menu Salespersons Menu Employees Menu Address List Type Maintenance Address List Type Browse Address Code Change Company Address Maintenance Global Tax Management GTM Country Code Menu Delivery Transit Time Menu Sales Orders Invoices Customer Schedules Accounts Receivable Project Realization Management and Service Support Management modules Purchasing Supplier Schedules Accounts Payable and Service Support Management modules Sales Orders Invoices Accounts Receivable Project Realization Management and Service Support Management modules Service Support Management Shop Floor Control Repetitive Address maintenance Address maintenance Address maintenance System reports and screens Bill to ship to addresses in Purchasing Ship to address in Accounts Payable Printed on outgoing documents such as sales orders invoices service contracts statements and draft payments Addresses for entities Addresses for sites required for Global Tax Management GTM and Enterprise Material Transfer EMT See Section 2 Global Tax Management beginning on page 309 Taxes Intrastat address maintenance delivery times user maintenance Order entry functions Addresses 181 Menu Name Wher
36. 2 100 A L E d It A t Voucher Confirmation co Payable Entries created for item 100 00 3 100 00 cost 3 and tax 4 10 00 4 10 00 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt Expensed Expensed Entries created for received Purchases Item Receipts item cost 1 but not for tax E 100 00 Expensed Accounts Expensed Voucher Confirmation Entries created for item Item Receipts Payable Purchases 100 00 100 00 10 00 cost 2 and tax 3 10 00 FAQAD Processing GTM 385 Returned Items When you return items the system clears the item cost and the tax from the accounts updated by the original receipt and the voucher if you processed the return after paying the supplier invoice Reporting Printing Tax Information on Documents To print tax detail information on documents such as sales orders two fields must be Yes Print Tax Detail on Reports in Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 Print Trailer in the document print program Tax Reports Tax reports are located in the Tax History Menu 2 13 15 Tax Detail by Transaction Inquiry 2 13 15 2 Tax Detail by Transaction Report 2 13 15 3 EC Sales Listing 2 13 15 8 VAT Registration Number Report 2 13 15 9 AR Tax by Transaction Report 2 13 15 13 AR Tax by Tax Rate Report 2 13 15 14 AP Tax by Transaction Report 2 13 15 16 AP Tax by Tax Rate Report 2 13 15 17 Note T
37. 3 22 2 to review an item s inventory transactions by transaction number Use Lot Actual Bill Inquiry 3 22 3 to display components used to make a lot serial controlled item Show Duplicates Enter Yes to allow transactions to appear more than once in an inquiry display For example a purchase receipt RCT PO can appear once in relation to a work order issue ISS WO and again in relation to an inventory status change ISS CHL Enter No to have transactions appear only in the first sequence found Inventory Control 295 Max Workfiles Enter a number telling the system how many workfiles to create during execution The default is 500 Entering a value greater than your system s processing capacity can cause the system to fail To reduce the number of workfile records narrow the range of items selected Use Lot Where Used Inquiry 3 22 4 to display all top level items containing a lot serial numbered component Show Duplicates Enter Yes to allow transactions to appear more than once in an inquiry display Enter No to have transactions appear only in the first sequence found Performing Cycle Counts You can count and compare actual on hand inventory balances with system maintained quantities using either of two counting methods Cycle counting Inventory Control Physical counting Physical Inventory In each method you count inventory by site location item and lot serial number Cycle counting involves counting g
38. 3 Currency price list product line with item number blank 4 Currency price list with product line and item number blank If no match is found the item base price displays converted to the currency of the order Default price lists are derived in different ways depending on the kind of transaction FAQAD 90 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Purchase Orders Price lists are associated with suppliers in Supplier Maintenance and provide defaults when purchase orders blanket orders and supplier scheduled orders are created Customer Scheduled Orders Price lists are associated with customers in Customer Maintenance and provide defaults when customer scheduled orders are created Return to Supplier RTS These service orders follow the same processing as purchase orders Return Material Authorizations A credit price list is associated with warranty and contract types This price list provides the default in RMA Maintenance and is used for RMA receipt line credits Only one price structure can be applied to each order You cannot set up a price list with base prices in a foreign currency and then access another price list to apply quantity discounts to those foreign currency prices You can create price lists and discount tables under the same pricing code If you do remember to consider the following If you create minimum or maximum price ranges you must ensure that they include any range set on the associated
39. 30 70 Calculations are then performed for price list A 70 70 x 1 20 14 70 14 56 As before the total discount is 44 and the net price is 56 But the discount posted for price list A has changed from 20 to 14 and the discount for price list B has changed from 24 to 30 When Discount Sequence Numbers Are the Same It is possible for two or more price lists to have the same sequence numbers In this case the discount is proportioned between the two lists according to the contribution of each The calculation involved for each price list is as follows 1 individual discount factor total additive discount x list price list price x total cascading factor The discount factor 1 discount percent Following the previous example the discount calculation for price list A would be Discount factor 1 20 8 Discount 1 8 5 x 100 100 x 7 8 17 60 The individual discount for price list B would be Discount factor 1 3 7 Discount 1 7 5 100 100 x 7 8 26 40 The discount calculation works the same with a negative discount Creating a Price List Pricing 69 Use Price List Maintenance 1 10 1 1 to define item codes customer codes discounts and other information pertaining to a price list Create as many price lists as you need to satisfy your pricing requirements If you do not use price lists the system uses the Price
40. 368 User Guide Master Data Memo Items Memo items are non inventory items such as office supplies By definition such items have no standard cost Figure 13 10 shows GL entries for memo items The tax point determines whether the update to AP Tax Recoverable occurs at goods receipt or invoice receipt Fig 13 10 Man i GL Entries for Memo Item Standard Cost Recoverable Tax Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Expensed Expensed AP Tax Purchases Item Receipts Recoverable Entries created for received item cost 1 and tax 2 100 00 D 100 00 10 00 10 00 z E E I A Voucher Confirmation ous ES Hle Entries created for item 100 00 8 100 00 cost 3 and tax 4 10 00 4 10 00 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt Expensed Expensed Entries created for received Purchases ltem Receipts item cost 1 but not for tax 100 00 D D 100 00 7 ly Expensed Accounts AP Tax Mind pli Lp ake Item Receipts Payable Recoverable 100 00 100 00 10 00 cost 2 and tax 3 le 3 10 00 FAQAD Processing GTM 369 Returned Items When you return items the system clears the item cost and the tax from the accounts updated by the original receipt and the voucher if you processed the return after paying the supplier invoice Non Recoverable Tax You cannot offset a non recoverable purchase tax amo
41. 4 nstalled base item movements in Installed Item Move 11 3 13 Goods sent out for processing in the Advanced Repetitive module using the programs on the Subcontract Shipping Menu 18 22 5 Note You cannot modify Intrastat history records that have been declared on a final print Trans ID 1 Reference Date l Invoice Value 0 00 cur Us0 P Flow Indicator p Statistical Value 0 01 Cur USD Commodity Code p Terms of Delivery r Net Weight UM KG Nature of Transaction p Suppl Units UM Country of Dest Disp p Reference M 1 L1 Mode of Transport P Voucher Date Country of Orgin P Address P Ste 1P Statistical Procedure P Item Number o o P Port of Arr Disp p Quantity 000 uM P VAT Registration No p Em Region of Origim Dest Port of Transshipment P Reference Specify which document contains the Intrastat data This field is normally updated by the system and displays the order type order number and order line or reference invoice number or receiver number Intrastat 279 Invoice Value Enter the invoice value in transaction currency Invoice Cur Enter the currency designation for this invoice Statistical Value Enter the statistical value of the order This field defaults from the invoice value in base currency Supplementary Units The system calculates and displays the number of supplementary units based on the supplementary UM associated with the item
42. Addresses 0 0 0 0 c eee eee een ee 341 VAT Registration Codes sese 341 Customers Suppliers and End Users 2 0 0 5 342 Product Lines and Items cu cco sereen cakir sin eee ee eee 343 Implementing Special Taxes 0 0 0 eee cece eee 343 Fax Bxemptlons 42 ue dee cada o Rate een oec ke aS 344 Tax Based on Partial Item Amounts 0 20005 345 Custom Tax Calculation Methods 0 0 00 0 00000 345 Luxury Taxes iode c mee ese ob een adios eas 347 Capped Taxes i3 da el eoe rra ed eta eiii AA era 347 Recoverable Taxes co oces cero cer eee eee 347 Value Added Taxes VAT 0 0 0 ccc eee tenes 348 Tax on TaX 4 bae bre a Pee nep een eR CREER aes 349 Discounted axes i cu coe hod esce eot XI oye e RR cea 349 Retained Taxes issu gr tcp UR ed ear pr eder tae 350 Absorbed Taxes s oc cien cra niit cece ene eee ene 351 Reverse Calculated Taxes 0 0 cece cee eee ee eee 351 Chapter 13 Processing GTM 200 cess eee eee eee 353 Calculating axes siase borne ree dee Lone eed ee 354 Specifying Tax Data coded ore eae ee See ee oe 356 Viewing Tax Amounts 0 eee eee eee eee nes 359 Correcting Transaction Tax Amounts 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee nee 361 General Ledger Effects 0 eee eee 362 FAQAD Contents Standard COoSU ooo sup ep wee e SEE ee eee eee 363 Average Cost c 664 Ada ue BERNER RI E E ER EG Y bond 375 von E 385 Prin
43. Break categories are assigned to item numbers Planning for Best Pricing To use best pricing you need to plan analysis codes and price lists How you use analysis codes depends on how you organize items and customers How you use price lists also depends on how you organize items but also on your product structures and whether you manufacture configured products offer discounts on quantity volume and many other factors FAQAD 50 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Planning Analysis Codes To plan analysis codes do the following 1 Collect and review your company s current pricing policies procedures and associated structures Determine the benefit of using analysis codes with your current or planned pricing practices Analysis codes are best suited to extensive complex pricing structures If you decide to use analysis codes determine how you want to group inventory items and customers in relation to pricing Establish a list of unique codes identifying these groups For each customer and item group determine how you want to select members using the conditions available in Analysis Code Selection Maintenance Consider the usefulness of combining analysis codes into hierarchical pricing structures All attributes of child analysis codes are inherited by the associated parent analysis code Create a visual diagram of how you want to link analysis codes Review and modify all analysis codes defined and determin
44. Create inventory transactions such as unplanned issues and receipts or inventory transfers Monitor inventory transactions and history records created elsewhere in the system including lot serial tracing Generate reports and inquiries on the value and availability of inventory Perform cycle counts to verify inventory quantities on hand Receipts to inventory and issues from inventory change a location s inventory balance and affect the General Ledger GL Inventory Control provides a complete audit trail of all inventory transactions and enables you to track tools documents and non inventory items but not work in process items Use it to verify inventory by performing inventory counts and comparing actual quantities with system quantities Two counting methods are supported cycle counting and physical inventory counting Setting Up Inventory Control Inventory Control 3 24 contains three types of settings Inventory Count Parameters These determine how the system handles inventory balance variations during cycle counting and physical inventory Tolerances can be set based on item ABC class Accounting Parameters These determine costing issues whether GL transactions are created for inventory transactions and other inventory accounting parameters Picking Logic Before the system can move inventory it must know what inventory to select or pick The picking logic specified here determines how the system
45. Domain Account Control 36 1 in the target domain is used Deleting Sites You can use Site Maintenance to delete a site record The system performs a number of validations if you attempt to delete a site to ensure that it is not referenced and required by other data and transactions You cannot delete a site if it is associated with any of the following FAQAD 34 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Locations Inventory quantities Item site planning data Open quantity purchase requisitions Purchase orders with an open quantity to receive Purchase order receipt history data Sales quotes with an open quantity to release Sales orders with an open quantity to ship or an invoiced quantity Open work orders Physical inventory count tags Inventory movement security records Projects project activity orders worksheets or worksheet detail records created using Project Realization Management PRM functions Family hierarchies family level plans or end item operations plans created using Enterprise Operations Plan functions If a primary site passes all these validations the system performs additional domain related validations All connection records must also be able to be deleted Ina multiple database environment the system checks that all databases are connected before you can delete a primary site record If no other restrictions apply to the deletion the primary site is deleted and all
46. EDI number is specified FAQAD 184 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Company Addresses for Purchase Orders Use Company Address Maintenance to enter a company s bill to and ship to addresses for purchasing When the site code on a purchase order line corresponds to a company address code that company address is used as a ship to address when printing purchase orders When using consolidated order processing this allows a single purchase order to be printed for multiple ship to addresses Company Address and GTM Use Company Address Maintenance to set up tax environments for company addresses Global Tax Management calculates taxes based on company address rather than site Set up each site with a company address record that uses the same address code as the site code On taxable transactions the system uses the site address to select the correct line item tax environment To provide defaults for missing address codes set up a special address code called taxes If you enter a line item ship from or ship to site with no corresponding address code the taxes address code is used to select the line item tax environment Company Address and 1099 Tax Reporting In the United States the Internal Revenue Service requires companies to submit an annual 1099 form on some kinds of payments to certain suppliers A federal tax ID can be reported as a payer on a 1099 report only when A company address record exists with that federal
47. Entry 3 16 11 Tag Count Entry accepts all quantities even those that are out of tolerance Enter any changes resulting from post freeze inventory transactions Example The frozen quantity of Item Z is 100 After inventory freeze 50 units of Item Z are issued The inventory count shows 47 units of Item Z on hand Enter a count quantity of 97 50 47 Tag Number 1 Site 10000 Location 100 Raw Materials Assemblies Item Number 22 100 UM EA Description CORD POWER UK San Diego Main Plant ABC Class Lot Serial Ref Qty Counted 689 0 Count UM EA Count Conv 1 0000 Counted By leam Date Counted 03 03 1994 l Qty Recounted Recount UM Recount Conv Recounted By Date Recounted Physical Inventory 307 Reviewing Results After entering count results review the results using Inventory Variance Report 3 16 18 Look for out of tolerance quantities or other problems You can print the report by variance amount Recount out of tolerance items Use Tag Recount Entry 3 16 12 to enter recount information on the same item tags or bulk tags used for the initial count Zeroing Voiding Unused Tags Before a count is complete all tags must be either counted or voided Use Uncounted Tag Report Update 3 16 15 to ensure that all item and bulk tags are accounted for This report shows only tags that have not been voided or set to zero Set Tag Count to Zero Some tags may be left over either because ite
48. Group Memberships Use Maintain Users in Group 1 9 1 3 to change group memberships You can add replace or remove a user from one or more groups Changes can be made to more than one group at a time as when a user in several design groups transfers to another department or leaves the company FAQAD 112 User Guide Master Data Fig 4 8 Maintain Users in Groups 1 9 1 3 Fig 4 9 Maintain Users in Groups 1 9 1 3 Add User FAQAD mH COG alt 4 User ID mfj Mike F Johnson Options fi 1 aaa User 2 Replace User 3 Remove User After you select the option you want one of the following frames displays Adding Users to Groups Choose option 1 to add users to groups The Add User frame displays Maintain Users in Groups ESI Ol AgG RI n User ID mfj Mike F Johnson Options 1 1 Add User 2 Replace User 3 Remove User Add User Expire Date Copies Output List Groups for User ID tmd Tamara M Dillon Available Groups Selected Groups i elecl Remove gt Expire Date Copies Output To modify these user attributes enter new values List Groups for User ID Optionally specify the ID of a user to display only groups to which this user belongs or leave blank to display all defined PCC groups to which the user being added does not currently belong Specifying groups can be useful when defining one user s membership so that it resembles
49. Guide Master Data gt For details see the PRO PLUS User Guide FAQAD Use Average Cost Accounting Report 3 21 17 to list selected transactions involving average cost computations The report shows quantity unit cost and inventory value for the beginning balance the change data and the ending balance Use Transactions Delete Archive 3 21 23 to remove transactions from the system when online history is no longer needed Creating Lot Serial Number History Lot serial control is an inventory attribute assigned in Item Master Maintenance When you mark an item as lot serial controlled you cannot issue or receive the item without specifying a number As transactions are processed for an item its lot serial number is included in transaction history Lot serial numbers provide greater tracking control by creating records of an item s movement through the manufacturing process Note The PRO PLUS WIP Lot Trace module WLT affects lot serial collection and reporting features while adding detailed component work in process WIP and finished goods lot serial tracing and reporting options If you are using the optional PRO PLUS module WIP Lot Trace is available as menu option 3 22 13 To review lot serial history information use the programs on the Lot Serial Number Menu 3 22 Use Lot Transactions by Date Browse 3 22 1 to review an item s inventory transactions by date Use Lot Transactions by Tran Browse
50. List Copy Source Price List Target Price Lstjzke 2 P Target Currency CAD P um JP Item Number p To Start 2 Expire Adjustment Cur Cony Factor 9 2 Source Currency p Clear Supplier Price O Create Supplier Item Clear Target List O Create Target List O Supplier Merge Lists Update Item Price Round to Two Decimal Places Do xx o Update O Round to Nearest Whole Number x 00 o Print Audit Trail O Round to Nearest Ten x0 00 o Round to Nearest One Hundred x00 00 o Round to Nearest One Thousand x000 00 Output Batch ID O Q Source Price List Enter a valid price list code to be used as the source of the data copied to the target price list Target Price List Enter the code to be used as the destination of the copy Target and source can be the same In this case an ending effective date is added to the source list and a starting effective date to the target If the target list is not the same as the source and does not exist it can be created If it does exist it can be either cleared or added to Source Currency Enter the currency of the prices being copied Pricing information and currency rate from the source price list are copied to the target price list for the range of item numbers specified Target Currency Enter the currency for the system to use on the target prices The source and target currency can be the same leave blank for the syst
51. Major Redisgn of Coolers Quality Module Item Specification Detail Records Click the arrow to select a test Sequence Op Characteristic Specification step an i WIDTH 1414 25 E asterisk HEIGHT 3 7513 95 indicates selection DEPTH 11 75 12 25 PCR PCO Detail Maintenance Item Specification Used to add modify and deactivate test steps for an item specification that has already been added to a PCO Records are not actually deleted Deactivating a record sets an ending effective date when the PCO is incorporated Maintaining Trailers Use Trailer Maintenance to maintain important PCO data fields and to close or reopen a PCO This program displays release process information such as routing slip distribution group date submitted and date approved It is the only option that appears in the PCO Maintenance section menu for closed but undistributed PCOs PCO Maintenance ecmttrl p Trailer Maintenance Number PCOO00007 ID Database Title Major Redisgn of Coolers Expected Cost 10 000 0 Mandatory 6 12 2002 Bi Routing Slip requesti Submitted Distribution ACCT1 Approved Disposition Released Effective Closed PCORe Implemented Closed Date Closed If Yes the PCO is closed If No the PCO is opened A PCO cannot be reopened once it is distributed Product Change Control 131 Expected Cost Optional The expected cost of the PCO Disposition Optional A user defined
52. Master Delete Archive clltup p 1 22 24 Compliance Control clclpm p Site Security Site security is not part of the compliance module but is frequently used in conjunction with other compliance features Site security enables administrators to control user access to sites by individual and group membership It integrates user maintenance and security control with inventory transactions at the site level Only authorized users can process inventory transactions for secured sites Site Security Maintenance 36 3 15 is located on the System Security Menu in the Manager Functions module Compliance 145 Inventory Attributes Attribute information can be entered on work orders increasing control over the tracking of materials through manufacturing and into inventory With these attributes you can use batch and other work order processes to meet your business requirements There are several ways to assign default inventory attributes and change existing attributes such as assay percentage grade expire date and inventory status Especially important is the ability to assign an inventory status during work order or purchase order receipt This status can be used to override the status normally assigned to a location Using receipt statuses reduces the need for separate physical locations for regulated business practices Note You do not need to have the Compliance module to assign inventory statuses during receipt However this feature is
53. Pur ina P Run Time Setup Time EMT Type NON EMT P pt qadis5 Network Code P Routing code P BOWFormla f ouo The Pur Mfg purchase manufacture code determines how items are planned costs are calculated and cumulative lead times are calculated This code can be Purchased obtained from suppliers Manufactured produced internally typically with work orders Line produced internally typically on a production line Flow produced internally typically on a flow production line Routable produced internally Distribution obtained from distribution sites Configured configured to customer order and produced internally Family a special type of item used for operations planning The system assumes items with a blank Pur Mfg code are manufactured FAQAD 22 User Guide Master Data b See Chapter 3 Pricing for details on using price lists b These programs are discussed in User Guide Financials A FAQAD Cost Data The item cost data is divided into three sections Price and tax data General ledger GL cost Current cost Price Price and costs are entered in base currency specified in Domain Account Control The item master price is the default list price in sales transactions if price lists are not being used You can only assign one list price directly to an item The taxable status and tax code default from the product line and are used in the Purchasing
54. Sales Orders Order Ord Date Price Dt Ln List Item Number Qty Ordered UM soio039 06 12 2002 06 12 2002 1 PR 00001 10 10000 3 0 EA Customer Enter a customer number Price List Enter a price list that applies to this customer If you want to see all orders for this customer leave blank Open SOs Only Yes if you want to see open sales orders only Choose No if you do not want to limit the inquiry Pricing 79 Fig 3 22 Customer Orders by Price List Inquiry 1 10 1 15 FAQAD 80 User Guide Master Data Fig 3 23 Sales Order Price Inquiry 1 10 1 17 Tip To open a sales order for repricing in Sales Order Repricing 7 1 11 set Fixed Price in the order header or line item to No FAQAD Viewing Sales Order Discounts The system calculates and displays price lists discount factors net prices line item amounts and order amounts online After line items have been processed the system recalculates previous lines based upon quantity breaks if subsequent lines result in a different total accumulated order quantity To view this information use Sales Order Price Inquiry 1 10 1 17 Sales Order Price Inqui R4 19S esl el Sales Order S010040 001 PEI Computers Ltd Ln Item Number Qty Ordered UM List Price Discount Price 1 cub 100 0 ea 100 00 0 0 100 00 When the 10 10000 3 0 ea 15 00 0 0 15 00 3 fg0021 1 0 BA 10 00 0 0 10 00 cursor IS positioned on the line item Sales Order Pri
55. Set Clear Action Status O Combine Sales Orders 1 New Action Status Match Sold To Check Credit Hold Match Ship To Hold Over Credit Limit T Match Bill To Check Past Due Invoices 1 Match P O Include Sales Orders Include RMA Issues Days 30 Recalculate Taxes Amount 0 00 Output Batch ID O Q Use the Sales Order Sold To Bill To and Ship To fields to narrow the range of sales orders to be processed Leave blank to include all orders Use the Last Price Date Order Date and Due Date fields to select orders to process by date Check Credit Enter Yes to check customer credit limits and past due invoices and generate an audit report Enter No to bypass credit check and generate audit report only default is Yes If Yes you can change the values of related credit check fields Print Sales Order If Yes the Print field is set to Yes on all orders that are repriced This allows them to be selected for printing even if they have been printed before Set Clear Action Status If Check Credit is Yes enter Yes the default to check customer credit status prior to release or No to bypass status check If Yes the value of New Action Status is assigned to the Action Status field on the sales order for orders exceeding credit limits Pricing 83 New Action Status If Set Clear Action Status is Yes leave blank to clear the status Hd to place on hold or any other valid status code default is blank Make sure tha
56. Zones are bounded by a beginning and ending range of postal codes Assign a starting and ending effective date as needed Freight Zone Maintenance only sets up zones Use Freight Charges Maintenance 2 20 10 to determine charges Freight Class Maintenance Use Freight Class Maintenance 2 20 7 to set up classes used in calculating the freight charges defined in Freight Charges Maintenance Freight class distinguishes different types of shipments requiring different charges For example a fragile class is charged at a higher rate because it requires extra handling Addresses 209 Fig 6 20 l Freight Class z Maintenance Freight Class A 2 20 7 Description SPECIAL CHARGES Associate freight classes with items in Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 Freight Charges Maintenance Use Freight Charges Maintenance 2 20 10 to relate a freight list class and zone and to specify how charges are calculated Use start and end dates to phase in new charges if fees rise or fall after a certain date Fig 6 21 Freight Charges z Maintenance Freight List RO1 NTAX Amtrak Railway NonTax 2 20 10 Site 15000 Currency USD Zone Any USA Freight Class 00000010 UM TN Maximum Weight 1 000 gt Minimum weight Start 01 12 2000 End 12 31 2002 Freight Charge 4 0 Freight Charge Per UM Over minos 1 Freight Charge Per Fr List wlos Maximum and Minimum Weight Enter the highest and lowest weight that can be u
57. a credit terms code with a base date to ensure that the customer does not have to pay too soon When you specify a Base Date the system uses the later of the invoice ship date or the base date when calculating discount and due dates Credit Terms Interest Credit terms interest percentages enable you to Accrue estimated inflation increases included in sales and purchases Track the interest component of an item price or cost separately from its list price component Separate postings to accounts for credit terms interest applied and accrued are required under generally accepted accounting principles since currency gain loss is only an estimate FAQAD 204 User Guide Master Data Fig 6 17 Credit Terms Maintenance Credit Terms Maintenance 2 19 1 Terms Code 2 10 25 Description 2 10PROX 25PROX Multiple Due Dates 9 Disc 95 0 00 Due Days 0 Base Date Disc Days 0 Minimum Due Days 0 Base Days 9 Disc Date 4 0 Due Date From 1 Grace Days From 3 Terms Interest Disc Date Due Date 0 00 Pct Daily Overdue Int 0 00 Pct Dating Description DUE 30 DAYS FROM INVOI Base Days In hyperinflationary environments it is a common practice to offer a favored customer a due date that is later than the standard due date These free days are not subject to credit terms interest You can specify these days as Base Days in the credit terms code When the system calculates due dates it appends the B
58. a joint work order set Choose Yes to allow any item to be received as an unplanned receipt Compliance 173 Managing Controlled Substances Controlled substance programs tables and fields do not interfere with functions in other modules The functions on the Controlled Substance menu listed in Table 5 8 are used to record Health Industry Numbers HIN National Drug Codes NDC Export Control Classification Numbers ECCN Harmonized Tariff Codes Regional Value Content RVC values and Preference Criteria Codes for controlled substances import export and international agreement compliance Table 5 8 Menu Description Program Controlled 1 22 16 Controlled Substances Menu a er en 1 22 16 1 Controlled Authority Maintenance clctamt p 1 22 16 2 Controlled Authority Inquiry clctaiq p 1 22 16 4 Controlled Customer Maintenance clctemt p 1 22 16 5 Controlled Customer Browse clbr003 p 1 22 16 7 Controlled Site Maintenance clctsmt p 1 22 16 8 Controlled Site Browse clbr004 p 1 22 16 10 Controlled Item Maintenance clctpmt p 1 22 16 11 Controlled Item Report clctprp p 1 22 16 13 General License Maintenance clglimt p 1 22 16 14 General License Report clglirp p 1 22 16 16 Individual License Maintenance clilimt p 1 22 16 17 Individual License Master Report clilirp p Figure 5 17 shows a typical work flow for setting up and managing controlled substances FAQAD 174 User Guide Master Data Fig 5 17 Controlled Su
59. address record GTM attempts to match the address to a tax zone for the country state province county and city If it cannot find a tax zone for the country it assigns the error zone To make it easier to identify error conditions set up a meaningful code such as ERROR ZONE Setting Up Tax Types Tax types are individually calculated and reported as regional taxes or tax exemptions Examples include Canadian PST GST California sales tax federal excise tax On transactions the system calculates taxes for line items and trailer charges based on the tax types specified in their tax environments A separate tax type is required for each tax or tax exemption you report separately The tax detail reports print in alphanumeric order by tax type code Consider this when assigning codes for tax types Set up tax types in Tax Type Maintenance 2 13 1 1 To verify data setup Implementing GTM 321 use Tax Type Browse 2 13 1 2 and Report 2 13 1 3 Tax Type CAN ONT PST Tax Type Enter a 16 character code for a tax or tax exemption that is separately calculated and reported to a specific jurisdiction Description Enter the description of the tax type Description prints on most reports and browses as space permits Setting Up Tax Classes and Usages Depending on your tax system set up tax class and or tax usage codes to accommodate differences in taxation within a tax zone Table 12 2 lists some typical situations and de
60. an audit trail report of database updates and any errors encountered For example if two PCOs with the same effective date update the same records only changes from the first PCO are incorporated The second is highlighted as an error on the report Assuming that Incorporation Selection has been run PCO Incorporation is essentially a batch update process requiring no input from the user Typically it is set up and executed as a daily batch job After incorporation MRP and DRP automatically use the new effective dates in all planning processes Implementation Once the effective date of a PCO is reached the revision level of changed item numbers must be updated This field displays in the Rev field of Item Data Maintenance Implementation 1 9 7 13 copies changes to item data records from PCOs effective on the current date into the corresponding item master records Implementation is designed to be a daily batch job requiring no user input Product Change Control 139 Closing PCRs and PCOs Use PCR PCO Close 1 9 14 to close or reopen any PCO that has not been assigned an effective date in Incorporation Selection 1 9 7 4 You can close PCOs that have been released and distributed but not incorporated Close undistributed PCOs in the trailer of PCO Maintenance Closed If Yes the PCR or PCO is closed This field is reference only and does not establish a link to another PCO in the same way as Close PCO to PCO function in PC
61. can create a shipper for the transferred items Receipts A receipt is when inventory is brought into a location Receipts increase the quantity on hand of an item at a particular location Use the following programs to receive inventory that does not have an existing or open order Use Receipts Unplanned 3 9 to receive miscellaneous inventory such as floor stock items sent back from production or materials from a manufacturing order that has been closed from an accounting standpoint Use Receipts Sales Order Return 3 10 to tag a receipt as a return only if you do not use Sales Orders Invoices This is not a complete return since it does not update sales or commission history and does not generate a credit invoice Use Receipts Return to Stock 3 11 to return to stock miscellaneous items that have been temporarily moved elsewhere Use Receipts Backward Exploded 3 12 to increase inventory quantity for an item at a designated site and location and decrease inventory for its components Backward exploded receipts are often used in kitting or simple assembly operations where there is no need for a work order Recording receipt of a finished item indicates that an associated set of items was used Issues An issue sends inventory to a different location For example when components are issued to a work order they are removed from the stocking location and issued to the work in process WIP location Inventory issues re
62. cannot match the exempt amounts to the exemption tax types in the tax environment Aggregate Reporting 1 In Tax Environment Maintenance 2 13 5 1 assign the default tax type NON TAX to each tax environment in which exemptions can be reported in aggregate You do not have to set up this type itis supplied by default Once you do this GIM automatically classifies all non taxable transaction amounts as type NON TAX In the respective maintenance program set the Taxable status of all exempt customers suppliers product lines items service categories and trailer charges to No Implementing GTM 345 When the system encounters a non taxable transaction amount it applies a 0 tax rate to it This rate is already set up in the system Tax Based on Partial Item Amounts By default GIM calculates tax for 100 of the item amount However tax can be based on a smaller percentage In these situations set up a tax base record in Tax Base Maintenance 2 13 1 13 specifying the appropriate Base Percent Assign this tax base to multiple tax types and tax rates if the Base Percent is the same for all situations Custom Tax Calculation Methods The transaction detail screen displays the following tax related amounts for line items and trailer charges Total line item or trailer charge amount Line item or trailer charge amount not subject to tax Line item or trailer charge amount that is subject to tax Total tax amount Re
63. cee eect ee 39 Status Defaults s roa 0 cece en E 40 Overissue Policy 0 cece eee cette ences 41 Restricting Transactions 2 0 0 eee ene 42 Chapter3 Pricing osusus i ohasu EROR REY ERES PE 45 Introduction to Pricing eee I 46 Using Best Pricing s diccre kdo nda ek bec esa epo ERA ERR RR i 48 FAQAD Contents Planning for Best Pricing 49 Setting Pricing Defaults 0 eee 51 Setting Up Analysis Codes 0 0 00 e cece cee ee 52 Setting Up Item Price Break Categories 00 59 Creating and Maintaining Price Lists 00005 61 Repricing Orders in Sales Order Repricing 4 80 Repricing in Sales Order Maintenance 000005 84 Understanding Sales Order Maintenance Fields 86 Using List Discount Table Pricing leeeeee ee 88 Creating Price Lists l eleleeeeeeeee ee 89 Generating Price Lists by Item 0 0 0 0c eee eee eee 92 Copying Price Lists 0 0 2 cece ce teenies 94 Processing List Discount Prices 0 0 ce eee ee eee 97 Pricing Setup dele c vU t aee eae bree s 98 Chapter 4 Product Change Control L 99 IntroductiOn 4 en eo ced ees t and eee e Ce Uere d 100 PCR PCO Lite Cycle unco 63 bias pega eet o bero hi aa edens 103 PCR Life Cycle oi eta bene be bed hie ARE ERU Eur 103 PCO Lite Cycle uoa ebrei dais RR RR ta 104 Setting
64. code to describe the arrangement grouping or urgency of the PCO Validated against codes set up in Generalized Codes Maintenance 36 2 13 for field ecm_ecr_dspn PCO Ref Information only A cross reference comment for a closed PCO Mandatory Optional The latest date on which the PCO must be Tip implemented A warning message is generated in Incorporation ve dude Selection 1 9 7 4 if an effective date is assigned to the PCO that is instruction to later than this date manufacturing since the manufacturing group is responsible Reviewing PCO Data for PCO incorporation Use PCR PCO Detail Inquiry 1 9 2 8 to display PCR or PCO details Use Print PCR PCO 1 9 9 1 to select and print a range of PCO PCR details Selection criteria include number type and created by Set a comment page range to include comment pages attached to the PCO The Approvals field determines whether or not approvals are printed To print PCOs in various life cycle stages use the status fields Pre submission Submitted Approved Released Incorporated Implemented Closed Use PCO Status Browse 1 9 11 to review the current status of PCRs and PCOs The following statuses reflect the position of the PCR or PCO in the change life cycle Submitted Rejected Approved Released PCO only Distributed PCO only Incorporated PCO only Implemented PCO only Closed Use Approval Browse 1 9 6 2 to review sign offs for a given PCO
65. connection records are also deleted from other domains in this and connected databases The system does not check other domains when you delete a connection record Locations A location defines an area such as a shelf bin or tank within a site Since inventory locations are a subset of site the same location codes can be used for different sites A site can have an unlimited number of locations Although the system permits the use of blank location codes this is not recommended Note The Transfer Ownership field is active only if you are using the optional Supplier Consignment Inventory module This module is described in User Guide Distribution B Location Maintenance Site 10000 San Diego Main Plant Location 100 Descriptio Inventory Status good P 1992 B Single Item Single Lot Ref O Capacity 4 000 0 Reserved Locations Transfer Ownership O Select a location naming convention that takes advantage of how inventory is detail allocated picked When work order and sales order picklists are printed the system looks through locations for available inventory and makes detail allocations It searches location codes in ascending or descending order according to the setting in Inventory Control 3 24 Because of this numeric location codes such as 1000 1100 and 8000 are recommended If you use significant codes and allocate in ascending order the system allocates inventory in alphabetic order so that I
66. considered and applicable discounts combined to determine the best possible net price for a line item as illustrated in Figure 3 14 List Price List LP Hen B1 Best Price Best List Selected Selected zo Dw o6 B2 B3 M E1 o x 9 B3 A Price Calculated a from Set Applicable Lists Combinable c1 Selected ON m Lists N diii CA Best Set N c2 C2 Selected C3 F1 BC2 B C3 E b N zu 4 p N SS Y F 4 Base Best List Selected Price Calculated X ais Combinable BC1 1 from Set 1 aN I 1 7 Best Set N Lists F 4 BC2 l Selected i BC2 1 BC2 B3 1 a 4 N d N 4 Exclusive Best List Selected NS SS d Lists E1 E1 E2 Or item master price if no list price list exists Best price is validated against min max of list price list if used Multiple price lists may apply The best discount is The best base price plus all combinable discounts or The best base price plus the best base combinable price list or The best exclusive price list When the system has found all qualifying price lists it then determines what combinations result in the best pric
67. customer Code Enter a valid analysis code This code is considered the parent Linked Code Enter the code you want to link to This code is considered the child Description Enter a brief description of this link You can view analysis code links in two ways Use Analysis Code Link Inquiry 1 8 8 to view codes linked to a parent code Use Analysis Code Where Linked Inquiry 1 8 9 to view child analysis codes and the parent codes they are linked to FAQAD Building Analysis Codes Use Analysis Code Detail Build 1 8 19 to build a table of items or customers for each analysis code based on analysis code rules and links previously defined Build analysis codes whenever these rules or links are changed when new codes are created and when new items and customers are created When you execute this program the system displays a message listing the number of nodes exploded and the execution start and stop time Pricing Control 1 10 1 24 gives you the option to automatically build analysis codes when you add new customers and items or make changes to existing customer and item records However if you change condition fields for an analysis code you must still run the build program This utility builds the data by analysis code type Warning Interrupting this utility can disable price lists that use analysis codes This utility must be completed in its entirety As the build proceeds the system displays Process Start
68. discount table This is because the minimum and maximum prices on price tables take precedence over discount table prices Different price structures can be entered for specific units of measure This enables you to set up discounts so that if for example you buy a case CS you get a better price than if you buy only one unit EA Total This Level GL Cost and Total GL Cost are display only fields The categories whose elements are included are material labor burden and subcontract Total GL cost is the total GL cost for the item s default site It includes all cost elements for this level and lower levels Total This Level GL Cost is used as the default purchase price It includes this level costs excluding any overhead cost elements Both purchase and selling prices are for one unit of the item using the item unit of measure Pricing 91 Fig 3 27 Price List Maintenance Price List 10 Currency USD 1 10 2 1 Product Line Item Number 006 UM ea Start 01 01 1996 Expire 12 31 1997 Amount Type D P Price D Discount M Markup L List Item Master List Price Total This Level GL Cost Total GL Cost Min Qty Disc Pct Disc Pct Disc Pct Price List Enter a code identifying the price list Currency Specifies the currency of the transactions that are subject to this price list A price list is used only if the currency of the transaction is the same as the price list currency Product Line Enter the product line a
69. display only approvals required of groups that include that user Fig 4 27 PCR PCO Approval 1 9 6 1 Number Document Type PCO Appr Group User ID hme Next Only 1 Unsigned Only DocNbr Appr Grp PCOD00071234 PCR execi PCO00008 execi Document Number Appr Cmt ByReRt PCOO00008 z m w w Unsigned Only Enter Yes to display pending approvals If Yes documents are excluded from the display when only one of several groups has given approval Enter No to display both approved disapproved and pending approvals For each required approval the group designated to perform the approval displays Appr Enter No to disapprove previously approved PCOs Enter Yes to approve previously disapproved PCOs FAQAD 134 User Guide Master Data P See Defining Approval Routings on page 114 for details FAQAD Rerouting PCOs If the reviewer disapproving a change document belongs to a group with Can Re Route set to Yes on the routing slip PCR PCO Approval prompts for a reroute level Reroute level signifies the magnitude of the problem noted by the reviewer If you do not want to reset approvals enter zero for the reroute level Higher reroute levels require more groups to reapprove the document When a reroute level is specified the system examines Severity Level for each group on the routing slip If Severity Level is less than or equal to the reroute level the system changes the approval to No indic
70. especially useful in regulated environments Batch Control Batch control enables you to assign batch numbers to work orders Batch numbers can be used for traceability and reporting You can enter batch numbers as you create work orders or add them to existing work orders through a maintenance window Component Issue Control Compliance features let you restrict items issued to work orders to those listed on the bill of material BOM or valid substitutes There is a similar control for receipts of co product by product items Lot Control You can enforce unique lot numbers define lot groups for assigning lot numbers update inventory attributes for multiple lots restrict receipts to a single lot generate reports with lot numbers as an index enter supplier lot numbers and manage expired inventory FAQAD 146 User Guide Master Data Fig 5 1 Compliance Features and Compliance Control FAQAD Multi Lot Inventory Detail You can change inventory assay grade status and expire date attributes based on lot serial number Controlled Substances You can maintain lists of regulatory agencies link a regulatory or control number to an address code or site associate a regulatory or control number to an inventory item and record general ledger GL and individual license information for U S exports Setting Up Compliance Compliance features are activated and configured in Compliance Control 1 22 24 Batch C
71. field in the item master Price List Maintenance Price List PR 0001 Customer Analysis Code D200 Item Analysis Code Currency USD UM ea Start Expire Description Amount Type Qty Type Quantity Comb Type Fig 3 15 Price List Maintenance 1 10 1 1 Custorners in District200 All Config Disc O Manual Max Orders 0 Disc Sequence 10 0 Print Z Promotion Type Promotion Cost Set Comments Price List Enter a code identifying the price list Customer Analysis Code Enter a customer address code analysis code or leave blank for all customers Item Analysis Code Enter an item number analysis code or leave blank for all items Currency Enter the code indicating the currency for this price list The default is the base currency UM Enter a unit of measure or leave blank for all units of measure Start The first day this price list is effective If left blank the price list is effective for any date prior to the expiration date Expire The last day this price list is effective The date must be greater than or equal to the start date If left blank this implies no expiration Proceed to the next frame FAQAD 70 User Guide Master Data b See Discount Types on page 61 b See Discount Combinability on page 63 for details Tip Markup and net price lists must be of combination type base or exclusive FAQAD Description The description of
72. for Each Site Use Company Address Maintenance 2 12 to set up address records for each shipping and receiving site used in Intra EU inventory movements This program also lets you associate each site with a country and region code Fig 8 7 Company Address Specify the site Kem Em E SISSE TES ET Maintenance 2 12 code entered in Company Address Site Maintenance Address 100002 1 1 13 q n 1133821 Format Country Code Em m S A re Teiex E w Tax Filing O Tax Contro Last Filing Address Enter an address code If the code you entered is for a new record enter the address in the address fields State Enter a region code in the State field if one is required on Intrastat declarations FAQAD Intrastat 273 Entering Country Codes for Customers and Suppliers Country codes entered in the following programs become defaults for Country of Destination Dispatch on customer and supplier orders You can change these codes at order entry This is useful when the shipping receiving site of the supplier customer is in a different country from where the order is sent triangulation Use Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 to enter country codes for suppliers Use Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 to enter country codes for customers Use Ship To Maintenance 2 1 13 to enter ship to addresses for customers Entering Net Weights for Intrastat Items Use Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 or Item Inve
73. generalized codes FAQAD 318 User Guide Master Data Fig 12 1 Tax Zone Hierarchies FAQAD Tax Zone Hierarchies How you set up a tax zone depends on its position in the hierarchy To include a tax zone in the tax total and reporting for another zone specify the first zone s sums into zone The sums into zone can be at a higher level or at the same level For example a city tax zone included in provincial tax reporting sums into the provincial tax zone Or a tax zone for a suburb included in metropolitan tax reporting sums into the city tax zone In the tax zone record specify whether the first zone has its own subtotal on the main report and whether it also has its own reporting Parent Component Hierarch i P y Subtotal Reporting TaxZone ThisLevel Zone CAN Yes Yes CAN CAN QUE Yes Yes CAN ALB Yes Yes CAN QUE CAN ALB CAN ONT CAN ONT Yes Yes Phantom Hierarchy Subtotal Reporting I TaxZone ThisLevel Zone CA CA Yes Yes LA CO Yes Yes x LA CITY Yes Yes CACO RES No No PASA No Yes LA CITY PASA RES Figure 12 1 illustrates two hypothetical tax zone hierarchies Parent Component Hierarchy The Canadian provinces Quebec Alberta and Ontario are subject to both federal and provincial taxes The component tax zones CAN QUE CAN ALB and CAN ONT sum into zone CAN A
74. have entered the correct values FAQAD Compliance 161 7 When you are satisfied with the new values and the item lot and site data listed on the report change Update to Yes and run the program again Using Lot Control You can use lot control features even if Compliance Active is No in Compliance Control Table 5 6 lists lot control features Feature Table 5 6 Lot Control Features Description Lot Control Level Work Order Attribute Lot Number Field Lot Groups and Auto Lot Numbering Single Lot Receipts Expired Inventory Management Supplier Lot Numbering Reports by Lot Number Controls enforcement of unique lot numbers Lot Control Level is a database level setting See Setting Up Compliance on page 146 and Deciding on Lot Control Level on page 164 for more information If you set Lot Control Level to 0 all lot controls are turned off You can enter the lot number in the Work Order Attributes frame when Single Lot is No See Defining Inventory Attributes on page 149 for more information Define lot groups to assign lot numbers to work orders and purchase orders automatically See Automatic Lot Numbering on page 167 for more information Restrict receipts to a single lot with separate settings for work orders purchase orders and repetitive transactions See Single Lot per Receipt on page 169 for more information Manage expired inventory transactions See Expired Inventory Tran
75. i Ext Fax Telex j Added 06 12 2002 Tax IDs sort Name WalleFarge IP Tax ID Federal Tax ID State To set up bank addresses to be used in payments 1 Set up bank address information 2 Define bank accounts Use Customer Supplier Bank Maintenance 2 21 1 to set up a record for each supplier bank that receives your EFT payments This information can be included in the printout or file you send to your bank whenever you process EFT payments The system assigns customer and supplier banks an address list type of c s bank Addresses 199 Use Customer Supplier Bank Browse 2 21 2 or Report 2 21 3 to review your setup Use Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 to specify accounts for each supplier bank Record the bank code account type and other information for each account The first bank in alphanumeric sequence is the default supplier bank for each new voucher Be sure to specify at least one type 1 ALL account for each supplier Note For reference purposes you can also record customer bank accounts in Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 Supplier Maintenance Supplier Address Supplier 5001000 Temporary 1 Name General Supply Corporation Address 720 East College Avenue Address Building B 2 Address City Los Angeles State CA Post 90293 Format 0 Country United States of America USA County 001 Attention Mr Richard Avery 2 Mr Ralph Hutton Telephone 213 923 0392 r 2 Ext Fax Telex 213 923 0022 Ad
76. in some Canadian provinces Provincial Services Tax PST is based on the item amount plus the federal Goods and Services Tax GST To set up a tax on tax define the calculation priority of the two taxes and assign the included tax as the tax base of the other tax 1 In Tax Environment Maintenance 2 13 5 1 assign both tax types to the tax environment Assign the included tax type a lower sequence number than the other tax type This ensures that the included tax is calculated first In the Canadian example GST has a lower sequence 2 In Tax Base Maintenance 2 13 1 13 define a tax base and assign it to the included tax type In the Canadian example GST is the included type 3 In Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 set up tax rates for both tax types In the rate for the tax on tax specify the tax base for the included tax In the Canadian example you would set up rates for both GST and PST then specify the tax base in the PST rates Discounted Taxes In the United Kingdom and some other countries tax is assessed only on what the customer actually pays that is on the sales amount minus credit terms discounts When taxes are discounted the net order amount can vary depending on whether the credit terms discount is applied to the tax amount In Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 two settings govern the setup of discounted taxes Discount Tax at Invoice and Discount Tax at Payment For both settings the order tax amount is
77. including pending and completed approvals individual approvers and date of the approvals QAD 132 User Guide Master Data Tip Use 1 9 2 4 for PCRs Fig 4 26 Route PCO for Approval 1 9 2 16 Tip Set Unsubmt Only to No if you want to revoke a submitted PCO AQAD Routing PCRs and PCOs for Approval Route PCOs for approval using Route PCO for Approval 1 9 2 16 To route PCRs use Route PCR for Approval After a PCO is submitted it can be approved with PCR PCO Approval Once a PCR or PCO has been routed the system restricts changes to the document to ensure that the approved document is the most current If a routed PCR or PCO is accessed in the maintenance function a warning displays If you continue despite the warning you can modify the PCO but all approvals are reset to No and each group on the routing must reapprove If a group disapproves a PCO and severity levels apply the PCO can be rerouted to selected groups based on the severity of changes required Only approvals of groups that need to review the document are reset Rol GE OOO a nae Number ID DB Document Type PCO Type Dsm Group By Unsubmt Only Yes Number ID Database Title By Sub Date PCOO00007 Major Redisgn of Coolers hme PCOO0007 PCO Major Redisgn of Coolers pnm PCOO0007 1234 PCR Major Redisgn of Coolers hne Pcoo008 Minor Upgrade for 22 100 hme ITE MMM MMM 08868 amp amp A omn Database Title By Sbmt
78. inventory attributes only for purchase orders with a blank type This restriction excludes blanket purchase orders and PO returns 151 b See Inventory Attribute Active Field on page 154 Table 5 2 Inventory Attributes QAD 152 User Guide Master Data Inventory Attributes Work Flow Figure 5 4 shows a typical work flow for setting up inventory attributes Fig 5 4 Inventory Attributes Work Flow Create a work order Receive order into inventory Process work order Update inventory attributes as needed Update attributes if needed Once compliance has been activated in Compliance Control you can create and process work orders according to your normal procedures If needed you can update item attributes directly using Work Order Attribute Maintenance 1 22 4 Then receive the work order using Work Order Receipt 16 11 or Work Order Operation Backflush 16 19 After the items have been received attributes can be modified again as needed using Multi Lot Inventory Update 1 22 19 or Inventory Detail Maintenance 3 1 1 Attribute Descriptions Table 5 3 lists work order attributes Each attribute is a field in Work Order Attribute Maintenance 1 22 4 and the Attributes frame of Work Order Maintenance 16 1 Attributes lot number and batch number also appear in receipt programs and other programs FAQAD Compliance 153 Table 5 3 Attribute
79. inventory detail records 1 Choose Multi Lot Inven Detail Update 1 22 19 from the Compliance Menu Fig 5 9 Multi Lot Inven Enter BTSERS SUE ETE Detail Update gt e appropriate Item Number 1 22 19 j selection iots criteria Enter values to change in Old T Value column New Value Expire Date 109 01 2003 fl 10 01 2003 BH Enter assay v RR replacement Inventory Statusi Inspect values in the Update New Value iin column 2 Enter a value in Item Number The first lot number displays if inventory exists for this item 3 Use the lot number that displays enter a new lot number or clear the Lot Serial field to update items with blank lot serial numbers 4 Enter singly or by range sites locations and references for which you have access privileges Note Leaving Site Location or Ref blank changes inventory attributes for all sites locations and lot references 5 Enter old attribute values set the All fields and enter new attribute settings in the lower half of the frame Old Value Enter the value to be changed All If Old Value is blank and All is Yes all values are changed to New Value If Old Value is blank and All is No only blank values are changed to the New Value The field defaults to No You can change it to Yes only when Old Value is blank New Value Enter the replacement value for the field 6 Set Update to No and run the program as a report first to make sure you
80. item set up the tax usage codes to reference during transaction entry Trailer charges are subject to different tax Set up tax classes for these trailer charges rates for a tax type Set up tax class codes in Tax Class Maintenance 2 13 1 5 To verify data setup use Tax Class Browse 2 13 1 6 and Report 2 13 1 7 Tax Class 004 Tax Class Enter a 3 character code that identifies a group of customers suppliers product lines items service categories or trailer charges subject to special taxation For customers and suppliers the tax class helps determine the tax environment For product lines the tax class determines the tax rate for new items For items service categories and trailer charges the tax class helps determine the tax rate for tax types in the tax environment For more detailed tax exemption reporting remember to set up tax classes for exemptions Description Enter a description of the tax class The description prints on most reports and browses as space permits Set up tax usage codes in Tax Usage Maintenance 2 13 1 9 To verify data setup use Tax Usage Browse 2 13 1 10 and Report 2 13 1 11 Tax Usage 3 P RSL Implementing GTM 323 Tax Usage Enter an 8 character code that identifies a group of customers suppliers or items subject to special taxation on a specific transaction Description Enter a description of the tax usage The description prints on most reports and brows
81. not update the original order No other fields can be updated in this program Fig 7 25 Logistics Charge Pending Voucher Maintenance 2 15 7 FAQAD 254 Table 7 10 Internal and External Reference Sources b See User Guide Financials A for details on Voucher Maintenance FAQAD User Guide Master Data Table 7 10 shows the sources for the internal and external reference fields when pending vouchers are created for logistics charges Program Internal Reference External Reference Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 Receiver Number Packing Slip Number PO Shipper Receipt 5 13 20 Shipper Number Carrier Shipment Ref Shipments with shipping groups Pre Shipper Shipper Confirm 7 9 5 Shipper Number Carrier Shipment Ref Pre Shipper Shipper Auto Confirm Shipper Number Carrier Shipment Ref 7 9 7 Sales Order Shipments 7 9 15 Shipment ID Bill of Lading Pending Invoice Maintenance 7 13 1 Shipment ID Bill of Lading RMA Maintenance 11 7 1 1 Shipment ID Bill of Lading RMA Receipts 11 7 1 13 RMA Shipments 11 7 1 16 Distribution Order Processing 12 17 21 Shipment ID Bill of Lading Distribution Order Shipments 12 17 22 Distribution Order Processing and Shipper Number Carrier Shipment Ref Vouchering Logistics Charges When invoices arrive from logistics suppliers use Voucher Maintenance 28 1 to match the accruals on pending vouchers to the
82. on calculating taxes with Global Tax Management GTM see See Section 2 the chapters in the GTM section of this book Global t Management dr beginning on The tax point for a logistics charge is based upon the setting of Accrue en 309 Tax at Receipt for applicable tax rate in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 The value of this field applies to both inbound and outbound charges For inbound charges if Accrue Tax at Receipt is Yes taxes accrue at receipt When this field is No taxes accrue at vouchering Foroutbound charges if Accrue Tax at Receipt is Yes taxes accrue at shipment When this field is No taxes accrue at vouchering Taxes on logistics charges are not displayed to the user and do not print on formal inbound or outbound documents They can be viewed using Tax Detail by Transaction Inquiry 2 13 15 2 and Report 2 13 15 3 They can however be viewed and edited during vouchering in Voucher Maintenance 28 1 Inbound Tax Calculations When determining the tax environment for inbound charges the system uses the following data The ship from tax zone of the logistics charge supplier if available otherwise the tax zone of the purchase order line site The ship to tax zone from the purchase order line site The tax class of the logistics charge supplier if available otherwise the tax class of the purchase order line site If the system cannot find a tax environment the default tax environment from G
83. on formal shipping documents or packing lists the system prompts for additional logistics accounting information Table 7 9 PO Unit Cost Calculations with Price Lists Applied FAQAD 242 User Guide Master Data Fig 7 17 PO Shipper Maintenance 5 13 14 Fig 7 18 PO Shipper Maintenance Logistics Accounting Detail Frame AQAD Supplier 5003000 Ship Date 07 22 2002 West Coast Electronics Shipper ID C020722001 1120 Capacitor Road Ship to ID 10000 San Diego Main Plant Carrier Shipment ner i Carrier Shipment Ref Enter the shipment reference number from the carrier such as a bill of lading number carrier tracking number or packing slip number The shipment reference is used during vouchering to help match pending vouchers to invoices from logistics suppliers When terms of trade are assigned to POs attached to the shipper each PO line must have the same terms of trade code assigned otherwise an error displays The terms of trade code assigned to the first PO line is applied to the entire shipper or container After you finish entering line items the terms of trade details display You can specify a supplier for each logistics charge that is your responsibility PO Shipper Maintenance Supplier 5003000 Ship Date 07 22 2002 West Coast Electronics Shipper ID C020722001 1120 Capacitor Road Logistics Accounting Detail Description Log Supplier Name Inbound Duty Freight oroo P Swift Transport In
84. one site only Leave blank if the lot group can be applied to any site Leading Characters Enter up to 12 characters to be placed at the beginning of the lot number Can be left blank Sequence Length Enter a number between 5 and 10 This is the length of the numeric portion of the automatic lot numbers Sequence Number The default is 1 Enter the first number to be used in automatic lot numbering The lot number consists of this number plus leading and trailing characters The smallest number available for assignment is 00001 and the largest is 9999999999 If you are using a six digit sequence length you may want to start automatic lot numbers with 100000 instead of 1 This number increments by 1 when numbers are assigned Compliance 167 Fig 5 14 Lot Group Maintenance 1 22 13 Tip The lot number including leading characters sequence number and trailing characters can be up to 18 characters long FAQAD 168 User Guide Master Data Trailing Characters Enter up to 12 characters to be placed at the end of the lot number Can be left blank Execution File The program to execute when assigning automatic lot numbers The default is gpauto01 gt p the standard program supplied with the system You can create custom programs to assign lot numbers based on your own requirements Assigning Lot Groups to Items Use one of the item maintenance programs to set up items for automatic lot numbering tem Ma
85. picks inventory Inventory Control 287 Fig 9 1 Inventory Control 3 24 Inventory Control Inventory Count Parameters Tolerance From Qty On Hand or Annual Usage Q U Qoh Issue Days 7 Itern Tolerances Class A 3 00 Class C 5 0095 Class B 4 00 All Others 5 00 Picking Logic 1 Location 2 Lot Serial 3 Date 4 Expire Date Picking Order B Ascending or Descending Ascending s Picking Order Enter the method to use for selecting inventory during detail allocation 1 Location The system looks for inventory by location 2 Lot Serial The system looks for inventory by lot serial number 3 Date The system looks for inventory by the date the item was created or received 4 Expire Date The system looks for inventory by item expiration date Ascending or Descending Enter Ascending to have the system pick the oldest or lowest number first Enter Descending to have the system pick the newest or highest number first As an example if Picking Order is by Date and Ascending order is specified the first item picked is that with the oldest create or receipt date Creating Inventory Detail Records Inventory detail records precisely define inventory balances and locations Each record includes Item number Site Location if used FAQAD 288 User Guide Master Data Fig 9 2 Inventory Transaction Flow Table 9 1 Inventory Transfer Menu 3 4 FAQAD Lot serial number if us
86. programs 1 Use Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 to enter an order as usual Sales Order Mai Order 1014 Sold To 0100 Bill To 0100 Ship To 0100 Sold To Ship To Hans Maier GmbH Hans Maier GmbH Bauunternehmung Bauunternehmung In der Schwemme 8 In der Schwemme 8 Frankfurt Frankfurt Germany Germany Salespersoni P Freight List P Consignment O Multiple Frt Min weo o 1 Consume Forecast 7 Commission 1 0 00 Freight Terms P Detail Allocations E Calculate Freight Allocate Daysii0 Display Weights 7 Comments 7 Irnp Exp amp Imp Exp field ov Imp Exp Enter Yes to record Intrastat data for this order in the Intrastat frame If No special processing does not occur during order maintenance You can still add Intrastat data later using Intrastat Maintenance 2 22 13 Record Intrastat data in the Intrastat frame of the order header Fields default from Intrastat Control Defaults from the country code associated with the ship to Sales Order Maintenance Order 1014 Sold To 0100 Sold To Hans Maier GmbH Bauunternehmung In der Schwemme 8 Terms of Delivery crR P Nature of Transaction Country of Dest Disp Mode of Transport 2 Choose Go to enter order lines The system automatically copies the Intrastat header data to each order line When all order lines and the order trailer are entered you Bill To 0100 Ship To 0100 Ship To Hans Maier GmbH Bauunternehmu
87. rate Allow Tax Included status is Yes Note The ability to reverse calculate taxes in GTM does not affect sales commission reporting using sales analysis programs Commissions are always based on item prices inclusive of tax For items that include tax you may have to adjust your commission structure FAQAD 386 354 User Guide Master Data Fig 13 1 Selection of Tax Environment b See Fixing Common Tax Problems on page 386 FAQAD Calculating Taxes To calculate taxes on transactions GIM first identifies the tax environment the set of tax types for each line item and trailer charge It then determines the most appropriate tax rate for each tax type in the environment GTM searches for an optimal tax environment based on a combination of transaction conditions Ship from tax zone for the line item Ship to tax zone for the transaction Customer or supplier tax class if any Figure 13 1 summarizes GI M s search priority for selecting a tax environment Identify Tax Zones for Ship From and Ship To Addresses v Customer Tax Class Exists Yes y No Tax Environment for Tax Zones Yes and Class Matching Tax Environment A Selected y Yes Tax Environment for Tax Zones Only No Warning Displays and Default Environment Used If GTM finds a matching environment it assigns this environment to the transaction Otherwise the following message disp
88. relevant factors QAD 106 User Guide Master Data P See Setting Up PCC Security on page 140 for details FAQAD Incorporating PCOs Use Incorporation Planning Report 1 9 7 3 to display inventory levels and monetary values of inventory affected by a PCO This can help in planning effective dates for changes Use Incorporation Selection 1 9 7 4 to monitor and assign effective dates Then incorporate it into production using Incorporation 1 9 7 5 You can modify an effective date by incorporating a PCO again with a different date Once a PCO is incorporated MRP uses the effective dates of product changes to plan future orders However until the effective date is reached PCO changes do not affect current operations Implementation When a PCO s effective date has arrived and all changed items product structures formulas routings processes and item specifications are in production use Implementation 1 9 7 13 to move the new item revision numbers and other item data into the corresponding item master records Setting Up PCC To set up PCC 1 Prepare data in other parts of the system for use with PCC Set up PCC Control Define user groups 2 3 4 Define approval routings 5 Define document change types 6 Set up PCC security Product Change Control 107 Preparing Data for Use with PCC To prepare data in other parts of the system for use in PCC do the following 1 Print existing
89. s commodity code if any If the line quantity UM is different from the commodity code s supplementary UM the system automatically applies the conversion factor defined in Unit of Measure Maintenance If a supplementary UM is not available supplementary units are not calculated Net Weight Enter the weight of the transaction in kilograms The unit of measure for kilograms is specified in Intrastat Control If net weight is not specified it is calculated based on the net weight and UM associated with the item in Item Master Maintenance Printing Intrastat Declarations Use Intrastat Declaration Print 2 22 19 to print Intrastat declarations that are fully compliant with Intrastat regulations You can print declarations for arrivals dispatches or both in any of four forms trial final summary or detail The Intrastat declaration report layout is generic allowing it to be customized locally using standard Progress tools Fig 8 14 Intrastat Intrastat Declaration Print p Declaration Print c 2 22 19 Arrivals field and o Site IP A H Print Intrastat Declaration Arrivals Dispatches field Print Intrastat Declaration Dispatches 7 Trial Final field m Trial Final Trial Summary Detail Detail x Branch i agnt P Branch ID Reporting Currency P Output Batch ID FAQAD 280 User Guide Master Data Tip Intrastat Declaration Print only selects Intrastat hi
90. service repair orders and material orders Display Detail on Reports This setting determines whether you can print a summary of tax amounts on printed documents such as purchase orders receipts sales quotes sales orders and invoices You can print tax summaries in document print programs only if both the control program setting and the Print Trailer field are set to Yes Tax detail information prints only on documents that have a trailer Display Taxable Non Taxable on Trailer This setting determines whether taxable and non taxable amounts are displayed or printed in document trailers When using different tax rates currency rules discounts and rounding methods non taxable and taxable amounts shown in trailers may be incorrect To avoid the display of misleading tax amounts set this field to No when Tax By Line is No and different lines have multiple tax classes Implementing GTM 341 Updating Other Records Company and Site Addresses In GTM company sites require a corresponding company address record because taxes are calculated by address not site Every company site must have an address record with the same address code as the site code Create records in Company Address Maintenance 2 12 Add city county state and country and tax information to new records As a precaution create a taxes record to provide a default tax zone whenever a transaction is missing a company site code VAT Registration Codes After
91. site and location Attribute Active Field on page 154 data for more information Batch An arbitrary number for tracking a You can use batch numbers for quantity scheduled to be produced or in production See Using Work Order Batch Control on page 157 for information on using batch numbers tracking a group of lots or a portion of a lot The system does not validate batch number but you can report on batches with Work Order Batch Inquiry 1 22 9 QAD 154 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Attribute Description Usage Single Lot Determines whether each receipt For additional control you can force from a work order should be each receipt to be received into a assigned to a single lot This is a single lot by setting to Yes default setting you can change at If the order is for a serialized item receipt Single Lot also appears this field is automatically set to Yes Purchase Order Maintenance See ang cannot be changed You cannot Using Lot Control on page 161 change this setting under the following for details conditions once items have been received against this order line item for POs for rework or expense work orders type R or E or if the order is part of a joint work order set Lot The lot number for this work order When Single Lot is No you can enter a Number Enter a lot number in this field See lot number for this work order The Using Lot Control on page 161
92. status was updated This date is automatically updated by Customer Credit Limit Adjustment 2 1 7 Customer Freight Data Set up freight information for each customer The system uses this information during order entry Customer Freight Data Freight List TO Freight Terms ALL wu SW Freight List Enter a freight list code identifying a set of shipping rates normally used for this customer This list defaults to the order header for new orders for this customer Min Frt Wt Enter the minimum weight to use with bulk freight lists for this customer Shipments that weigh less than this amount are charged based on minimum weight not the actual shipment weight Freight Terms Enter a code identifying how freight charges are typically calculated for this customer Other Customer Data Three other frames display in Customer Maintenance The Address Tax Data frame displays for the input of Global Tax Management data The Enterprise Material Transfer Data frame is described in User Guide Distribution A Addresses 191 The Bank Accounts frame in Customer Maintenance is the same as P See Setting Up Customer and the one in Supplier Maintenance Supplier Bank Addresses on page 198 Adjusting Credit Limits Use Customer Credit Limit Adjustment 2 1 7 to increase or decrease customer credit limits defined in Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 automatically Select a range of customers based on address code
93. suppliers Inbound logistics charges are the transportation costs associated with purchasing items from external suppliers Outbound logistics charges are the transportation costs associated with the shipment of items from a company location to customers or other company locations For some companies a significant proportion of purchases are imports Logistics costs have a large financial impact since they can represent a high percentage of the total delivered cost and must be included in price comparisons with local sources In Logistics Accounting inbound logistics charges are considered part of the overall cost specific to each item and included in the item cost For other companies the shipment of goods by third party carriers is a frequently occurring expense Tracking the amounts owed to carriers as a separate liability in the general ledger GL provides better control over invoices from suppliers Identifying variances in expected freight charges and actual invoice amounts reduces the risk of duplicate or over payment Logistics Accounting 215 of logistics charges Tracking these charges improves visibility of total outbound freight costs helping to reduce these costs by reviewing order quantities or seeking alternative carriers Logistics Charge Accruals When items are purchased or shipped you can accrue logistics charges as part of the process GL accruals for inbound logistics charges are triggered by purchase receipts GL
94. system validates this field for for information on using lot uniqueness when Lot Level is set to 1 numbers or 2 With the above conditions met entering a lot number at order reserves that number in the lot master Inventory Attribute Active Field You can override inventory status and other attribute information for an item during receipt except when the status or other attribute conflicts with existing items with the same lot and reference number at a location When this occurs an error displays and you have two choices Change the site location lot and reference to identify a different inventory location Change the Active field of the inventory status or other attribute to No The system then uses the attribute of the already existing inventory detail record Overriding Default Attributes To override attributes at receipt set the Set Attributes field to Yes in Work Order Receipt 16 11 Work Order Operation Backflush 16 19 Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 Repetitive Labor Transaction 18 14 Backflush Transaction 18 22 13 and Move Transaction 18 22 19 in Advanced Repetitive or RTS Receipts 11 7 3 13 Compliance 155 Fig 5 5 quant sit ERN Set Attributes Field um NO Location 00 JP in Work Order Conversion 1 0000 Lot Serial o o P Receipt 16 1 1 Scrapped Qty 0 0 f P um ea P Multi Entry Set Attributes Conversion 1 0000 Set Attributes 7 field Total U
95. tax ID The Tax Report field for that address is Yes That tax reporting address is associated with the entity filing the 1099 report Assign a tax reporting address to an entity in Entity Code Maintenance 25 3 1 1 Important If an entity is assigned an address with Tax Report set to No voucher amounts from that entity are not included in any 1099 report When Tax Report is Yes you must enter the company name address details telephone number and a federal tax ID A warning displays if an IRS magnetic media control code is not entered in Name Control Although more than one company address can use the same federal tax ID only one of those records can have Tax Report set to Yes Important After you set up a tax reporting address in Company Address Maintenance do not update the address in any other program Only addresses with a list type of company are allowed for 1099 tax reporting For example updating a company address in a program such as Customer Maintenance assigns a customer list type to the address When a tax reporting address has list types other than company an error displays when you run any of the 1099 MISC programs and no output is generated Setting Up Salesperson Addresses Use Salesperson Maintenance 2 5 1 to set up salesperson codes For each salesperson specify a default commission percentage and a user defined territory code Enter detailed commission percentages for product lines and or customers Commi
96. the 30th of the following month depending on the invoice date Customers always have at least 15 days to pay For end of fortnight the system uses 15th of the month during discount due date calculations if transaction date is prior to 15th of the month If transaction date is after 15th the system uses end of current month in its calculations Finally if transaction date falls on 15th or last day of month transaction date is used Payment Due Dates July 15 and July 31 Due Date From 4 End of Week Min Due Days 30 Invoice Dates June 1 3 June 4 10 June 11 17 June 25 July 1 Base Date Addresses 203 Table 6 7 Your payment due dates are the Saturday of every Proximo Terms week in the following month depending on the Weekly invoice date Customers always have at least 15 days to pay For end of week the system uses the date of the subsequent Saturday during discount due date calculations If the transaction occurs on a Saturday it uses the transaction date Payment Due Dates July 8 July 15 July 22 July 29 August 5 Base Date lets you specify a start date for due and discount date calculations This enables you to calculate dates that match customer expectations For example In inflationary environments where pricing is time dependent For special promotions If your company has a tightly negotiated contract with a significant cash flow effect In this case you may want to specify
97. the base percent for the tax type to calculate the taxable base amount for each line item or trailer charge Base Value Identify the type of item amount for the taxable base Do not change this setting The only supported type is sales price Line item and trailer charge amounts are taxed based on the price at which you buy or sell them GI M does not support tax based on general ledger cost Implementing GTM 331 Line The system automatically assigns a line number when you assign a tax type to the tax base Assign up to 99 tax types to a tax base When you add a new tax base the system assigns the next sequential line number To display a previously entered tax type enter its line number To delete a line press F5 or Ctrl D Tax Type Assign the tax base to its tax types During tax calculations the tax rate for the tax type is applied to the taxable base portion of the item amount Description This field contains a description of the tax type Setting Up GL Accounts GIM calculates tax amounts separately for each tax rate Before you set up tax rate records verify that you have all the necessary tax accounts sub accounts and cost centers in the general ledger GL chart of accounts If any are missing set them up Depending on the nature of your tax rates some or all of the tax amounts listed in Table 12 6 are represented in the general ledger Amount Explanation Sales tax Sales tax absorbed Recoverab
98. the discounted sales amount multiplied by the tax rate For discounting at invoice the net order amount is the full sales amount plus the discounted tax amount When payment is received the system checks that the customer has paid within the discount FAQAD 350 User Guide Master Data FAQAD period If the customer is still eligible for the discount the system discounts the sales amount and adds it to the discounted tax amount to recalculate the net order amount In contrast for discounting at payment the net order amount is calculated later as the discounted sales amount plus the discounted tax amount Under both systems if the discount period expires both the accounts receivable and accounts payable payment programs automatically adjust tax amounts upward The net order amount is recalculated as the full sales amount plus the full tax amount Example If the sales amount is 100 00 the credit terms are 2 Net 30 and the tax rate is 10 the system calculates the discount at invoice as follows Disc Sales Amt 100 00 100 00 2 98 00 Disc Tax Amt 98 00 10 9 80 Net Order Total 100 00 9 80 109 80 Initially only the tax is discounted If the customer is still eligible for the discount when payment is received the sales amount is discounted to 98 00 and the payment amount to apply changes to 107 80 For discounting at payment the calculation is as follows Disc Sales Amt 100 00 100 00
99. the payment only if the check date falls within the begin end date range The beginning date defaults to the system date The end date remains open unless you specify one These dates can be modified at any time Setting Up Credit Terms and Trailer Codes Set up credit terms codes in Credit Terms Maintenance 2 19 1 The system uses credit terms codes to calculate the default due date discount date and discount for any goods and services bought or sold Each of these fields can be overridden manually Credit terms codes are also used for processing customer payments debit credit memos vouchers and checks Due dates and discount dates can be fixed or calculated from the invoice date end of month end of fortnight or end of week For terms requiring multiple due dates or discount dates set up two tiered compound credit terms Fig 6 16 Credit Terms Credit Terms Maintenance Maintenance puu 2 19 1 Terms Code 2 10 25 Description 2 10PROK 2 Multiple Due Dates 4 Disc 95 0 00 Due Days 0 Base Date sd Disc Daysia Minimum Due Days 0 Base Days Disc Date i Due Date From Grace Days E From Terms Interesi Disc bate E Due Date s Ir Daily Overdue In 000 e e FAQAD Proximo Terms Proximo terms are a type of credit term used in France and some other countries They enable you to manage due dates so that you process most payments only once a week once a fortnight or monthl
100. this item is usually manufactured Originating Percent Enter the percentage of the item that is usually manufactured in the Originating Country Entering General License Information Enter general license information using General License Maintenance 1 22 16 13 General licenses are typically import and export licenses that apply to a country or a group of countries You can associate licenses with a control number Fig 5 21 General License Maintenance General License Maintenance Country USA 1 22 16 13 Authority LIS COM License Number 383883 CD 3928 Control Num ECCN 44 Country Groups Start Date 01 01 2002 End Date 12 31 2002 B Max Amount 00 Total Amount 40 000 00 i Total Quantity 50 000 Comments GS Q Enter the country code authority code and license number Leave Country blank if this license applies to all countries Enter the control number or ECCN number defined in Controlled Item Maintenance If needed enter country groups start and end dates maximum per Tip The start and end dates determine the effective dates of the license shipment values annual shipment values and currency for this item FAQAD 178 User Guide Master Data Entering Individual License Information Enter individual license information using Individual License Maintenance 1 22 16 16 Individual licenses are typically import and export licenses that apply to individual items Fig 5 22 Individual License
101. to a stocking location The use of separate physical locations may not be required however if items are marked for quarantine with some other method For example some companies use a removable label You can use inventory statuses to support this business methodology To implement this practice in the system you first create a quarantine status in Inventory Status Code Maintenance 1 1 1 Then specify this status as the active default for purchase order and work order receipts in Item Master Maintenance When items are received the system assigns each lot a quarantine status overriding the status of the location After the lot is inspected and approved the inventory status can be changed using Multi Lot Inventory Detail Update 1 22 19 The lot no longer needs to be physically transferred to change its status Figure 5 3 illustrates setting inventory attributes in the work order Attributes frame While batch and lot numbers are not technically attributes they are located on the same frame so that they can be entered at order creation and updated during work in process Compliance 149 Tip You can also set default inventory attributes for purchase orders and repetitive transactions FAQAD 150 User Guide Master Data Fig 5 3 Work Order Maintenance Work Order 400021 ID 402192 ori rder i 16 1 Attributes Item Number 10 10000 OASIS TM COOLING SYST Frame Type HOME INDUST MODEL Site 10000 The Attribut
102. to the specified number of decimal places Discount and markup percentages Amount Type D and M are also multiplied by the adjustment percent If the percentage is greater than 100 amounts are increased If the percentage is less than 100 amounts are decreased Cur Conv Factor Enter a conversion factor to use when the source and target price list currencies are not the same The system calculates and displays a default Cur Conv Factor using the exchange rate in effect on the price list start date If effective exchange rates are not found Cur Conv Factor defaults to 1 you can modify the conversion factor if needed However the value cannot be 0 Clear Supplier Price Determines if the supplier prices are cleared before copying in the new prices If No prices are added to the existing supplier item prices f Yes existing supplier item prices are cleared and the new prices are added Pricing 95 Tip Specify rates in Exchange Rate Maintenance 26 4 FAQAD 96 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Price List Copy can be used to create supplier item quotes When Create Supplier Item is Yes you are prompted to enter a supplier code All adjusted prices are calculated and copied into the supplier item records as the Quote Cost for that supplier Quote prices are accessed by purchasing to display the current price quoted by a supplier Other supplier item information is also available but must be adjusted manually C
103. usages Setting up rounding methods Setting up tax environments Setting up trailer charges Setting up tax bases Setting up general ledger accounts Setting up tax rates Setting up the control program Updating existing base records Country Code Maintenance 2 14 1 Generalized Codes Maintenance 36 2 13 Tax Zone Maintenance 2 13 3 13 Tax Type Maintenance 2 13 1 1 Tax Class Maintenance 2 13 1 5 Tax Usage Maintenance 2 13 1 9 Rounding Method Maintenance 2 13 1 17 Tax Environment Maintenance 2 13 5 1 Trailer Code Maintenance 2 19 13 Trailer Tax Detail Maintenance 2 13 1 21 Tax Base Maintenance 2 13 1 13 Account Code Maintenance 25 3 13 Sub Account Code Maintenance 25 3 17 Cost Center Code Maintenance 25 3 20 Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 Tax Rate Copy Update 2 13 13 5 Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 End User Address Maintenance 11 9 1 Product Line Maintenance 1 2 1 Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 Service Category Maintenance 11 21 9 Note U S and Canadian taxes can also be calculated using an external Sales and Use Tax system In this case GTM must be set up based on special requirements Implementing GTM 317 Setting Up Tax Jurisdictions The first step to implementing GIM is setting up codes that define countries states provinces counties and tax zones Setting Up Country Codes Set up c
104. your price list optional Amount Type The choices are Accrual Credit Terms Discount Discount Amt Freight List Freight Terms List Price Markup and Net Price The amount type of the list affects which fields display in the following frames Quantity Type Specify the type of quantity to be used in determining quantity breaks in the price list detail as well as the way the system uses the value in the Minimum Order field Quantity the price breaks are determined by the number of items ordered If the cumulative order quantity for an item is less than Minimum Order the order entry program displays a warning message following line item entry Amount the price breaks are determined by the total extended list price of items ordered measured in the price list currency If the total order amount is less than Minimum Order the order entry program displays a warning message at the trailer Note When using price lists with quantity type amount and the minimum amount is greater than zero the best list price for the item must also be greater than zero If the best list price for the item is equal to zero the price list will not be selected for the order line item Set list prices for items in Item Master Maintenance or Price List Maintenance Comb Type This field describes how price lists combine with other price lists for multiple discount and best pricing calculations Valid values are Exclusive Cannot combine with an
105. your selection in the Amount Type field FAQAD 74 User Guide Master Data Fig 3 18 Price List Maintenance 1 10 1 1 Min Qty and Discount Fields Fig 3 19 Price List Maintenance 1 10 1 1 List Price Min and Max Price Fields FAQAD Min Qty Discount Min Qty Discount 0 0 0 0 30 0 20 0 Min Qty field Min Qty Discount Discount field Continue specifying values for each quantity or amount break The frame illustrated in Figure 3 19 displays when amount type is List Price List Price Enter the list price for this price list Min Price Enter the lowest allowable price for this price list If a lower price is entered on a sales order this price is used instead Max Price Enter the highest allowable price for this price list If a higher price is entered on a sales order this price is used instead When you create a List Price price list the following fields are ignored Qty Type Comb Type Min Net Ord Max Qty Break Cat Config Disc Max Orders Disc Sequence Print and Cost Set Min Price Max Prices 0 00 Reviewing Price Lists To review price lists use one of the following programs Use Price List Inquiry 1 10 1 2 to review names and summary information on price lists Use Price List Report 1 10 1 3 to review pricing details for each price list Use Price Lists by Customer Inquiry 1 10 1 5 to review price lists sorted by customer code Pricing 75
106. 0 3 Variances Three kinds of variances occur during the purchasing accounts payable cycle purchase price variance AP usage variance and AP rate variance Purchase Price Variances Purchase price variance occurs when an inventory item s PO cost does not match its GL cost This variance does not occur for memo items which have no standard cost Figure 13 12 shows the GL entries for purchase price variance The tax point determines whether the update to AP Tax Recoverable Occurs at goods receipt or invoice receipt FAQAD GL Entries for Purchase Price Variance Standard Cost Non Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Purchase Purchase Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts Price Variance item cost 1 variance 2 100 00 1 D 100 00 25 00 and tax on item cost 2500 1250 8 variance 3 12 50 Voucher Confirmation vce i pow Entries created for item 1 raer one Or m 00 cost 4 variance 5 and PETS amp amp 25 00 tax 6 12 50 8 6 12 50 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt Purchase Purchase Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts Price Variance item cost 1 and variance 100 00 TS 25 00 2 but not for tax Qi 25 00 n team 3 Purchase Accounts Purchase aec iani Man Order Receipts Payable Price Variance 100 00 100 00 12 50 cost 3 variance
107. 03 p 2 20 24 Freight Control sofrctmt p Freight terms determine how shipping costs are displayed on the order A customer s freight costs can appear on the order trailer or be added to each line item unit cost Once freight lists and terms are defined assign default lists and terms to customers in Customer Maintenance Each new sales quote or order created for the customer uses these values Freight list zone and class are Addresses 207 used to determine the freight charge for an order The freight zone is based on the ship to postal code Freight class is determined by the item sold Freight List Maintenance Use Freight List Maintenance 2 20 1 to define charges that apply to sales quotes orders and RMAs Typically you need at least one freight list for each shipping company you use More than one freight list may be needed if the shipping company supports different types of transportation For example a shipping company may ship by train by truck by refrigerated truck and by regular semi trailer Set up freight lists for different currencies if your shipper delivers to other countries You can also define lists per site if the same shipper transports from more than one warehouse or manufacturing site Fig 6 18 Freight List Freight List Maintenance Maintenance Freight List A01 NTAX 2 20 1 Site 10000 Currency USD Trailer Code Freight Freight ModejAIR P Type Specify whether freight charge
108. 10 multiplied by the numbers 1 or 5 Common rounding units are 1 10 0 01 and 0 10 You cannot change the rounding unit for standard methods 0 1 and 2 Rounding Threshold Specify the point at which transaction tax amounts are rounded up or down For methods 0 1 and 2 the default rounding thresholds are 0 5 0 05 and 0 005 respectively Amounts less than these thresholds are rounded down and amounts higher than or equal to higher amounts are rounded up The rounding threshold can be any number for rounding to the nearest dime nickel quarter centavo pfennig and so on Rounding is based on the absolute value of the amount to be rounded 9 99 rounds to 10 0 just as 9 99 rounds to 10 0 You can change the rounding threshold for standard methods 0 1 and 2 Decimal Point Specify whether the decimal point is a period or a comma Setting Up Tax Environments Transactions are subject to the tax laws of both your company and the customer or supplier Before the system calculates taxes it determines which taxes state sales tax local tax VAT and so on apply to the addresses that ship and receive the goods A tax environment is the set of tax types that applies to a combination of ship from and ship to tax zones and optionally a customer or supplier tax class Before you set up tax environments identify the combinations of tax types that apply to transactions Then determine the tax zones and customer supplier tax classe
109. 15 numbers as indexes 15 PCR PCO update of 124 planning 20 price break categories 49 59 price default 22 Pur MFG code 21 QAD 396 User Guide Master Data supplier items 23 types 16 unit of measure 16 Item Site Cost Maintenance 22 L la_do_ship_id 227 la_so_ship_id 227 life cycle of a PCR PCO 103 linking analysis codes 53 56 List Price price list 74 list type address 182 list discount table pricing 88 98 Location Maintenance 34 35 36 locations 34 41 and picklists 35 automatic 36 naming conventions 35 overview 34 permanent temporary 35 reserved 37 192 single item 36 types 36 Log Charge Pending Voucher Maint 253 logistics accounting 213 261 apportioning charges 215 charge codes 227 inbound accrual 235 outbound accrual 245 PO receipts 243 setting up 222 shipments 249 tax calculation 233 vouchering charges 254 Logistics Accounting Control 225 Logistics Charge Code Maintenance 227 logistics charges defining 227 terms of trade 237 Lot Actual Bill Inquiry 294 batch number display 159 lot control benefits 145 building lot master records 165 compliance features 161 database level 163 deciding on level 164 effects of turning off 161 item level 163 Item Master Maintenance 18 levels 147 161 FAQAD order level 163 work flow 162 Lot Control Level field 147 Lot Group Maintenance 167 lot groups assigning to items 168 creating 167 Lot Master Build 165 Lot Master Delete Archive 162 Lot Master Mai
110. 1_ Include Memo Items Dedaran 1P Agent JP Commodity Code P Mode of Transport P Terms of Delivery p Nature of Transaction P Branch in Branch j Statistical Procedure P Port of Am bip P Port of Transshipment P O Q Use Intrastat Enter No if you do not want the system to automatically create Intrastat history records If No you can still create records manually Enter Yes to have the system automatically create Intrastat history records for applicable invoice and receiver lines Invoice Post 7 13 4 automatically creates an Intrastat history record for each sales invoice line that relates to both an Intrastat item and a shipment to or receipt from another EU country All programs that create purchase receivers prh_hist records automatically create an Intrastat history record for each receiver line that relates to both an Intrastat item and a shipment to or receipt from another EU country Note If you use Enterprise Material Transfer EMT the system automatically determines which trading partner is responsible for reporting direct shipment transactions when the supplier and end customer are in different EU member countries It then creates appropriate Intrastat history records as required The system determines whether a sales invoice or receiver line is involved in Intra EU inventory movement by comparing the country codes associated with the ship from or receipt site and the
111. 23 328 3 6 20 301 2 13 3 1 194 3 7 291 2 13 3 14 319 3 8 291 2 13 3 15 319 3 9 290 2 13 5 1 326 327 3 10 290 2 13 13 1 334 3 11 290 2 13 13 5 338 3 12 290 2 13 24 327 339 3 13 296 2 14 1 194 3 14 296 297 2 15 1 227 3 15 297 2 15 4 237 3 16 2 305 2 15 7 253 3 16 4 305 2 15 13 230 3 16 6 306 2 15 16 231 3 16 7 307 2 15 19 231 3 16 8 306 2 15 24 225 3 16 12 307 2 16 1 196 3 16 13 306 2 17 1 197 3 16 15 306 307 2 19 1 200 3 16 18 307 2 20 1 207 3 16 21 304 307 2 20 4 208 3 16 23 304 306 2 20 7 209 3 17 302 2 20 10 209 3 18 302 2 21 1 198 3 19 302 2 21 2 199 3 21 293 2 21 3 199 3 21 1 293 2 22 1 16 267 3 21 2 293 2 22 1 19 267 3 21 13 293 2 22 1 22 267 3 21 14 293 2 22 3 270 3 21 16 293 294 2 22 11 276 3 21 23 294 2 22 13 278 3 22 294 2 22 19 279 3 22 1 294 2 22 20 281 3 22 2 294 3 1 5 298 3 22 3 294 3 3 302 3 22 4 295 FAQAD 3 23 35 3 24 18 286 5 13 1 205 5 24 98 205 7 1 11 80 13 5 100 13 13 3 107 13 13 22 107 14 22 107 15 5 100 15 22 107 19 1 13 100 19 1 22 107 2 1 9 2 02 02 09 02 37 2 1 9 3 02 01 09 03 37 36 2 17 115 36 2 21 1 225 36 13 2 108 36 14 1 108 36 14 3 108 A ABC class codes 18 295 ABC Status Report Update 18 absorbed taxes 351 accounts inventory 27 logistics 222 product line 25 purchasing 27 sales 27 work order 27 accounts payable AP tax account 348 Accounts Payable Control tax variances 366 accrual logistics charges 215 price list 62 73 action s
112. 235 track inbound logistics charges Inbound logistics charge accruals are triggered by purchase receipts QAD 224 User Guide Master Data Fig 7 3 Inbound GL Transactions Fig 7 4 Outbound GL Transactions b See User Guide Manager Functions for details on Number Range Management FAQAD Inbound Logistics Charge Transaction Summary PO Receipt PO Return Inventory Accrual Expense Inventory 100 100 100 100 Voucher Accounts Accrual Variance Payable 100 10 110 Figure 7 4 summarizes the GL transactions created and accounts used to track outbound logistics charges Outbound Logistics Charge Transaction Summary Shipment Return Expense Accrual Expense Accrual 100 100 100 100 Voucher Accounts Accrual Variance Payable 100 10 110 Setting Up NRM Sequence Numbers All pending vouchers must have an internal reference number Before you can accrue outbound logistics charges you must set up separate Number Range Management NRM sequence codes used as identifiers for discrete sales order and distribution order shipments The system uses the sequence codes to determine what format to use when assigning sequential internal reference numbers to discrete shipments in the following programs e Sales Order Shipments 7 9 15 RMA Maintenance 11 7 1 1 RMA Receipts 11 7 1 13 RMA Shipments 11 7 1 16 Logistics Accounting Distribution Order
113. 3 Company Addresses for Purchase Orders 005 184 Company Address and GTM 0 cee eee eee 184 Company Address and 1099 Tax Reporting 184 Setting Up Salesperson Addresses 0 0 0 c cece 185 Setting Up Customer Addresses 0 0 0 cece eee eee 186 Creating Customer Addresses 0 0 0 e eee eee eee eee 187 vii viii User Guide Master Data Customer Data seco ELE EP b eben ES 188 Customer Credit Data llle 189 Customer Freight Data l l 190 Other Customer Data 1 iesus eias esae ea a race eoe ea 190 Adjusting Credit Limits 0 0 2 eee eee 191 Creating Reserved Locations 0 00 c eee eee eee ee 192 Setting Up Supplier Addresses 0 0 0 eee cece eee 192 Setting Up Employee Addresses 0 0 cece eee eee 193 Setting Up Country Codes 0 eee cee ee 194 Setting Up Delivery Transit Times 00 00 00 e eee eee eee 196 Setting Up Carrier Addresses 0 0 0 cee cece eens 197 Setting Up Customer and Supplier Bank Addresses 198 Setting Up Credit Terms and Trailer Codes 000 5 200 Proximo Terms uut UR CR e ea 201 Base Date iis ose pe ele ek erm ep men AG cm ss 203 Credit Terms Interest 1 2 eegenen o e Re e 203 Base Days cie vetere eor ace a eee Ue De RE cea 204 Trailer Codes socca eb eae ce hea wd dea eed edhe E 205 Setting Up Freight Charges
114. 4 3 Tip To attach comments to changes made with these functions set Comments to Yes QAD 126 User Guide Master Data requested number of levels Copied product structures contain the same field values as production records You can modify these values using PCR PCO Detail Maintenance Fig 4 21 Copy Product Structure into PCO ecmt08 p Copy Product Structure into PCO Number PCO00007 ID Database PCO Title Major Redisgn of Coolers Structure Formula Copy Parent Item Description UM Eff Date Rev Levels 10 10000 OASIS TM COOLING SYST EA 06 28 2002 1 Level Component Item Description Reference 1 gt 22 100 CORD POWER UK POWER CABLE 1 22 110 CORD POWER EUROPE WE POWER CABLE Click the arrow 1 gt 22 120 CORD POWER USA POWER CABLE to select a 1 22 130 CORD POWER UNIVERSAL POWER CABLE i E gt 30 100 BATTERIES ALKALINE STD BACKUP component an 1 30 1000 BATTERIES ATOMIC STD BACKUP asterisk 1 gt 30 10000 BATTERIES THERMONUCLE BACKUP indicates 1 44 100 CONTROL UNIT HOME USE STANDARD O Q selection Copy Where Used into PCO Works the same as Copy Product Structure into PCO except it displays an indented where used bill of material screen and lets you select product structure records to copy into the PCO This is useful if you are making the same change to several product structures PCR PCO Detail Maintenance Product Structures Used for adding items to product structures
115. 6 Outbound Accrual Account Maintenance 231 Outbound Expense Account Maintenance 231 overissues 41 P PCC Control 108 PCC See product change control PCC PCO Maintenance 119 131 Formula Data Maintenance Copy Formula into PCO 128 Copy Where Used into PCO 129 PCR PCO Detail Maintenance Formulas 129 Replace Formula Component 129 header 120 Item Data Maintenance 124 Add Modify Delete PCO Item Data 124 Direct Item Master Access 125 Item Specification Maintenance Add Edit Deactivate Item Specification 130 Copy Item Spec From Quality Module 129 PCO PCR Function Maintenance Change PCO Number 122 Close PCO to PCO 122 Index 397 Copy PCO from PCR PCO 122 Copy PCO to PCR PCO 122 Process Data Maintenance 129 Routing Data Maintenance Add Edit Deactivate Routing 128 Add Edit Deactivate Routing Rate Based 128 Copy Routing to PCR PCO 128 Section Menu 121 Structure Data Maintenance 125 Copy Product Structures into PCO 125 Copy Where Used into PCO 126 Product Structure detail 126 Replace Product Structure Component 126 Text Data Maintenance 123 Add Modify Delete PCO Text Data 123 Copy Text from Master Comments 123 Trailer Maintenance 130 PCO Status Browse 131 PCO See product change order PCO PCR Maintenance 119 PCO PCR Function Maintenance Close PCR to PCO 123 Convert PCR to PCO 123 PCR See product change request PCR PCR PCO Approval 105 108 133 PCR PCO Close 121 139 PCR PCO Detail Inquiry 131 PCR PCO Import Export 120 139
116. 6 bou GL Entries for Inventory Item Average Cost Average Cost Recoverable Tax Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Purchase AP Tax Goods Receipt p Inventory Order Receipts Recoverable Entries created for received 100 00 1 J100 00 10 00 2 item cost 1 and tax 2 Q 10 00 7 AE Purchase Accounts Voucher Confirmation Order Receipts Payable Entries created for item 100 00 100 00 cost 3 and tax 4 10 00 10 00 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt Purchase Entries created for received Inventory _ Order Receipts item cost 1 but not for tax 100 00 O 100 00 inn Purchase Accounts AP Tax My MM Order Receipts Payable Recoverable cost 2 and tax 3 i000 9 S Pen DS Variances Two kinds of variances occur during the purchasing accounts payable cycle AP usage variance and AP rate variance AP Hate and Usage Variances AP rate variance occurs when an item s invoice cost does not match its PO cost AP usage variance occurs when an item s invoice quantity does not match its PO quantity and you close the receiver line in the voucher Figure 13 17 and Figure 13 18 show GL entries for inventory items Entries for memo items update Expensed Item Receipts instead of Purchase Order Receipts and Expensed Purchases instead of FAQAD Processing GTM 377 Inventory In addition for memo items an option in Accounts Payabl
117. 6 66 Multi Entry Chg Attribute field Supplier Item Cmmts 0 O Q One supplier lot number can be assigned for each lot received For example if you have two supplier lot numbers you cannot receive both into the same internal lot number There are two alternative ways to handle this situation e Receive each supplier lot number to a different location Then you can assign the same internal lot number to each Receive the first supplier lot and complete the receipt transaction then perform a second receipt To review and report on supplier lot numbers use the Supplier Lot field in the following inquiries Transactions Detail Inquiry 3 21 1 Lot Where Used Inquiry 3 22 4 Expired Inventory Transactions When lot controlled items expire you may want to remove them from inventory Expired inventory cannot be sold or issued for manufacturing However for lot controlled items you can specify a transaction type that can occur for any expired items in a lot Lot Control Level must be 1 or 2 before you can use expired inventory features Compliance 171 Fig 5 16 Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 Tip Inventory is expired if it has an expiration date before today gt See Setting Up Compliance on page 146 FAQAD 172 User Guide Master Data b See Modifying Lot Master Records on page 166 P See Setting Up Compliance on page 146 Tip Items entered through Work Order Bill M
118. 74 ix x User Guide Master Data Entering Intrastat Data in Sales Order Maintenance 274 Entering Data in Order Intrastat Data Maintenance 276 Automatically Updating Invoice History 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee eee 276 Manually Creating Intrastat History 0 cee eee 278 Printing Intrastat Declarations 0 0 0 0 00 cece eens 279 Reprinting Intrastat Declarations 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee 281 Reviewing Intrastat History Information 0 0 2 cee eee 281 Deleting and Archiving Intrastat History 0 00 c ee eee eee 282 Types of Intrastat Data 0 mh 282 Chapter9 Inventory Control 2 00 e eee eee ees 285 Introduction 22s pct eo RERO o d te ao odo sade we Aes edo 286 Setting Up Inventory Control 0 0 cc eee 286 Creating Inventory Detail Records 0 0 0 eee eee 287 Creating Inventory Transactions 0 cece eee eee eee 288 Transtets 3 acne toed eI tie e865 ee V PEE Hla cee hes 289 RECEIPIS tonne oae oir ge dob see UR A Ro aUe Me aia ad 290 ISSUES eos err ne heed eo mead UPC RI ERE EC RI ER EL Ra E pa s 290 Shipping Documents sssseeeee ee 291 Creating Inventory Transaction History 0 0 c eee eee eee 291 Transaction Types i dances Ra cene ei exe eie 291 Reviewing Transaction History 0 0 00 cece eee eee 293 Creating Lot Serial Number History llle 294 Performing Cycle Co
119. 8 Stock Status Report 298 inventory status blank 155 changing 154 159 compliance effect 151 PO Receipt Status 151 WO Receipt Status 151 Inventory Status Code Maintenance 40 inventory transactions 288 expired 171 issues 290 291 receipts 290 shipments 291 Inventory Valuation as of by Location 301 Index 395 Inventory Valuation as of Date 300 Inventory Valuation by Location 300 Inventory Valuation Report 300 Inventory Variance Report 307 invoice date Intrastat 270 Invoice Post Intrastat records created 268 issues 290 inventory transactions 290 Issues Return to Supplier 291 Issues Unplanned 291 Item ABC Status Report Update 298 Item Data Maintenance 100 124 Item Intrastat Data Maintenance 271 item inventory data 18 Item Inventory Data Maintenance 18 auto lot numbering 167 Cycle Count Interval field 296 Item Master Comments Report 17 Item Master Copy auto lot numbering 167 Item Master Maintenance 14 auto lot numbers 167 Cycle Count Interval field 296 logistics costs 237 lot groups 168 Price Break Cat field 60 Item Revision History Inquiry 108 Item Specification Maintenance 100 items 13 23 ABC classification 18 alternate unit of measure 16 analysis codes regeneration 51 and generalized codes 15 cost data 22 customer items 23 data 13 general data 14 GL cost 22 groups 16 in multiple sites 14 Intrastat setup 271 inventory data 18 logistics costs 237 net weight for Intrastat 273 numbering
120. 992 wu w Credit Terms Assign a credit terms code defining this customer s See Setting Up Credit Terms and normal payment terms Trailer Codes on zm E age 200 for Credit Hold Specifies the customer s credit limit When an order Bie exceeds the limit a warning displays If Sales Order Control 7 1 24 requires an order to be put on hold when limits are exceeded the order s Action Status is set to HD hold You cannot print packing lists for an order until credit holds are removed Disc 6 Enter a discount value if the customer normally receives a total order discount in addition to pricing discounts If the customer qualifies for a volume discount higher than this the system uses the volume discount Finance Chg Enter Yes if this customer is subject to finance charges Stmt Cycle Indicate how often statements are printed such as monthly or quarterly This is used as a selection criteria when printing dunning letters and calculating finance charges FAQAD 190 User Guide Master Data Fig 6 7 Customer Freight Data Frame P See Setting Up Freight Charges on page 206 for details b See Customers Suppliers and End Users on page 342 FAQAD Dun Letter Enter Yes if customer receives dunning letters for past due invoices Last Credit Review Enter the date of the last review of the customer s credit status Last Credit Update Indicates the last time the customer s credit limit
121. AT Void Zero Count Unused Tags 307 volume discounts 51 voucher date Intrastat 269 Voucher Maintenance Intrastat effect 276 logistics accounting 254 vouchers pending 217 253 Ww Work Order Account Maintenance 27 Work Order Attribute Maintenance 149 Work Order Batch Inquiry batch number display 159 Work Order Bill Maintenance allocate single lot 19 restricting component issue 172 Work Order Maintenance inventory attributes 149 Work Order Receipt attributes 154 auto lot numbering 169 work orders and component issues 172 compliance 148 inventory attributes 149 single lot per receipt 148 Z Zero Balance Delete Archive 35 zones freight 208 GTM 317
122. Cmt Route PCO for Approval lists PCOs in order beginning with the number you enter in the first frame Select PCOs to display by PCO Type Design Group and By Created By Use Unsubmt Only to display unsubmitted PCOs or set it to No to see both submitted and unsubmitted PCOs Select a PCO for submittal and set Sbmt to Yes in the bottom frame The system displays a submit date for the PCO To unsubmit a submitted PCO for which no approvals have been given set Sbmt to No A partially approved PCO must first have all electronic approvals changed from Yes to No Once unsubmitted additional changes can be made and the approval cycle started again To attach comment pages set Comment to Yes Product Change Control 133 Approving PCRs and PCOs Approve PCOs using PCR PCO Approval 1 9 6 1 Designated reviewers can enter electronic approvals or disapprovals along with comments When Enforce PCO Approval Group Sequencing is Yes in PCC Control See page 109 users must follow the correct sequence during approval PCR PCO Approval lists approval records by criteria you enter at the top of the screen Enter a PCO number to have approvals listed starting with that PCO Either PCRs or PCOs can be listed depending on the value entered in DocType When multiple approval records exist for a document they are listed by approval sequence Specify an approval group to display only approvals required of that group Specify a user ID to
123. Country of Destination Dispatch for the related order line If the codes are not the Intrastat 269 same and both relate to EU countries the transaction is an Intra EU transaction If source and destination countries are the same the transaction is considered domestic An invoice or receiver line is considered an Intrastat item when Intrastat Item is Yes in the corresponding order line Imp Exp Default This field determines the default for Imp Exp on many order maintenance programs Imp Exp controls whether the Intrastat Data frame appears during order maintenance Enter Yes if most of your sales orders and other order types are subject to Intra EU reporting Otherwise enter No Intrastat Net Weight Unit of Measure Enter the unit of measure code you use to indicate kilograms the unit of measure in which the net weight of Intrastat transactions must be reported If the net weight in the item master is not expressed in this unit the system converts it Intrastat Net Weight Minimum Enter the minimum legal net weight to be reported for an Intrastat transaction The system rounds up the extended net weight for the transaction to this value Flow Indicator Arrivals Flow Indicator Dispatches Enter the codes Tip used in your country to indicate Intrastat arrival and dispatch pn e edes transactions Indicator Maintenance PO Reference Date Logic Enter 1 2 or 3 to indicate the method you 2 22 1 1 use to assign a reference date t
124. Currency usp P Target Start 06 Target Update Option S Update Output Batch ID O Q Item Number To Enter a range of item numbers for which price tables are to be created Prod Line To Enter a range of product lines for which price tables are to be created Target Price Table Assign a price list code to the price tables being created Target Currency Assign a currency code to the price tables being created Target Start Assign a start date to the price tables being created Target Update Option Determines how the system handles items that already have a target price list The default is S Skip Skips the item and does not create a price table for it Clear Deletes the existing price table and creates a new one Expire Sets the expire date of the existing price table to start date minus one day and creates a new target price table Update If No the system prints a simulated transaction report If Yes the system creates the target price tables Pricing 93 Fig 3 28 Price List Generation by Item 1 10 2 6 FAQAD 94 User Guide Master Data Copying Price Lists Use Price List Copy 1 10 2 5 to quickly create alternate price lists from one base price list and automatically recalculate prices based on the Cur Fig 3 29 Price List Copy 1 10 2 5 AQAD Conv Factor You can also adjust existing price lists by increasing or decreasing prices with an adjustment percent Price
125. Description Usage Attribute Descriptions Assay The presence absence or quantity Formulations may require a minimum of one or more components usually assay percentage These values are expressed as a percentage reviewed prior to allocating or picking stock from inventory Grade Identifies the quality or physical Formulations may require a minimum properties of an inventory quantity grade These values are reviewed prior Graded products include raw to allocating or picking stock from materials intermediates and inventory Grade may determine the finished goods price charged for the finished product Expire The expiration date for items that If you try to allocate ship or issue Date eventually spoil and for expired inventory you get an error pharmaceuticals that lose potency message If expired inventory is over time recertified assign a new expiration date in Inventory Detail or Multi Lot Attribute Update Receipt The default receipt status for the Items may require a status assigned to Status order them upon receipt For example dangerous or fragile items may need quarantine or inspection before shipment or component issue Define status codes in Inventory Status Code Maintenance 1 1 1 Active Indicates whether the inventory Use this field to override default status code entered in Receipt settings assigned in item site and Status should override status location data records See Inventory assigned in item
126. ECOs if any using ECO by ECO Number Report 13 13 3 Implementing PCC disables ECO functions You print ECOs in order to reenter them as PCOs 2 Determine which manufacturing processes you want to control with PCC and activate the appropriate sections There are four possible activation programs Execute Enable PCC Structure Maintenance 13 13 22 Set Structures to Yes to control product structures This automatically disables ECO functionality in menu 13 13 Execute Enable PCC Routing Maintenance 14 22 Set Routings to Yes to control product routings Execute Enable PCC Formula Maintenance 15 22 Set Formulas and Processes to Yes to control formulas and processes Execute Enable PCC Item Spec Maintenance 19 1 22 Set Item Specifications to Yes to control item specification Important Once you enable PCC and thereby disable ECO functions do not use the ECO functions Enabling PCC makes changes to your system that cannot be reversed 3 Setup e mail definitions for your system in E mail Definition Maintenance 36 4 20 PCC uses e mail to contact users during the approval process and life cycle of change documents 4 Create user IDs in User Maintenance 36 3 1 PCC users must be defined before they can be added to groups involved in PCC activities Assign user passwords or have users select their own You can increase PCC security by requiring users to reenter passwords before accessing PCR PCO Approval If you a
127. Entries created for received 10 a3 ere item cost 1 but not tax Voucher Confirmation Pie i ps Entries created for item TETUR eceipis Ont 00 cost 2 variance 3 tax 00 e 40 00 on item cost 4 and tax on 10 00 variance 5 4 00 AP Usage AP Tax Variance Recoverable 40 00 3 10 00 2 4 00 5 GL Entries for AP Rate Variance Standard Cost Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Processing GTM 367 Fig 13 9 GL Entries for AP Rate Variance Standard Cost Recoverable Tax Goods Receipt Purchase AP Tax Entries created for received Inventory _ Order Receipts _Recoverable item cost 1 and tax 2 100 00 100 00 ione z 2 10 00 Voucher Confirmation Eie eds Entries created for item per 00 00 ECTS 100 00 cost 3 variance 4 tax 10 00 30 00 on item cost 5 and tax on 6 10 00 variance 6 3 00 AP Rate AP Tax Variance Recoverable 30 00 6 3 00 6 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt Entries created for received item cost 1 but not tax Voucher Confirmation Entries created for item cost 2 variance 3 tax on item cost 4 and tax on variance 5 Purchase Inventory Order Receipts 100 00 1 1 100 00 Purchase Accounts Order Receipts Payable 100 00 2 2 1100 00 8 30 00 10 00 E 3 00 AP Rate AP Tax Variance Recoverable 30 00 10 00 4 3 001 5 QAD
128. FAYQAD QAD Enterprise Applications 2009 Standard Edition User Guide Master Data Items Sites Pricing Product Change Control Compliance Addresses Logistics Accounting Intrastat Inventory Control Physical Inventory Global Tax Management 78 0714B QAD 2009 Standard Edition June 2009 This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws No part of this document may be reproduced translated or modified without the prior written consent of QAD Inc The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice QAD Inc provides this material as is and makes no warranty of any kind expressed or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose QAD Inc shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages including lost profits in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material whether based on warranty contract or other legal theory QAD and MFG PRO are registered trademarks of QAD Inc The QAD logo is a trademark of QAD Inc Designations used by other companies to distinguish their products are often claimed as trademarks In this document the product names appear in initial capital or all capital letters Contact the appropriate companies for more information regarding trademarks and registration Copyright 2009 b
129. Food and Drug Administration 21 CFR Part 820 that require the following information FAQAD 302 User Guide Master Data Tip Nettable inventory is available to allocate FAQAD The dates of manufacture The quantity manufactured The quantity released for distribution Any device identifications and control numbers used The report includes the components used their lot or serial numbers the date of issue the ID of the user who performed the issue transaction and the transaction number In addition the labor recorded is displayed with the user ID of the user who recorded the labor and the transaction ID Checking Inventory Availability Use the following programs to quickly check inventory locations and Use Inventory Detail by Item Browse 3 2 to see an item s total nettable and non nettable inventory sorted by site Item location information is also shown Use Inventory Detail by Site Browse 3 3 to see the total quantities on hand by site sorted by item number Item location information is also shown Use Stock Availability Browse 3 17 to review stock availability in a single site or in all sites Use Allocated Inventory Inquiry 3 18 to review total item quantities on hand for a site Allocated and unallocated quantities for an item are also shown Allocated quantity detail information includes Type of order sales order or work order Order number Quantity allocated If it is a det
130. II four zones are reporting zones in their own right and are subtotaled Phantom Hierarchy Reseda a suburb of Los Angeles is taxed in the same way as Los Angeles and does not have a subtotal on the city tax report Tax zone RES sums into LA CITY but is not subtotaled and is not a separate reporting zone Implementing GTM 319 Pasadena is subject to Los Angeles county tax and does not have a subtotal on the county tax report Tax zone PASA sums into zone LA CO It is not subtotaled but is a distinct reporting zone Tax Zone Maintenance Set up tax zones in Tax Zone Maintenance 2 13 3 13 To verify data setup use Tax Zone Browse 2 13 3 14 and Report 2 13 3 15 To verify sums into relationships use Tax Hierarchy Browse 2 13 3 17 and Report 2 13 3 18 Fig 12 2 m Tax Zone Kass Maintenance Tax Zone CAN ONT 2 13 3 13 Description Ontario Canada Country Code CAN Canada Subtotal This Level t State ONT Reporting Zone County City Postal Code Sums Into Tax Zone Sums Into Tax zoe P Description Canada Country Code CAN State County City Postal Code Tax Zone Enter a 16 character code to identify a unique geographic region for tax types Set up tax zones for every level at which separate tax calculations and reporting are required starting with the top level and working downward For example set up countries before states states before counties and so on Description Enter the des
131. Inventory Account Maintenance 1 2 13 Assign sales accounts to sites sites and customer types sites and distribution channels or sites customer types and channels in Sales Account Maintenance 1 2 17 If you want to use the product line account code but modify the sub account or cost center specify the new sub account or cost center in the Default field and set the associated Override field to Yes Items Sites 27 FAQAD 28 User Guide Master Data Fig 2 8 Inventory Account Maintenance 1 2 13 b See Company and Site Addresses on page 341 FAQAD Figure 2 8 illustrates Inventory Account Maintenance The other alternate account programs are very similar Inventory Account Maintenance Product Line 1500 AUTOMOTIVE PRODUCTS Site 15000 San Diego Auto Products Location 666 Reject Rework Cage Default Sub Account S100 Override Default Cost Center C100 Override Inventory Acct Ei P 100 P p Scrap Ac p 0 p Inv Discrep Aci 0 p Cost Revalue Acct 1 0 p uu id During transaction entry the system automatically retrieves and uses most alternate inventory and purchasing accounts Alternate work order and sales accounts are retrieved and displayed and can be modified if needed Sites The site code identifies a specific warehouse or a group of buildings at the same physical location The site code in the inventory detail record is a basic unit for inventory control and planning
132. L transactions for separate companies or businesses The entity code assigned to the site determines the GL entity for transactions created when inventory is moved into or out of it When the operations for a single company entity are controlled within one database the system entity the GL entity defined as the primary entity and the site entities should be identical This remains true in each operating database even if multiple databases are used for consolidated order processing or distribution requirements planning Default Inventory Status Enter a status code to associate by default with items at this site Automatic Locations Set to Yes if you want the system to create new locations whenever an undefined value is entered in an inventory transaction Domain Enter the code identifying the domain defined in Domain Maintenance 36 10 1 that you want to associate with this site You must specify a valid active domain that you have access to The default is your current working domain If you change the default the system ensures that the site does not already exist as a primary site in a different domain or an error is generated Note The EMT Supplier and External Supplier fields are used by Enterprise Material Transfer EMT Transfer Variance Account Enter the GL account code used to track cost variances for inventory transfers between two sites This account defaults from the Transfer Variance account set up in Domain
133. Last Name Wilson First Name Janice Address 1 400 S Main Street Address 2 Address 3 City Las Vegas State NV Post 68105 Country U S A Home Phone 510 988 3444 Business Phone SSN 243 689 1762 Birth Date 03 05 1966 Employee Data Job Title Department Date Employed Default Project Date Terminated Employment StatusAC P Setting Up Country Codes Records for tax zones addresses delivery transit time codes users and transactions use alphanumeric country codes To make data entry easier consider using significant alphabetic rather than numeric codes Set up country codes in Country Code Maintenance 2 14 1 To verify data setup use Country Code Browse 2 14 2 and Report 2 14 3 Country Code BEL Alternate Code EC Country 7 NAFTA Country O DEA Country O GATT Country O Country Group Country Type Comments Country Code Enter a 3 character code identifying a country If a group of countries is subject to the same tax type set up a country code for the group Addresses 195 Name Enter the name of the country Since the name displays on printed addresses enter the complete name of the country rather than an abbreviation You cannot specify the same country name for two country codes Alternate Code Optionally enter an alternate code for Sorting in Country Code Browse The International Organization for Standards ISO country code Each user must be associated w
134. O Maintenance PCO Ref Optionally enter a value as a cross reference Closing a PCR or PCO in this way makes a PCO available for export to another system database Importing and Exporting PCRs and PCOs Use PCR PCO Import Export 1 9 13 to export closed PCO data to an ASCII file for import into another database or application such as a Product Data Management system PCR PCO Import Export _ Import Export Export Number PCO00007 To 1235 ID To Database To Import Export File ecdmplod d Re Process Report Update Output Aiea p Use the import function to restore archive files created by PCR PCO Delete Archive 1 9 15 which is similar to standard delete archive programs Important You cannot restore PCR PCO archive files using the standard Archive File Reload 36 16 5 Tip Also use this program to close PCRs that are not closed by becoming part of a PCO b See page 130 for details on PCO PCR trailer fields Fig 4 30 PCR PCO Import Export 1 9 13 FAQAD 140 User Guide Master Data P See Setting Up PCC Control on page 108 for details FAQAD Re Process Only available when you are importing data Enter Yes to have the Type and Design Group of imported PCRs and PCOs set to blank The closed status is also removed and set to blank This enables you to assign new types and design groups appropriate for the new domain If No a PCO with a Type and Design Group combination that d
135. Or you can charge a weight based rate but with an additional charge for amounts over a certain minimum Freight Terms Maintenance Freight Terms Maintenance is not directly related to the other freight maintenance functions Terms are not related to a specific freight list or charge Instead they are specified for a particular customer in Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 or for a particular sales order quote or invoice Freight terms determine Whether to apply freight charges to a particular order or specify them in general for a particular customer How freight charges are calculated Table 6 9 lists the six methods for calculating freight charges Whether freight amounts update the Sales Freight Accrued and Sales Freight Applied accounts specified in Domain Account Control 36 1 Note If you are using Logistics Accounting freight terms also determine the default logistics charge code and whether accrual is by shipment or line An additional frame displays in Freight Terms Maintenance for this information Addresses 211 Table 6 9 Type Description Freight Term Types Add Freight is calculated accrued and placed on the trailer Allow Freight is calculated accrued and shown as a negative amount on the trailer Collect Freight is calculated and placed on the trailer However the freight charges are not tracked through the Sales Freight Accrued and the Sales Freight Applied accounts The customer will pay freight charges
136. Procedures for data entry Regular cycle counts Good stockroom practices such as proper labeling and organization Controlled stockroom that is people cannot just walk in and take material If the Overissue field for the inventory status code is set to No you may be unable to record a shipment transaction for inventory that is known to have shipped because a work order receipt has yet to be processed To prevent unnecessary delays in processing transactions the Overissue field can be set to Yes At the end of the day a report can be run to check for negative balances Regular cycle counts also help identify problems In some regulatory environments it may be better to set the Overissue field to No Here data entry procedures should be developed to ensure the timely entry of inventory transactions This may be particularly true when there are critical items controlled by lot or serial number Note Overissues are not prevented when components are issued during inventory work order and repetitive backflush transactions These transactions assume that component inventory must have been issued if a parent is received or an operation has been completed QAD 42 User Guide Master Data gt See Transaction Types on page 291 Table 2 3 Transaction Types Used to Restrict Actions FAQAD Restricting Transactions You can use inventory status codes to control and manage how items sites and locations are used in
137. Processing 12 17 21 Distribution Order Shipments 12 17 22 Note This step is not required for other types of shipments For sales order shippers the shipper number is used as the internal reference Shipper sequence codes are defined in Container Shipper Control 7 9 24 When distribution orders use shipper documents the shipper number is also used Inbound logistics charge accruals use receiver or PO shipper numbers as internal references Use Number Range Maintenance 36 2 21 1 to create sequence parameters for sales order shipments and distribution order shipments RMAs use sales order sequences Fig 7 5 rR e Maintenar PaT Number Range Maintenance M Mainitena Sequence ID lasoship Internal 7 Allow Discarding O Effective Date 07 A Allow Voiding Expiration pae sd Target Dataset Enter the dataset identifier associated with this sequence Enter la_so_ship_id for sales order shipments e Enter la do ship id for distribution order shipments Internal Enter Yes to have NRM generate sequence numbers automatically Enter No to let users supply numbers that are validated against the NRM sequence Setting Up the Control Program Use Logistics Accounting Control 2 15 24 to Activate the Logistics Accounting module Specify whether pending vouchers must contain a third party logistics supplier before they can be selected for vouchering Assign NRM sequence codes to sales order and distributi
138. Product Engineering maintains information concerning the implementation of engineering change orders for an item Purchasing tracks specific supplier requirements and Quality Engineering stores inspection related text These requirements can be met by recording master comments Each master comment can have up to 99 pages of text Master comments are identified by reference type and language codes When master comments are added for an item the item number is entered as the reference code Use the Type field to identify different master comment records for the same item number For example the type codes PE PO and QE can be used for Product Engineering Purchasing and Quality Engineering To review all the master comments entered for an item print the Item Master Comments Report 1 5 12 Master comments do more than store and organize textual information for an item They can also be copied into documents such as purchase orders sales quotations and sales orders FAQAD 18 User Guide Master Data Fig 2 4 Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 Item Inventory Data See Using Lot Control on page 161 for details AQAD Inventory Data Inventory control is responsible for the security movement accuracy and in some cases the allocation of inventory Every item has inventory control information associated with it The system uses this information to track and control the movement of the item For example if an i
139. Qoh Site 10000 5 0095 Location 200 500 00 Lot Serial GL Cost 385 50 Ref Last Count Description OASIS TM COOLING SYST Qty On Hand 0 0 HOME INDUST MODEL Qty Counted 34 0 Qty On Hand Variance 100 00 UM EA Annual Usage Variance 612 72 UM Conversion 1 0000 Amount Variance 13 107 00 Remarks Effective Dr 1500 Cr 5900 Amount 13 107 00 Entering a Recount Use Cycle Count Results Entry 3 14 to enter recount figures Set Cycle Count Type to R Recount If a recount quantity is still out of tolerance the system alerts you to this but nevertheless updates its figures Reporting Cycle Count Results After completing the cycle count use Cycle Count Results Report 3 15 to generate a count report showing Items counted In tolerance quantity n tolerance percent tems recounted FAQAD 298 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Creating Inventory Reports Use the reports on Inventory Detail 3 1 and Inventory Reports Menus 3 6 to check inventory statuses and values current and GL Detail Allocation Inventory Report Use Detail Allocation Inventory Report 3 1 5 or 2 1 9 6 to review how much detail allocated inventory exists in a site or location for ranges of items sites locations addresses or inventory status codes The summary report lists detail allocated inventory totals by item or site The detail report also lists specific lot serial and reference information You can optionally d
140. Quantitative Information Audit Trail Reference Date Country of Dest Disp VAT Registration Number Flow Indicator Mode of Transport Region of Origin Dest Commodity Code Country of Origin Port of Transshipment Terms of Delivery Statistical Procedure Port of Arr Disp Nature of Transaction Invoice Value in Transaction Currency Invoice Value in Base Currency Supplementary Units in the UM as required for the Commodity Code Statistical Value in Base Currency Net Weight in the Intrastat Net Weight UM Reference to the underlying sales invoice or receiver line that is Order Type Order Number Order Line Receiver Invoice Quantity in the item s stocking UM or order line UM for memo items Address Site and Item Number Note The statistical value is not automatically calculated because every EU country has its own definition of the statistical value calculation Instead a user exit program iestatvl i is provided to calculate the statistical value Customize this program to insert a new formula Intrastat 283 Table 8 2 Intrastat Data Types QAD 284 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Detail Records 287 msactions 288 286 User Guide Master Data b See Chapter 10 Physical Inventory for details gt See ABC Class Code on page 295 FAQAD Introduction Inventory Control supports a broad range of inventory activities You can
141. RII 138 Implementation essc et ee mer wae ee eo ee 138 Closing PCRs and PCOS ssssseeeeeee aa EN a 139 Importing and Exporting PCRs and PCOs eseseeeeeeeee 139 Setting Up PCC Security icis ih de ee bro eee RE n 140 Access to PCO Maintenance Detail Functions 140 Restricting Access to Other Functions 00005 140 Chapter5 Compliance 0 2c cece eee eee eee 143 Introduction sicilia hb aer kr eee E Re eo ee 144 Site SCCUTILY sss s Cede ead elg Pa aca a ek o er aet 144 Inventory Attributes lsseeeeeeeee I 145 Batch Control icine tua eda e aeg ed ace eoe d 145 Component Issue Control 145 Lot Control iiid eR AIR sad hea eee pde rus 145 Multi Lot Inventory Detail 0 0 0 eee ee eee 146 Controlled Substances llle 146 Setting Up Compliance lsseeeeeeee ee 146 Defining Inventory Attributes lese 149 Why Are Attributes Important 0 2 0 150 Inventory Attributes Work Flow 0 0 0 cece eee eee 152 Attribute Descriptions cesu esaerea eee eee ee eee 152 Inventory Attribute Active Field 00000002000 154 Using Work Order Batch Control 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 157 Batch Control Work Flow 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 158 FAQAD Contents Assigning Batch Numbers to Work Orders 4 158 Changing Inventory Detail Records 0 0 0 0 eee eee ee 159 Using Lot Con
142. S TM COOLING SYST HOME INDUST MODEL Item Data Prod Line 1000 Added 2 Design Group Promo croup MER Price Break Cat C Item Number Enter an item code Price Break Cat Enter a category name Name price break categories as you like but make sure that you enter the same names on price lists and other items Creating and Maintaining Price Lists A price list defines all the information necessary to correctly price an item for a customer A price list applies to the customer or item codes you assign to it as follows A single item number A single customer number A group of customers belonging to an analysis code A group of items belonging to an analysis code All customers The discount type referred to as the amount type defines the purpose of a price list There are several discount types and they can be combined A price list also defines minimum quantities effective dates and other information you may want to extend to your customers When an order is entered the system determines which price lists apply examines those lists and determines which of them yield the best price for the order Applicable price lists may have been determined using the same or different criteria Discount Types The Amount Type field determines the discount type assigned to a price list Possible choices are List Price Used as the item list price List prices also set allowable minimum and max
143. Sales Orders Invoices and Customer Services modules GL and Current Costs The item GL costs are the standard costs used for GL transactions Both the GL costs and current costs are the costs for the item at the site specified in the inventory data section In turn each of these costs has five cost categories material labor burden overhead and subcontract Burden is sometimes known as variable burden or variable overhead Overhead is known as fixed burden or fixed overhead Use Item Site Cost Maintenance 1 4 18 to update the GL and current costs for a particular site Both the GL and current costs can be updated automatically during routing and product structure roll ups by using item cost utilities in the Item Data Menu 1 4 or by using cost simulation programs in the Cost Management module Items Sites 23 Customer and Supplier Items A customer may prefer to order using their own item number or an industry standard number rather than the one your company uses Example Contractors may be required to order with a government procurement code instead of your item number Use Customer Item Maintenance 1 16 to set up a cross reference between your item numbers and those used by a customer A customer may have more than one number that references a single internal item number If so you can set up multiple relationships When a customer item number is specified on a sales order the system accesses the price description an
144. Service Taxable Freight Total Tax 155 00 Total 2 155 00 Print Sales Order AR Acct 1200 Print Pack List Ei Prepaid 0 00 Print Inv Hist E FOB Point ESCONDIDO EDI Inv Hist Ship Via GROUND Partial OK BOL Ship To 10010001 Fig 13 4 Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 View Edit Tax Detail Option oov In the tax detail frame scroll through the Line and Trailer fields to view the tax rate information for each tax type Note You cannot change tax amounts unless Update Tax Allowed for the tax rate is Yes Order SO10063 Tax Included 1 Tax Env CA CA Edited Tax Type CA SLS Tax By Line Tax Date 08 05 2002 Tax Rate 7 75 Tax Code 12 Sold To 10010001 Related Doc California Sales Tax Bill To 1001000 Ship To 10010001 Tax Detail Record Trnx Amt 2 000 00 Non Taxable Base 0 00 Taxable Base 2 000 00 Tax Amount 155 00 Recoverable Tax 0 00 Non Recover Tax 155 00 Absorb Retain 0 00 ov Fig 13 5 Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 Tax Detail Record AQAD 360 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Line Tax amounts for line items and trailer charges are identified by line number Use Next Previous to scroll through the amounts for each tax type 0 Line items taxed by total 1 through 99998 Line items taxed by line The line number in the tax detail corresponds to the order line item number 99999 Trailer charges Trailer For trailer charges enter th
145. Sites FAQAD Introduction Item site information supplies a foundation for many other functions in the system Figure 2 1 illustrates how items and sites are central to other processes Product Structures Configured Products Sales Quotes Routing Product Lines Work Centers E Sales Orders Items Sites Inventory Control Work Orders This chapter discusses four foundational elements in the system Sites All inventory related functions can be done by site A site may be a manufacturing or distribution facility that requires separate planning and inventory control Locations Within each site inventory is held in locations These may be temporary or permanent and they may be assigned rules that govern how inventory in the location can be issued or received Items Items are defined for use throughout the system The characteristics of an item include inventory data such as ABC class and shelf life planning data such as order policies and lead time and price and cost data The same item may have different characteristics at each site Items Sites 13 Product Lines For planning and reporting purposes items are grouped by product line Items Item records are created primarily for items and products that are stored in inventory and or planned by Material Requirements Planning MRP or Distribution Requirements Planning DRP At this time items are assigned to product lines and d
146. Sites 43 QAD 44 User Guide Master Data FAQAD 46 User Guide Master Data Table 3 1 Pricing Menus FAQAD Introduction to Pricing The system supports automatic pricing in a number of key transactions The simplest way to establish prices is by associating prices with items in Item Master Maintenance However this approach is often too inflexible to meet the needs of modern companies For greater flexibility the system offers two pricing models based on price lists best pricing and list discount table pricing These models are represented by submenus on the Pricing and Discount menu 1 10 Use price lists based on the best pricing model for sales orders sales quotes and issue lines on Service Support Management SSM return material authorizations Set up these price lists in SO SQ RMA Issues Pricing Menu 1 10 1 Use price lists based on the list discount table model for automatic pricing of purchase orders scheduled sales orders supplier scheduled orders and SSM RMA receipt lines Set up these price lists in PO Sched RMA Rept Price Menu 1 10 2 Menu Menu Label Program 1 10 1 SO SQ RMA Issues Pricing Menu 1 10 1 1 Price List Maintenance pppimt p 1 10 1 2 Price List Inquiry pppiiq01 p z 1 10 1 3 Price List Report pppirp01 p 1 10 1 5 Price Lists by Customer Inquiry pppiiq02 p 1 10 1 6 Price Lists by Item Inquiry pppiiq03 p E 1 10 1 8 Price List Copy pppicp p z 1 10 1 13 Pricing What If In
147. Sites are assigned to a specific GL entity and domain Some programs such as MRP work vertically within single sites Others such as distribution requirements planning DRP and consolidated order processing work horizontally across two or more sites and possibly two or more domains located in the same or different databases The system uses sites for inventory records item costing purchasing sales quotations sales orders forecasting master scheduling MRP and DRP Not all programs operate by site For example departments and work centers are not site specific Taxes To calculate taxes you must set up a corresponding address code for each site in Company Address Maintenance 2 12 On taxable transactions the system uses the site address to select the correct line item tax environment Items Sites 29 Sites and Enterprise Material Transfer EMT If you are using Enterprise Material Transfer EMT you must set up sites b See User Guide to support processing of EMT sales orders EMT lets you automatically Distribution A for s details on EMT translate sales orders into purchase orders and transmit them to suppliers in electronic data interchange EDI format using EDI eCommerce EMT also manages and coordinates changes so that sales order and purchase order information is synchronized Multi level EMT manages orders across multiple levels within an organization Order changes can be made at the top or bottom of the hier
148. Taxes based on geographic location effective date range tax class item usage or the nature of a company s business Tax exemptions Taxation by line item or by order total Taxes based on a percentage of the item amount Trailer charges with multiple tax classes Luxury taxes for item amounts greater than a specified value Capped taxes that cannot exceed a specified maximum Taxes that include other tax amounts Purchase taxes recoverable against tax collected on sales Ability to override system calculated tax amounts during transaction entry Reverse calculation of tax amounts from line items that already include tax Taxes your company absorbs rather than passes on to the customer Remittance of purchase taxes directly to the government instead of to the supplier Introductionto GTM 313 Exclusion of credit term discounts from tax amounts Ability to generate general ledger entries for purchase taxes at receipt of goods or supplier invoice Since GIM accommodates a variety of taxation conditions manual overrides of automated calculations are usually not needed Furthermore once GTM is set up updates are very simple Considerations GIM does not currently support unit based taxes such as 0 05 per can of soda GTM does not calculate taxes on distribution orders generated by the Distribution Requirements Planning module In this situation generate sales orders instead of distribution orders
149. The inventory status code determines whether the inventory balance at a site or location is Nettable for material requirements planning calculations Available for sales order and work order allocations Allocations are used to reserve inventory and assist in picking inventory to be shipped or issued Issued even if the site or location has a zero or negative inventory balance Not available for particular kinds of inventory transactions For example material that is located in scrap locations should not be used for sales order issues FAQAD 40 User Guide Master Data Fig 2 13 Inventory Status Code Maintenance 1 1 1 b See Chapter 5 Compliance for information AQAD Inventory Status Code Maint Status Code QC HOLD Available Nettable Overissue Restricted Transactions Restricted Transaction CIM Allowed Description Sales Order Shipments Unplanned Issue WO Issue or Backflush CIM Allowed Description Restricted Transaction o pP n Sales Order Shipments You must associate an inventory status code with every site or location you set up You may want to create a blank inventory status code to use for most situations This status code should be both nettable and available with no restricted transactions Status Defaults Each site s inventory status defaults to any locations you add to that site You can modify inventory status for individual locations as needed Item qu
150. Transaction Type Description Program Creating ADD FC Create a forecast for an item Forecast Maintenance 22 1 ADD PO Add an item to a purchase order Purchase Order Maintenance 5 7 ADD PS Create a product structure Product Structure Maintenance 13 5 relationship ADD RE Create a repetitive schedule Schedule Maintenance 18 22 2 1 ADD RMA Add an item to a return line ona RMA Maintenance 11 7 1 1 service support RMA Transaction Type Description Program Creating ADD SEO _ Add an item to a material order Material Order Maintenance 11 11 1 ADD SO Add an item to a sales order or Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 RMA issue line ADD SQ Add an item to a sales quote Sales Quote Maintenance 7 12 1 ADD WO Create a work order for an item Work Order Maintenance 16 1 INC PS Create a product structure Incorporation 1 9 7 5 relationship by incorporating a PCO ISS RMA Receive an item into inventory RMA Receipts 11 7 1 13 on a service support RMA You can also use item status codes defined with Item Status Code Maintenance 1 1 5 to restrict transactions for an item Item status codes typically reflect the status of an item in its life cycle from planning through design production and obsolescence In contrast inventory status codes indicate what can be done with an item based on its physical location or its current use in the system Items
151. Transaction Detail Inquiry 3 21 1 Reports on the Work Order Reports Menu 16 3 Reports on the Lot Serial Number Menu 3 22 Compliance 159 The programs listed in Table 5 5 use or list batch numbers Table 5 5 Menu Number Programs Using Batch Numbers Transaction Detail Inquiry 3 21 1 Lot Transactions by Date Browse 3 22 1 Lot Actual Bill Inquiry 3 22 3 Lot Where Used Inquiry 3 22 4 Work Order Batch Browse 1 22 9 Work Order by Order Report 16 3 1 Work Order by Item Report 16 3 2 Work Order Status Report 16 3 3 Work Order History Report 16 3 6 Work Order Release Print 16 6 Multiple Work Order Release Print 16 7 Work Order Split 16 9 Changing Inventory Detail Records Use Multi Lot Inventory Detail Update 1 22 19 to change assay grade status and expire date attributes for a particular item number and lot serial combination Warning Use this feature with caution The only way to restore old inventory attribute values is to reassign them using this update If you change all values for a record type to a new value you cannot recover the original values Assay grade expire date and inventory status can have field security implemented to limit access to any or all of the fields Use Field Security Maintenance 36 3 19 to enter the names of fields you need to restrict Users must have explicit authority to access secured fields FAQAD 160 User Guide Master Data Use the following procedure to update
152. Type and Created By to show only PCOs matching those criteria Fig 4 29 Incorporation Selection 1 9 7 4 Number PCO ID Database Name Type Created By Unincorporated Only Number PCO ID Database Title PCOD0008 Redesign Cooler Engine Number PCO ID Database Title PCOD0D0008 Redesign Cooler Engine Unincorporated Only Enter Yes to view only PCOs that are distributed but not yet incorporated Enter No to view all distributed PCOs If different PCOs change item master data for the same item the system and standard practice requires them to be incorporated in revision level sequence The system displays an error if you set PCO effective dates out of sequence or give more than one PCO the same effective date If a PCO has a mandatory date a warning displays if the effective date is not on or before this mandatory date FAQAD 138 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Incorporation Once a PCO effective date is established the PCO can be incorporated into product definition tables At this point you can still change PCO effective dates or even remove PCOs from the production system Any incorporated PCO not yet implemented can be unincorporated or reincorporated by changing the PCO effective date Incorporation 1 9 7 5 updates the database with changes from PCOs for which effective dates have been set Incorporation makes change data available to MRP DRP and the other preproduction modules Incorporation generates
153. Up PCC eos isa maa lega ela xdg iad eH eue Eee 106 Preparing Data for Use with PCC 0 0 ee eee ee 107 Setting Up PCC Control 0 eee 108 Defining Groups Routing Slips and Change Types 110 Creating PCRs and POOS 0 eee nee eee 119 Using PCR PCO Function Maintenance 0005 122 Maintaining Text Records 0 eee eee eee eee ee 123 Maintaining Item Records 00 cece ee 124 Maintaining Product Structure Records 005 125 Maintaining Routing Records 0 0 c eee ee eee 127 Maintaining Formula Records 0 0 00 e eee eee eee eee 128 Maintaining Process Records 0 0 0 cece eee eens 129 Maintaining Item Specifications 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee 129 Maintaining Trailers 0 0 cece cece eee ee 130 V vi User Guide Master Data Reviewing PCO Data 0 cece eh 131 Routing PCRs and PCOs for Approval 2 0 c eee ee eee eee 132 Approving PCRs and PCOs 0 2 cece eens 133 Reroutine PCOS sidan ein ceed eb utei cess ag pee dee oe 134 Detail Approval Maintenance 0 0 0 0 134 Incorporating PCOs into Production 00 0 eee eee eee eee 134 PCO Release and Distribution 00 0 0 e eee eee 135 Incorporation Planning Report 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 136 Incorporation Selection 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 137 Incorporation eee
154. a discount table exists If Yes only items from an existing discount table can be entered and only if the price list item unit of measure and currency match the order item unit of measure and currency exactly In searching for a valid price blank is not considered a match If discount tables are set up with a blank item or unit of measure a price is never found If you are pricing by product line rather than item number this field should be set to No Prices can be overridden unless the field is protected through security Price Table Required This field determines how strictly price lists are used to control order entry If No items can be entered whether or not a price list exists If Yes only items from an existing price list can be entered and only if the price list item unit of measure and currency match the order item unit of measure and currency exactly In searching for a valid price blank is not considered a match If price lists are set up with a blank item or unit of measure a price is never found If you are pricing by product line this field should be set to No Prices can be overridden unless the field is protected through security Price by Line Due Date Specifies whether the system selects the list and discount price based on order date or line item due date 132 100 User Guide Master Data Introduction The Product Change Control PCC module is a flexible information storage too
155. about the PCO Number PCO00007 ID 1234 Database PCR PCO Type PCO Design Group ACCT1 Created By hme 06 28 2002 Cas 1 User Code ui 1 ouo A PCO is uniquely identified by a combination of Number ID and Domain fields If you enter a combination that does not already exist a new PCO is created An error displays if you try to perform maintenance on a distributed PCO and a warning displays if you open a PCO already routed for approval If you continue despite the warning any approvals are essentially revoked and the document must be rerouted for approval If you do not enter a number and Auto Number is Yes in PCC Control the system automatically generates a number based on your entries in PCO Type and Design Group PCO Type determines the prefix and number which default from PCC Control ID Enables you to create multiple PCOs with the same PCO number for grouping purposes Typically used to divide large PCOs into smaller ones for ease of implementation When you open a PCO with a shared number and different ID you are warned that related PCOs exist Domain Use this field to enter an optional domain name the field is not validated and does not automatically create any physical link to or interaction with another system database This field is intended for multi domain installations where product development and manufacturing are performed at separate locations In this case the same change can have different
156. accruals for outbound logistics charges are triggered by shipments For each receipt or shipment a pending voucher is created for each logistics charge accrual Inbound logistics charges are built into the GL cost for items Note See Accrual Currency on page 235 for information on how the system determines the accrual currency used for inbound and outbound logistics charges Figure 7 1 summarizes the steps involved in accruing logistics charges Fig 7 1 Logistics Accounting Work Flow Set up Logistics Accounting Update pending vouchers Select pending vouchers for payment Accrue logistics charges mcm ti optional Apportioning Logistics Charges When an invoice is received from a logistics supplier the total amount of the invoice is vouchered To capture the logistics costs for individual line items a portion of the total invoice amount is allocated to each line item on the associated order FAQAD 216 User Guide Master Data Table 7 1 Example Item Costs Table 7 2 Apportioning by Accrued Value FAQAD The system apportions inbound and outbound logistics charges to line items on an order during vouchering based on the apportion method associated with the logistics charge code The total invoice amount is allocated to individual line items as a ratio of the accrued logistics charges When vouchering inbound logistics charges you can automatically update the curr
157. ach order line item Calculated freight amounts are tracked using the accrual and expense accounts defined for the logistics charge code in Outbound Accrual Account Maint 2 15 16 and Outbound Expense Account Maint 2 15 19 If detail accounts are not defined in these programs the system uses the outbound accrual and expense accounts defined for the logistics charge code in Logistics Charge Code Maint When logistics charges are accrued by shipment or by order line you must assign the logistics charge code used to track the logistics charges incurred and payable to a third party carrier Fig 7 20 Freight Terms Maintenance m AIDS 2 20 13 Description Domestic Frt on trailer Type 1 Value is based on current Accrual Level Accrue by Shipment freight term Logistics Charge Code DomFrt Domestic Freight type o0 Logistics Charge Code Enter a code identifying a logistics charge When Type is set to 4 Collect or 6 Will Call logistics charges are not accrued The lower frame displays but cannot be updated Processing Orders During order maintenance the logistics charge code associated with the freight term and the default supplier if any are displayed The logistics supplier can be changed FAQAD Logistics Accounting 247 The same logistics accounting frames and fields are used in the following programs and their related shipping programs Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 P See User Guide Distribu
158. address record customer supplier or end user You can override the transaction tax usage for line items but not for trailer charges Tax Environment The tax environment is used to select tax types for the transaction The ship from ship to tax zones and tax class if any determines the default tax environment A line item can have a different tax environment if its ship from tax zone is different from the one for the rest of the transaction Tax Class Tax class is used to select the transaction tax environment and or tax rates for items and trailer charges Tax class defaults from the relevant address record customer supplier or end user FAQAD 358 User Guide Master Data FAQAD For inventory items the default tax class is the item tax class For memo items the default tax class is the transaction tax class For trailer charges the tax class is the one for the 1 trailer tax detail 2 trailer charge or 3 transaction depending on which one the system finds first Taxable The taxable status determines how tax types apply to the transaction If Taxable is No the amount is nontaxable However if Taxable is Yes the amount can also be nontaxable if you use tax types and zero percent tax rates to report tax exemptions The customer supplier or end user taxable status determines the default status of the transaction If the transaction taxable status is No the entire order has this status For inventory items th
159. ader but can be unique for each line Determines whether this sales order line is considered by Sales Order Repricing 7 1 11 and whether automatic repricing can occur for this line item in Sales Order Maintenance Using List Discount Table Pricing List discount table pricing is an alternative to the best pricing model It is used for pricing different kinds of orders than best pricing including scheduled orders purchase orders returns to suppliers and receipts in RMA Maintenance In this model prices are defined when an item is set up in the item master Price lists are used to store other pricing structures including prices in foreign currencies prices or discounts for a certain unit of measure such as a case or full truckload discounts at different quantity levels or prices calculated as a percentage markup over GL cost Price lists and discount tables can be associated with suppliers and customers and provide defaults for transactions where they are used Note Service Support functions use price lists in a slightly different way For RMA receipts the price list is derived from the warranty or contract associated with the item being returned The RTS however is exactly like a purchase order and derives a price list from the supplier master record Four types of price lists can be defined in Price List Maintenance 1 10 2 1 Type M Percent markups or markdowns from item GL cost Type D Percent discounts from item
160. ail Picked or a general Qty Alloc allocation Use Unallocated Inventory Inquiry 3 19 to review non detail allocated inventory for a specified item by site and location Site information shows quantity on hand and quantity allocated Location information shows unallocated quantity for the location Expiration date and grade are also shown Unallocated quantity can include quantities reserved by general allocations 304 User Guide Master Data P See Performing Cycle Counts on page 295 for details AQAD Introduction Physical Inventory enables you to count and compare actual on hand inventory balances with on hand quantities maintained in the system This can also be done with cycle counting To perform a physical inventory count first determine the items you want to count and the count frequency Each item to be counted must have a system generated count tag used to record item count information The steps for conducting a physical inventory are 1 Delete the tags from the previous physical inventory Freeze inventory balances Create and print tags Enter initial tag counts Review results and enter recounts if necessary Void zero count unused tags Nn O o A OO N Update inventory balances Deleting Archiving Old Tags Before creating new tags for an inventory count delete tags from the last count using Tag Delete Archive 3 16 23 This program e Deletes specified tags Archives delet
161. ailer codes are also used to specify line charges during sales order line item entry FAQAD 206 User Guide Master Data b See Chapter 7 Logistics Accounting on page 213 Table 6 8 Freight Charges Menu 2 20 b See User Guide Distribution A for details on how freight is calculated for a sales order AQAD Setting Up Freight Charges Many companies add freight charges to sales orders and RMAs When the system calculates freight terms it takes into account the shipper ship from site ship to address shipment weight currency minimum weight and other factors Data affecting freight charges is derived from three sources The order Customer information Freight information entered in the Freight Charges menu Note Enabling the optional Logistics Accounting module changes how freight charges are tracked and billed See Chapter 7 for details on setting up Logistics Accounting Table 6 8 lists the programs in the Freight Charges menu Number Name Program 2 20 1 Freight List Maintenance sofrlmt p 2 20 2 Freight List Browse sobr002 p 2 20 4 Freight Zone Maintenance sofrzmt p 2 20 5 Freight Zone Browse sobr006 p 2 20 7 Freight Class Maintenance sofrclmt p 2 20 8 Freight Class Browse sobr001 p 2 20 10 Freight Charges Maintenance sofrcmt p 2 20 11 Freight Charges Browse sobr005 p 2 20 12 Freight Charges Report sofrcrp p 2 20 13 Freight Terms Maintenance sofrtmt p 2 20 14 Freight Terms Browse sobr0
162. aining in PCR PCO 125 restricting component issues to 172 Projected Surplus Inventory 300 promotions prefix pricing 52 province codes 317 GTM 317 proximo terms 201 use of 201 ways to set up 202 pt um 16 Pur Mfg code 21 Purchase Order Cost Update 241 Purchase Order Maintenance logistics accounting 239 Purchase Order Receipts attributes 154 auto lot numbering 169 logistic charges 243 Purchase Order Returns 245 purchase orders 150 compliance 148 single lot per receipt 148 terms of trade 239 purchase price variance 370 purchase receivers and Intrastat 268 Purchasing Account Maintenance 27 Purchasing Control 205 pricing fields 98 Q quality management PCC control of item specifications 129 quantity break types 70 quotes See sales quotes R rates GTM tax 332 Reason Codes Maintenance severity lists 115 receipts inventory 290 status 151 receipts status defined 153 Receipts Backward Exploded 290 Receipts Return to Stock 290 Receipts Sales Order Return 290 Receipts Unplanned 290 recoverable taxes 347 363 Index 399 account 331 region code for Intrastat declarations 272 Region Maintenance 267 Regional Value Content 173 registration VAT 343 Release and Distribution 105 119 121 135 Reorder Report 298 repetitive receipts compliance 148 single lot per receipt 148 transactions inventory attributes 150 154 Repetitive Labor Transaction auto lot numbering 169 reports Intrastat 281 tax 385 Reprice field 84
163. aintained in Outbound Accrual Account Maint Displays account sub account and cost center information maintained in Outbound Expense Account Maint Displays only those logistics charges where the amount accrued differs from the amount paid Shows all open logistics charges Can be run with a historical date to show what was open as of a prior date FAQAD 262 User Guide Master Data FAQAD 274 Reviewing Intra istory Information 281 ing and Archiving Intrastat History 282 Types of Intrastat D 2 264 User Guide Master Data Table 8 1 Intrastat Menu 2 22 AQAD Introduction Intrastat offers powerful tools for companies doing business in EU member countries and for those wanting written documentation of inventory movements You can Generate Intrastat reports that are fully compliant with Intrastat legislation Maintain tables with valid values for Intrastat codes such as terms of delivery and country codes Assign Intrastat codes to items Enter country codes for ship to customers and suppliers Record Intrastat codes for practically all order types Create automatic entries for qualifying Intra EU inventory movement transactions Edit Intrastat data manually before final declaration printing Print and reprint Intrastat declaration reports Create Intrastat inquiries by order by invoice or by voucher Table 8 1 lists the functions on the Intrastat menu Number Menu Lab
164. aintenance 16 13 1 can be issued to a work order regardless of control program settings AQAD Example If you enter ISS UNP Unplanned Issue the system lets you make an unplanned issue transaction even though inventory has expired This is true only for the item number and lot number identified on this lot master record Use the Expired Inv Trans field in Lot Master Maintenance 1 22 1 to specify this transaction type Managing Component Issues Compliance provides options for restricting component items issued to work orders to those on the bill of material BOM or defined as valid substitutes You can implement a similar control for receipts of co product and by product items Component Issue Control Use the Modify Component Issues field in Compliance Control 1 22 24 to control issues to work orders Set this field to No to require that all items issues are on the work order BOM or are valid substitute items Choose Yes to allow any item to be issued to the work order Valid substitute items are defined in Item Substitution Maintenance 13 19 When Modify Component Issues is No issues are allowed for those items with valid substitutes Co product By product Component Issue Control Use the Modify Co By Product Receipts field in Compliance Control to control receipts for co products and by products e Set this field to No to require all receipts to be valid items or substitute items for a co product or by product in
165. ales amount Note Set up tax rates by tax class or tax usage only for exception conditions Otherwise leave these fields blank so that the system can apply the tax rate to as many transactions as possible Before you set up tax rate records define the following default values in P See Setting Up Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 For more information on t on these fields see the indicated pages l Tax Method page 335 Tax By Line page 335 Accrue Tax at Receipt page 337 Discount Tax at Invoice page 337 Discount Tax at Payment page 337 Update Tax Allowed page 336 You can later override these values for individual tax rates Subsequent changes to the control program do not update existing rates Tax Rate Maintenance To define tax rates use Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 To verify data setup use Tax Rate Browse 2 13 13 2 and Report 2 13 13 3 Note If you change a tax rate once you start using it on transactions a warning displays The system recalculates taxes on open transactions whenever you access the transaction record QAD 334 User Guide Master Data Fig 12 11 Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 FAQAD Tax Type CAN GST Tax Code 10 Item Tax Class Description Tax Usage Tax Rate Effective Date 06 30 2002 Tax By Line 7 Tax Bae P Minimum Taxable Amount 0 Maximum Taxable Amount 999 999 999 999 99 Percent Recoverable 0 00 Expiration Date
166. all tax environments that use tax type Set up tax bases in Tax Base Maintenance 2 13 1 13 shown in Figure 12 10 To verify data setup use Tax Base Browse 2 13 1 14 and Report 2 13 1 15 b See Tax on Tax on page 349 QAD 330 User Guide Master Data Fig 12 10 Tax Base Maintenance 2 13 1 13 FAQAD Tax Base FA Sale Description Fixed Asset Sale Base Percent 20 0095 Base Value Price Price Cost Line Tax Type Description 1 CA SLS California Sales Tax 2 Tax Base Enter an 8 character code that describes an item amount subject to tax This amount can either be a percentage of sales price or the sales price plus other tax amounts For a tax on tax situation set up the tax base for the tax that 1s included in the taxable base for the other tax Once you start processing transactions with GTM a warning message displays if you try to update a tax base that has already been used in other records Description Enter the description of the tax base The description prints on most reports and browses as space permits Base Percent Identify the percentage of the item s price or cost to use in tax calculations for this tax base The default value is 100 Percentages can be either positive or negative Negative percentages indicate tax credits The base percent must be the same for all tax types assigned to the tax base Otherwise you must set up separate tax bases On transactions the system uses
167. alues to further categorize authorities on reports Entering Control Numbers for Customers and Sites Use Controlled Customer Maintenance 1 22 16 4 to associate control numbers with customers and vendors Use Controlled Site Maintenance 1 22 16 7 to associate control numbers with sites These two programs are the same except that you enter an address code in the first and a site code in the second These programs can be used to store many types of codes such as codes associating a DEA number with a customer foreign tax identification numbers or other numbers associated with customers suppliers or sites Fig 5 19 Controlled Controlled Customer Maintenance Customer Country USA Maintenance Authority US COM 1 22 16 4 Address Code Control Number Comments Enter the country code authority and address or leave Country code blank if this record applies to all countries Then specify the control number associated with the address In Figure 5 19 the control number could be the customer s export license number Entering Control Numbers for Items Use Controlled Item Maintenance 1 22 16 10 to associate control numbers with items This programs can be used to store many types of codes such as codes associating DEA registration numbers with items foreign tax identification numbers or other codes associated with items FAQAD 176 User Guide Master Data Fig 5 20 Controlled It MEE Controlled Ite
168. am is used for outbound logistics charges or inbound charges Menu Inbound Number Description Logistics Accounting Fields Outbound 2 3 1 Supplier Maintenance Terms of Trade Logistics Inbound Supplier 2 20 13 Freight Terms Maintenance Logistics Charge Code Outbound 5 34 Blanket Order Maintenance Terms of Trade Logistics Inbound Supplier 5 5 1 13 Scheduled Order Maintenance Terms of Trade Logistics Inbound Supplier 5 7 Purchase Order Maintenance Terms of Trade Logistics Inbound Supplier 5 13 14 PO Shipper Maintenance Carrier Shipment Ref Logistics Inbound Supplier 5 13 16 PO Fiscal Receiving Carrier Shipment Ref Logistics Inbound Supplier 7 1 1 Sales Order Maintenance Logistics Supplier Outbound Table 7 4 Programs with Additional Fields for Logistics Accounting FAQAD 220 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Menu Inbound Number Description Logistics Accounting Fields Outbound 7 9 2 Pre Shipper Shipper Logistics Supplier Outbound Workbench 7 9 8 Sales Order Shipper Logistics Supplier Outbound Maintenance 7 9 15 Sales Order Shipments Logistics Supplier Shipment Outbound ID 7 12 1 Sales Quote Maintenance Logistics Supplier Outbound 7 13 1 Pending Invoice Maintenance Logistics Supplier Shipment Outbound ID 11 7 1 RMA Maintenance Logistics Supplier Shipment Outbound ID 11 7 1 13 RMA Receipts L
169. an require users to enter price and discount tables To calculate the net cost the system does two things From the price table it selects the unit cost for the line item due date or the order entry date depending on what you specified in Purchasing Control If pricing is by item due date the due date defaults from the due date in the order header but you can override it for individual lines from single line entry mode If a discount table is specified the system applies the percentage from the discount table for the line or order due date to calculate the extended net cost for the line item quantity You can override this net cost manually If the price table has a minimum and or maximum cost the system verifies the calculated or user entered net price against it If the net cost is outside the minimum maximum range the system displays a warning message and replaces the line item net cost with either the maximum or minimum price from the price table as appropriate Pricing 97 QAD 98 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Pricing Setup Settings in two control programs affect list discount pricing Purchasing Control 5 24 for purchase orders and RTSs Sales Order Control 7 1 24 for customer scheduled orders Enter appropriate values for the following fields Discount Table Required This field determines how strictly discount tables are used to control order entry f No items can be entered whether or not
170. ance 7 13 1 Distribution Order Processing 12 17 21 or Shipments 12 17 22 RMA Maintenance 11 7 1 1 Shipments 11 7 1 16 or Receipts 11 7 1 13 When Logistics Accounting is active additional frames and fields display The same frames and fields that display in Sales Order Shipments also display in the other programs Sales Order Shipments Order 5010054 Ship Allocated o Sold To 1005000 Effective 07 30 2002 Ship Picked Universal Industries Logistics Accounting Detail Description Log Supplier Name Freight 00100 Swift Transport Log Supplier This field defaults from the logistics supplier specified on the order but you can change it Logistics Accounting 251 Fig 7 24 Sales Order gt Shipments Order SO10054 Ship Allocated O Sold To 1005000 Shipment ID Effective 07 30 2002 Ship Picked Universal Industries Shpmentib 0000 Shipment ID If the NRM sequence code specified in Logistics See Sales Order Accounting Control is an internal sequence leave this field blank to uic ID on have the system assign a number Otherwise enter a sequence page 227 number The system validates it against the Sales Order Shipment Sequence ID specified in Logistics Accounting Control When a pending voucher is created in discrete shipment programs the shipment ID number is used as the internal reference and the bill of lading BOL number is used as the external reference Note If you have se
171. antities received into inventory are assigned an inventory status based on their associated item master data inventory detail or the site or location into which they are received You can use Inventory Detail Maintenance 3 1 1 or Detail Maintenance by Item Lot 3 1 2 to assign a different status to an item s quantity on hand If you are using the Compliance module you can also define inventory attributes including status in Work Order Maintenance These attributes are then used by default during the work order receipt You can modify default inventory attributes including status during most receipt functions if the receipt location does not already include inventory with different attributes Items Sites 41 Overissue Policy Whether or not you allow overissues depends on your own policies and procedures Some organizations determine that to maintain accurate inventory balances negative balances cannot be permitted In an online interactive system inventory records are updated when inventory transactions are processed Information is sometimes entered in batch when people are not able to enter transactions in real time Without controls inventory balances may temporarily be driven negative However after all the transactions are entered inventory balances should not be less than zero If all of the following are in place and executed inventory balances should be accurate Procedures for recording inventory movement
172. archy and are then transmitted up or down to the next level Two fields in Site Maintenance are directly related to EMT Use the Default Supplier field to associate a default supplier with each ordering site If you are using direct allocations set External Supplier to Yes Sites and Multiple Databases Setting up sites for a single company is a very straightforward process P See User Guide The site entity defaults to the system entity and the database reference is id 2 beni for left blank However when the system is used to support multiple information on company operations several important questions must be resolved DRP How many databases will be used Will consolidated order processing be used Will distribution requirements planning be used The answers to these questions are interrelated and require familiarity with a number of other issues Before answering these questions be sure to review the rest of this chapter For multiple connected databases such as those used for consolidated Tip order processing or DRP all the site codes in the system must be set up in Database i connections are set each database When you set up the site code you assign each site to a up using programs specific database When the system looks for information about this site on the Multiple Database menu it looks only in the assigned database 36 6 If there are multiple databases that are functionally independent from each oth
173. arget Price List Enter a code identifying the price list to which the information is copied The target and source price list can be the same In this case an ending effective date is added to the source list and a starting effective date to the target list If the target list is not the same as the source and does not exist it can be created If it does exist it can be either cleared or added to FAQAD 76 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Target Currency Enter the currency for the system to use on the target prices The source and target currency can be the same leave blank for the system to default to the source currency If you are copying from one currency to another the system calculates and displays a default Cur Conv Factor using the exchange rates effective on the price list start date The system adjusts prices on the target list using the conversion factor you specify UM Either an item unit of measure to which price list applies or blank if the price list applies for all units of measure default is blank Cust Supplier Cat Either the customer code or the customer analysis code for which price list applies or blank if price list applies to all customers default is blank Item Cat Either the item code or the item analysis code for which price list applies or blank if price list applies for all items default is blank To Either the last value within a range or blank if range is not specified default is blank
174. ase Days to the calculated due date Note There is no connection between Base Date and Base Days nor between Base Days and Due Days In the latter case Due Days specifies a time period that increments the Due Date From Base Days specifies an interval that increments the calculated due date On sales and purchasing transactions the credit terms interest percentage defaults from the transaction header credit terms code for the customer or supplier You can change it if necessary If you do the system does not automatically update the credit terms interest percentage A warning displays if the percentage in the header does not match the percentage for the credit terms code On sales transactions a pop up in the line item frame displays the credit terms interest percentage from the header which you can override for the line item if necessary When you press Go the system increments and displays the item s price based on the interest percentage The line item discount if any is applied to calculate the item s net price FAQAD Addresses 205 On purchasing transactions GL entries are created at PO receipt 5 13 1 Credit terms interest applied is debited and accrued interest is credited These accounts are specified in Purchasing Control 5 24 On sales transactions GL entries are created at invoice post 7 13 4 Credit terms interest applied is credited and accrued interest is debited These accounts are specified in Sales O
175. ate into the item master records PCO Release and Distribution After a PCO is approved it is ready to be released and distributed Releasing a PCO typically means transferring ownership of it from a design organization to a manufacturing or production organization Distributing means notifying members of a distribution group of a PCO s release This can be done with hard copy reports or e mail depending on how the routing slip is set up Use Release and Distribution 1 9 7 1 to release and distribute PCOs Release and distribution are initiated at the same time but are recorded as separate points in the PCO life cycle When a released PCO is distributed through a standard batch processing queue significant time may elapse between release and actual distribution Once a PCO is distributed its release is final Release and Distribution 1 9 7 1 lists PCOs by criteria entered at the top of the screen Enter a PCO number to list PCOs beginning with that number Number ID Database Name Type Created By Unreleased Only Number Database Title Sub Date Batch ID PCOD00008 Redesign Cooler Engine 07 22 2002 Database Title Rels Cmt Batch ID ED LE Redesign Cooler Engine Za O Q Unreleased Only Enter Yes to view only unreleased PCOs Enter No to view both released and unreleased PCOs or to revoke a previously released but not yet distributed PCO Tip Since PCRs cannot be released to production the
176. ating that the group must review the document again To enter explanations for the reroute set Comment to Yes When a document requires approval as a result of this process the ByReRt field in PCR PCO Approval is set to Yes Detail Approval Maintenance To change or override the standard approval process use Detail Approval Maintenance 1 9 6 13 Typically this program is controlled with menu security since it provides an administrative override to the standard approval function While it lets you override the normal approval process it does not exactly duplicate it For example disapproved documents are not rerouted To reroute use PCR PCO Approval Incorporating PCOs into Production Once a PCO is approved use the PCO Implementation menu 1 9 7 to update production data as follows 1 Use Release and Distribution 1 9 7 1 to release the PCO and notify members of the distribution group 2 Use Incorporation Planning Report 1 9 7 3 to analyze the impact of the PCO on current inventory and help determine the best effective date for incorporation 3 Use Incorporation Selection 1 9 7 4 to specify an effective date Product Change Control 135 4 Run Incorporation 1 9 7 5 on a daily basis to incorporate PCO changes into production records Changes become effective on the date specified in step 3 5 Run Implementation 1 9 7 13 on a daily basis to copy changes to item data records from PCOs effective on the current d
177. batch updates based on changes in price lists Class Enter classes to indicate customer priority When you cannot fill all orders items can be allocated by customer class SIC Enter the standard industrial classification SIC code associated with this customer These codes are widely accepted classifications for categorizing companies into industry groupings This reference only field may display on selected reports and inquiries Addresses 189 Invoice by Authorization Indicate how invoice totals should be calculated and displayed for this customer No Invoice totals are calculated by line This is the typical method for calculating totals unless the customer is using AR Self Billing Yes Invoice totals are calculated by authorization number The printed invoice includes the price and amount for each authorization line as well as the total for all authorization lines The extended price for each invoice line item is not displayed Customer Credit Data Set up credit information for each customer The system uses this information during order entry Fig 6 6 Customer Credit Data Customer Credit Credit Limit 37 500 Disc 0 00 Bill To 100 p Data Frame Terms 30 P Finance Chg Last Credit Review B Credit Hold Statement wf Last Credit Update 08 25 2000 Credit Rating j3 Stmt Cydeli High Credit 2 734 DB Number Dun Letter 7 High Date 06 12 1992 PO Required Last Payment Last Sale 06 12 1
178. be modified in PCC without affecting the rest of the system Use PCC to define approval cycles for product changes before the changes are incorporated into production records Compliance Compliance lets companies manage compliance with government regulations such as the FDA Current Good Manufacturing Practices and with international agreements such as NAFTA and GATT Addresses Programs in the Addresses module define customers suppliers salespersons employees carriers banks and company addresses Also use Addresses to define country codes freight charges credit terms and trailer codes Shipping groups and documents are also defined in the Addresses Taxes module These records are used exclusively with shipping functions Logistics Accounting Logistics Accounting lets companies define and track the individual costs associated with the transportation of goods in and out of company locations Separate sets of accounts are defined to track the transportation costs related to goods purchased from an external supplier and goods shipped from a company location to a customer or to another company location b See Chapter 4 Product Change Control for details b See Chapter 5 Compliance for details b See Chapter 6 Addresses for details b See User Guide Distribution A gt See Chapter 7 Logistics Accounting for details FAQAD 8 User Guide Master Data b See Chapter 8 Intras
179. bility credited whenever your company pays tax instead of charging it to the customer If the tax rate is for an absorbed tax set to Yes Account sub account and cost center default from Domain Account Control 36 1 but you can override them Implementing GTM 337 AP Tax Account Identify the asset debited for recoverable purchase and accounts payable taxes or liability when treated as a contra account to sales tax payable Account sub account and cost center default from Domain Account Control 36 1 but you can override them AP Tax Retained Identify the liability account credited whenever your company remits tax amounts directly to the government instead of to the supplier If the tax rate is for a retained tax set this option to Yes Account sub account and cost center default from Domain Account Control 36 1 but you can override them Expiration Date Use this field to phase in expiration dates for obsolete tax rates This date is the last day when the tax rate can be used on transactions Accrue Tax at Receipt This setting determines whether the system creates GL entries for purchase tax amounts upon receipt of goods or receipt of the supplier invoice By default the tax point is goods receipt However for recoverable tax rates set Accrue Tax at Receipt to No because you cannot deduct the recoverable portion of tax paid on purchases against tax collected on sales until you confirm the voucher for the supplier invoi
180. ble quantity on hand Non nettable quantity Quantity required Quantity allocated Quantity on order The detail report adds detailed information by location within the site Quantity on hand Quantity allocated Item characteristics such as expire date grade assay and inventory status Inventory Detail by Location Use Inventory Detail by Location 3 6 6 to see item inventory information by location Quantity on hand tem characteristics such as expire date grade assay and inventory status Current Surplus Inventory Report Use Current Surplus Inventory Report 3 6 8 to review current surplus quantities and GL value by product line within a site The system determines surplus by the absence of issue activity based on a user specified issue date FAQAD 300 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Reports can be generated in detail or summary format The summary report shows information for product lines within a site The detail report shows item information for each product line in the site In both reports totals are shown for expired value and value on hand by site and for the report Projected Surplus Inventory Use Projected Surplus Inventory 3 6 9 to review projected surplus inventory for a future effective date based either on MRP requirements or average use Choose either current cost or GL cost for surplus cost computations For these calculations the expiration date for items is the syst
181. bstances Work Flow P See Setting Up Country Codes on page 194 Fig 5 18 Controlled Authority Maintenance 1 22 16 1 FAQAD Enter country codes j Enter individual license information and apply it to selected items Enter names of authorities Associate sites with control numbers Enter control numbers and associate them with customers and vendors Associate items with control numbers Enter general license information and apply it to selected countries Entering Country Codes Use Country Code Maintenance 2 14 1 to define country codes including information about a country s membership in international organizations and their DEA status You can also categorize countries by assigning each one to a country group using a coding system such as the US Export Administration codes Entering Authority Codes Enter authorities in Controlled Authority Maintenance 1 22 16 1 These authorities are assigned along with country codes to customers sites and items Controlled Authority Maintenance Authority LIS COM Type Export Sew Comments O Authority Enter a descriptive acronym or short name up to eight characters long For example enter DEA for Drug Enforcement Administration or WHO for World Health Organization Compliance 175 Name Enter the full name for the authority Type Group Enter v
182. cally created for that logistics charge The logistics charge accrual value is calculated as follows Accrual Value PO line receipt quantity logistics charge cost element value Note Only one pending voucher is created for each logistics charge associated with a purchase receipt When the same logistics charge is linked to another line item cost element a detail line is added to the pending voucher for that logistics charge and the accrual value is updated For example if a shipper contains 5 POs and each PO contains 10 line items that are each subject to freight and duty charges PO Shipper Receipt creates two pending vouchers one for freight and one for duty Each pending voucher will contain 50 detail lines QAD 244 User Guide Master Data FAQAD GL Effects In addition to the GL transactions created during PO receipt for item material cost the following GL transactions are created for each PO line received with an associated logistics charge Debit Inventory for the PO line logistics charge accrual value Credit the inbound Accrual account for the logistics charge product line site and supplier type for the same amount For example a PO line item with a freight cost of 1 per item is received in a quantity of 50 Inventory is debited 50 and the inbound accrual account associated with the freight logistics charge is credited 50 Note The system always uses the base currency as the accrual currency for inbo
183. ce If you are using Logistics Accounting this field determines when GL entries for taxes on both inbound and outbound logistics charges are created The tax point does not affect tax calculations on transactions The tax amounts display regardless of when the GL entries are created Accrue Tax at Usage This field only applies if you have activated the optional Supplier Consignment Inventory module in Consignment Control Discount Tax at Invoice This setting determines whether the tax rate calculates taxes based on the sales amount minus credit terms discounts but displays an order net total of full sales amount plus discounted tax amount If tax is based on the full sales amount set this to No Discount Tax at Payment This setting is similar to Discount Tax at Invoice except that the net order total is the discounted sales amount plus the discounted tax amount gt See Retained Taxes on page 350 gt See General Ledger Effects on page 362 b See Calculating Taxes for Logistics Charges on page 233 b See User Guide Distribution B b See Discounted Taxes on page 349 FAQAD 338 User Guide Master Data Comments Set to Yes to record transaction comments for the tax rate This is useful for recording government regulations and other legally required text for tax reports Tax Rate Copy Update To streamline the task of entering tax rates group the required rates for a tax type
184. ce Inquiry iride IE S1 PON IID se press Enter to see related Sales Order 010040 001 PEI Computers Ltd pricing information List Qty Break Cat Amount Type Source lnemo 0 0 List Price Maximum Pri lmemo 0 0 List Price Price List lmemo 0 0 List Price Price List lmemo 0 0 List Price Price List Sales Order Enter a sales order number then scroll through the inquiry to display lines on the order Press Enter on a selected line to see pricing details Repricing Orders in Sales Order Repricing Use Sales Order Repricing 7 1 11 to update the list and net price of selected orders to the latest corresponding price list price You can reprice sales orders so that ordered quantities are added together across orders to calculate quantity breaks Sales Order Repricing combines orders by matching price lists and any combination of Sold to customer numbers Bill to customer numbers Pricing Ship to customer numbers Purchase order numbers Any combination of these four factors Customers that do not have centralized purchasing can still receive quantity and volume discounts based upon purchases made from other intracompany purchasing departments Line items on combined orders are repriced as if they are on the same order which means that line items with the same break category or the same item number have their order quantities accumulated If you want an open sales order to be repriced in Sales Order Repric
185. cost elements for logistics charges Update item costs with ve Create purchase orders logistics charges Define terms of trade Receive PO line items Creating Logistics Cost Elements Use Cost Element Maintenance 30 17 1 to set up separate cost elements for logistics charges in the GL cost sets assigned to sites that receive purchased items The cost elements must be in the Material or Overhead cost category Create a cost element for each logistics charge you want to accrue For example you could create separate cost elements for domestic freight and overseas freight or create only one cost element for freight Associate logistics cost elements with individual logistics charge codes in Logistics Charge Code Maintenance 2 15 1 In the corresponding current cost sets add the same logistics cost elements in the same cost category only when Costing Method is set to Last in Cost Set Maintenance 30 1 When the last cost method is used the system can update current logistics costs when pending vouchers are closed in Voucher Maintenance 28 1 When the costing method is Average or None logistics costs are not updated in the current cost set Note Whether vouchering updates costs depends on the setting of Current Cost from AP in Inventory Control 3 24 When this is Yes Voucher Maintenance updates the logistics charge cost element in the current cost set associated with PO line items Otherwise the co
186. coverable and nonrecoverable tax amounts For sales transactions any tax your company absorbs rather than passes on to the customer For purchase transactions any tax your company retains for direct payment to the government To calculate tax amounts GTM can use one of several standard calculation programs Alternately to resolve a localization issue write a custom program Specify a default program and override it as necessary for individual tax rates Table 12 7 summarizes the differences among the tax calculation methods supplied with the system FAQAD 346 User Guide Master Data Table 12 7 Standard GTM Tax Methods FAQAD Method Program Explanation 01 txmethO01 p This generic method supports most taxes Tax Amount Tax Rate Item Amount Note For reverse calculated taxes Tax Amount Tax Rate Item Amount 12 Tax Rate Taxable Base Item Amount Tax Base Percent If Taxable Base Min Taxable Tax Amount Min Taxable If Taxable Base gt Max Taxable Tax Amount Max Taxable Recoverable Amount Tax Amount Recoverable Percent 02 txmeth02 p Same as method 01 except that it supports luxury taxes and capped taxes that are assessed only on specific taxable base amounts If Taxable Base lt Min Taxable Tax Amount 0 If Taxable Base gt Max Taxable Tax Amount 0 03 txmeth03 p Indicates you are importing tax amounts from an external system and do not want to recalculate them 11
187. cription of the tax zone You are not prevented from entering the same description for multiple tax zones The description prints on most reports and browses as space permits Country Code This code identifies the country that assesses tax For new tax zones the value defaults from Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 FAQAD 320 User Guide Master Data P See Setting Up GTM Control on page 339 Tip Preface the type with the country code or state province FAQAD State Enter the code for the state or province included in the tax zone County Enter the code for the county included in the tax zone City Enter the name of the city included in the tax zone Post If necessary enter the postal code included in the tax zone If taxes never vary by postal code do not set up tax zones by postal code Subtotal This Level Enter Yes or No to determine whether custom tax reports can show subtotals for this tax zone No standard reports show tax amounts by tax zone Reporting Zone Enter Yes or No to identify whether the tax zone directly assesses tax Sums Into Tax Zone Enter a code identifying the parent tax zone that actually assesses tax for the geographic region defined above The description country code state county city and postal code display In addition to the geographic tax zone codes set up an error code and specify it in Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 When you enter or update an
188. crues logistics charges and calculates taxes 5 13 7 Purchase Order Returns Updates GL logistics charge accounts 5 13 13 PO Container Maintenance Verifies all referenced PO lines have the same terms of trade as the first PO line added 5 13 20 PO Shipper Receipt Creates pending vouchers accrues logistics charges and calculates taxes 5 19 Purchase Order Cost Update Recalculates costs after terms of trade codes are changed 7 1 4 Sales Order Maintenance for Generates EMT POs with logistics data EMT purchase orders copies terms of trade from the PO supplier and copies logistics supplier from Logistics Charge Code Maintenance calculates tax on logistics charges 7 1 1 Container Workbench Verifies all referenced sales order lines 175 SO Container Maintenance have the same freight terms as first SO line added 7 9 5 Pre Shipper Shipper Confirm Creates pending vouchers accrues logistics charges and calculates tax 7 9 7 Pre Shipper Shipper Auto Creates pending vouchers accrues Confirm logistics charges and calculates tax 7 9 15 Sales Order Shipments Creates pending vouchers accrues logistics charges and calculates tax 7 9 21 Shipper Unconfirm Reverses GL transactions created during confirmation 7 12 5 Sales Quote Copy from Order Copies logistics data from the source 7 12 6 Sales Quote Copy from Quote document to the target document 7 12 10 Sales Quote Release to Order Table 7 5 Programs with Additional Processin
189. cs charge is taxable and assign default tax parameters To accrue inbound logistics charges and include them in the cost of purchased items you must associate a separate cost element with each logistics charge code used for inbound purposes You cannot assign the same cost element to more than one logistics charge For example you create a cost element named Freight and assign it to the Freight logistics charge code You cannot assign the Freight cost element to any other logistics charge code If you want to track different types of freight such as domestic and overseas you must create a cost element for each logistics charge code Outbound Logistics Charges Outbound logistics charges include the cost of freight only These are charges paid to third party carriers when items are shipped to a customer or another company location You do not need to define tax parameters since outbound freight charges use the tax parameters from the trailer code associated with the freight charge on the order or shipment You can track outbound charges for sales orders and distribution orders using separate sets of accounts Logistics Charge Code Maint Taxable Tax class 1P Close Accruals on First Voucher Logistics Supplier Apportion Method Logistics Charge Code Enter an 8 character code identifying a logistics charge This code can be used for both inbound and outbound logistics charges Logistics Accounting 229 Description Ent
190. d AP rate variance Purchase Price Variance Purchase price variance occurs when an inventory item s PO cost does not match its GL cost This variance does not occur for memo items which have no standard cost Figure 13 7 shows the GL entries for purchase price variance The tax point determines whether the update to AP Tax Recoverable occurs at goods receipt or invoice receipt GL Entries for Purchase Price Variance Standard Cost Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Entries created for received item cost 1 variance 2 and tax on item cost variance 3 Voucher Confirmation Entries created for item cost 4 variance 5 and tax 6 Inventory Purchase Order Receipts 100 00 8 Purchase AP Tax 100 00 25 00 12 50 Price Variance Recoverable 2S 12 50 3 Purchase Accounts Order Receipts Payable 100 00 2 4 100 00 25 00 6 5 25 00 12 50 6 6 12 50 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Purchase Goods Receipt Entries created for received item cost 1 and variance 2 but not for tax Voucher Confirmation Entries created for item cost 3 variance 4 and tax on item cost variance S AP Rate and Usage Variance AP rate variance occurs when an item s invoice cost does not match its PO cost AP usage variance occurs when an item s invoice quantity does not match its PO Inventory Order Recei
191. d Master Comments 0 000 cee eee eee eens 17 Inventory Data eese ete eek mi Gee es whe een 18 Shipping Data 5 ecekelreceeeix c eaceba e acia os cR eg vals 20 Planning Data o o 2 cessere eR EE ee 20 Cost Data ero oen ee e DR a CR e HR Ron RR od 22 Customer and Supplier Items 0 0 eee eee eee eee 23 Product Lines id seduta ote s mtt bees d pe mme a teeth ada 24 Product Line Maintenance llslseeeleeeeee eee 25 Product Line Accounts lelleeeeeeeeee ees 25 Alternate Product Line Accounts 0 0 0c cece eee eee 27 gu oid debi UITT 28 TaX68 lieet ERR eed ee a SE SU Eur eed 28 Sites and Enterprise Material Transfer EMT 29 Sites and Multiple Databases 0 0 2c eee eee eee 29 Site S Curily ines nevus perde cide de qa dose qoe oce oodd d 30 Creating Sites i comete coe ex nue ere ht eene 30 Associating Domains with Sites 0 eee eee eee 32 Site Connection Records 0 0 0 32 Deleting Sites set a shades shad tea adate tes lace rubea co et 33 LOCauiONS 2 2232 254 gaa che ees 9 E SESE OO ewe dod quce idu ede das 34 Permanent Temporary Locations 0 0 0 cece eee ee eee 35 Automatic Locations 0 cee ees 36 Location Lypes uoo cete e tutte buon ee eub e we le e 36 Single Item Locations seeeeeeee eee 36 Reserved Locations 00 cece teen eens 37 Inventory Status Codes 0 0
192. d and applied amounts You can update the applied amounts for individual order lines Close Line Indicate whether vouchering is complete for this logistics charge This field defaults from Close Accruals on First Voucher in Logistics Charge Code Maintenance for this logistics charge but you can change it Note If you need to reopen a closed pending voucher you can change Close Line to No Any variance previously recorded is reversed You cannot open a closed pending voucher that has been paid Fig 7 31 Voucher Voucher Maintenance Maintenance Voucher 10017 USD Control 40 00 Total 40 00 Details Logistics Charge Matching Detail Accrued Amount Vouchered Amount Applied Amount 37 50 0 00 2 50 0 00 Item 22 100 Ship From 002 Quality Products Inc Desc CORD POWER UK Ship To 10000 Applied Amount This field lets you change the amount applied from the total invoice amount to individual order lines The sum of the applied amounts for each order line must equal the invoice amount The amounts for each line are calculated based on the apportion bSee method defined for the charge in Logistics Charge Code boo Maintenance Charges on page 215 GL Effects When you indicate that vouchering is complete against a logistics charge by setting Close Line to Yes the system calculates the variance if any as the difference between the invoice amount and the accrued amount less FAQAD 260 User Guide Master Data b See Use
193. d other information associated with your item number Both item numbers appear on all sales and shipping paperwork In scheduled orders you can specify a customer item number in the P See User Guide Customer Ref field as part of the set of values that identifies a scheduled Release Management order line This lets you set up multiple lines for the same internal item number ship from site ship to address and PO number To require valid customer items in the Customer Ref field set Customer Ref is Customer Item to Yes in Customer Schedules Control 7 3 24 or Container Shipper Control 7 9 24 Customer item numbers appear in reports inquiries and browses and under a Customer Ref heading in programs that manage scheduled orders and shipper data You can also use Customer Item Maintenance to set up a cross reference between internal numbering systems For example your sales department may have catalog numbers that differ from the item numbers used by manufacturing To set up an internal cross reference leave the Customer Ship to field blank The same need to cross reference numbers may exist for your suppliers Use Supplier Item Maintenance to create a cross reference between your suppliers numbers and your item numbers as well as track the quoted price and lead time Specify supplier item numbers in Blanket Order Maintenance Purchase Order Maintenance and Scheduled Order Maintenance Both your number and the supplier number d
194. de Maintenance you may want to define logistics accounts at a more detailed level You can separately track logistics charges by product line at multiple sites within the same entity For example you may want to track logistics charges for different product lines at different sites using separate accounts Use the following programs to specify GL accrual expense and variance accounts used for inbound and outbound logistics charges by product line site and supplier or customer type Inbound Account Maintenance 2 15 13 Logistics Accounting 231 Outbound Accrual Account Maint 2 15 16 Outbound Expense Account Maint 2 15 19 All accounts default from the specified logistics charge code but you can change them For convenience the same programs are located on the Logistics Charge Account Menu 1 2 21 Fig 7 9 Inbound Account Maintenance PA rct Account aintenance Logistics Charge Code Freight 2 15 13 Product Line 2000 ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS Site 12000 Electronics Division Supplier Type Accrual Accounti2310 P Expense Account 5610 P Variance Account 5710 P Logistics Charge Code Enter a logistics charge code previously defined in Logistics Charge Code Maint Product Line Enter the product line to associate with these accounts Site Optionally enter the site to associate with these accounts Site P See User Guide security is enforced When blank the user must have access to all pote id ds sites i
195. ded 06 14 1987 Bank Accounts Bank Account Bank Enter a code identifying the payment bank Account Type Enter a type code to distinguish multiple bank accounts for the same bank You can define up to 10 account types The following three types already exist in the system 1 ALL The default Indicates that the supplier bank account accepts both wire transfers and printed checks 2 PRT Indicates an account that accepts only printed checks Type 2 accounts are not used for electronic funds transfers EFTs Record these accounts for reference only 3 EDD Indicates an electronic data interchange account EDI Optional EDI number not currently used by the system Available for reference Fig 6 15 Bank Accounts Frame in Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 Tip Designate at least one bank account as type 1 ALL so that the AP check selection and printing programs can always find a bank account for payments FAQAD 200 User Guide Master Data Branch Optional and not currently used by the system Available for reference Bank Account The bank account code can have up to 23 characters Set Domain Account Control 36 1 to validate 11 and 12 digit customer and supplier bank account codes Begin End Dates Enter the time period in which this bank is valid for supplier payments When you run Payment Automatic Checks 28 9 9 the system selects this bank as the supplier s destination bank for
196. destination You can associate a carrier or series of carriers for kind of inventory movement in a shipping group A carrier cannot be deleted if it is currently in use by any shipment shipping group or tax history record Fig 6 13 Carrier Maintenance Carrier Maintenance Carrier E 2 17 1 Name Address Address Address City State Post Format Country County Attention Telephone Fax Telex Sort Name Tax ID FAQAD 198 User Guide Master Data Fig 6 14 Customer Supplier Bank Maintenance 2 21 1 Tip You can also set up customer banks although these are not used by Accounts Receivable FAQAD Setting Up Customer and Supplier Bank Addresses Customer banks are banks your customers use to pay your company Supplier banks are banks your suppliers use to receive payments from your company Use Customer Supplier Bank Maintenance 2 21 1 to set up customer supplier and company bank addresses specifying any number of accounts for each bank Specify bank branch codes and begin end dates for using the accounts on payments If you transfer funds electronically record each bank s mailing address tax IDs and EDI IDs Customer Supplier Bank Maint Bank Address Bank Wells Name Wells Fargo Address 222 State Street Address Austin Financial Building Address City Dallas State TX Post Format 0 Country United States of America USA County Attention George Smith Telephone j
197. detail records to support exception conditions when a trailer charge has a different taxable status and or tax rate for some tax types and customer tax classes Example If service charges are normally exempt from California sales tax but professional services are taxable at 5 you can set this up in at least two ways If you defined tax types for tax exemptions define a taxable trailer code Set up a taxable trailer tax detail for the tax type tax class combination Finally set up a 0 tax rate for exempt trailer charges and a 5 rate for the professional services class If you plan to report all exempt amounts under tax type NON TAX define a non taxable trailer code Set up a taxable trailer tax detail for the tax type tax class combination Finally set up a 5 tax rate for the professional services class You do not need a 0 tax rate because this is supplied by default If you have not already implemented trailer code records do so in Trailer Code Maintenance 2 19 13 Then identify the exception conditions and set up the corresponding records in Trailer Tax Detail Maintenance 2 13 1 21 To verify data setup use Trailer Code Browse 2 19 14 for trailer codes and the Trailer Tax Detail Browse 2 13 1 22 and Report 2 13 1 23 for trailer tax details Trailer Code 10 Service Tax Type CAN ALB PST PST Alberta Canada Taxable w Tax Class 005 P Implementing GTM 329 Trailer Code Enter a trailer code previously set
198. directly to the freight carrier when the shipment is delivered Include Freight is calculated accrued and added to the item s unit price after you exit the order line item screen Prepaid Freight is calculated and tracked through the Sales Freight Accrued and Sales Freight Applied accounts but not included on the order or customer invoice because it has been prepaid or is already a part of the normal selling price Will Call Freight is not calculated or accrued the customer is responsible for the shipping arrangements By defining freight terms you can assign your own codes and descriptions to these six types Changing or Merging Address Codes To change or merge address codes use Address Code Change 2 11 Use Address Code Change 2 11 for two purposes To change an address code if a company changes its name or if your business changes its coding scheme To merge an address with another existing business entity as required when one business acquires another Merging is allowed only under the following conditions Both the old and new address codes must have a single address list type that is the same for both Customer and end user list types are considered the same when merging For example an address code for a customer cannot be merged with an address code for a supplier or an address code that is used for both a customer and supplier cannot be merged with another address code used for a customer and sup
199. duce quantities on hand at the issuing location Inventory Control 291 Use Issues Unplanned 3 7 to record miscellaneous inventory issues such as floor stock items sent to production or materials sent to engineers for testing You can also issue items to a manufacturing order that closed from an accounting standpoint Use Issues Return to Supplier 3 8 to tag an issue as a return This is not a complete return since it does not update purchasing or receiving history or current cost To process a complete return use functions in the Purchasing module Shipping Documents Many countries require that formal shipping documents accompany any See the Shipping movement of goods even when goods are merely transferred not sold If Ford B you are using shipping groups you can record shipping information and Distribution A for generate shipping documents from all the inventory transfer programs details Creating Inventory Transaction History Every inventory transaction creates a record in the inventory transaction history table Each record has a unique sequential transaction number a transaction type and includes the following information Transaction data nventory data Cost data GL transaction data User ID of the person entering the transaction Transaction Types The transaction type code identifies the function used to initiate the inventory change Table 9 2 lists the transaction type codes included
200. e Description prints on most reports and browses as space permits Implementing GTM 335 Tax Rate Specify the percentage used to calculate tax amounts for this tax rate How the rate is used in the calculation depends on the tax method specified To use tax types to report tax exemptions also set up zero percent tax rates Tax By Line Specify whether taxes on line item amounts are calculated individually or by order total On sales transactions taxes on trailer charges are always totaled for the order regardless of the Tax By Line setting Debit credit memos also always calculate tax by total To calculate taxes by total on purchase receipt and AP transactions you must set the following appropriately Allow Tax Included Accrue Tax at Receipt and Recoverable Percent Tax Base If necessary enter the code that identifies the portion of the item amount subject to taxation Leave this blank if the taxable base for this tax rate is always 100 of the item price Min Taxable If necessary enter the minimum transaction taxable base amount to which this tax rate should be applied How this field is used in tax calculations depends on the tax method specified Leave blank if the tax rate applies equally to all item amounts Max Taxable If necessary enter the maximum transaction taxable base amount to which this tax rate should be applied How this field is used in tax calculations depends on the tax method specified Leave blank if
201. e The rules for combining price lists are based on the Comb Type field in Price List Maintenance Table 3 3 lists how the system uses price lists Pricing 65 Fig 3 14 How Best Pricing Works FAQAD 66 User Guide Master Data Table 3 3 How Price Lists Are Used Tip A discount is combinable when more than one price list is used to determine net price FAQAD System Function What happens Building the Best List The system evaluates each applicable List Price price list If Price more than one is found the lowest price is used If no List Price list is found the Price field from the Item Master Maintenance is used The price is stored in the List Price field of the sales order or quote Building the Best Net The system accesses each applicable Discount Discount Price Amt Markup and Net Price price list It then determines what combination yields the lowest price The rules for combining price lists are based on the Com Type field in Price List Maintenance The Discount and Net Price fields are then updated on the sales order or quote Modifying Price for If the calculated Net Price on a sales order is above the Minimum or Maximum maximum or below the minimum price set on List Price price lists in Price List Maintenance the Net Price on the sales order or quote is adjusted Manually Overriding The calculated List Price Discount and Net Price can be Calculated Prices manually changed on a sales order
202. e and displays a default conversion factor using the exchange rate in Maintenance effect on the price list start date If effective exchange rates are not 26 4 found Curr Conv Factor defaults to 1 You can modify the conversion factor if needed However the value cannot be 0 Clear Target List Enter Yes to delete all other target price lists having same name and attributes or No to not delete other target price lists default is No Create Target List Enter Yes the default to create a new list if one does not exist When No a list is not created If Create Target List is Yes and the list exists the value of Clear Target List determines if the list is cleared before the copy or if an end effective date is added to the old prices Update Enter No the default and set Print Audit Trail to Yes to print a report of potential changes before they are made Specify Yes to update price lists based on the parameters specified Print Audit Trail Enter Yes the default to print an audit report showing the effect of applying the copy parameters to the target price list If No a report does not print Output Enter an output destination for the audit report Baich ID Assign a Batch ID to process the transaction off line Generating Pricing Reports Three pricing reports display information about how the system calculates prices for order lines Pricing What If Inquiry 1 10 1 13 displays prices based on user specified inpu
203. e here This field is validated against codes defined in Generalized Codes Maintenance 36 2 13 for field lc apportion method b See Close Line on page 259 gt See Apportioning Logistics Charges on page 215 QAD 230 User Guide Master Data Fig 7 8 Logistics Charge Code Maint Inbound Frame See Creating Logistics Cost Elements on page 236 for details FAQAD Logistics Charge Code Maint Logistics Charge Code Freight Description Freight Inbound Cost Elernent Accrual Account Expense Account Variance Account Outbound Sales Order Accrual Account 2320 Sales Order Expense Account 5620 Sales Order Variance Account 6560 Distribution Order Accrual Account 2321 Distribution Order Expense Account 5621 Distribution Order Variance Account 6561 Cost Element Optionally enter a cost element to associate with this logistics charge The system uses the values in this cost element when accruing inbound logistics charges for individual items Define accrual expense and variance accounts for this logistics charge code These accounts are used as the defaults when you define detailed accounts in Inbound Account Maintenance 2 15 13 Outbound Accrual Account Maintenance 2 15 16 and Outbound Expense Account Maintenance 2 15 19 Defining Detailed Logistics Accounts Although inbound and outbound logistics accounts are defined for each logistics charge in Logistics Charge Co
204. e locations contains inventory with the same lot or reference number as the items being received If Item A s Active field were No it could be received into Locations L M or N In this case Item A s status would change to the default status for the location 2 for Location L 3 for Location M 4 for Location N FAQAD Location Location Location L M N Status 2 Status 3 Status 4 Active Yes Using Work Order Batch Control Batch numbers group and categorize work orders Use batch control to assign batch numbers to work orders for compliance reporting and traceability You can assign the same batch number to a group of work orders run through a single manufacturing process You can assign one batch number per work order receipt session Batch traceability is a single level function It identifies work orders associated with a batch number Lot and serial numbers are used to identify report on and trace inventory transactions A lot number is unique to a given finished product or collection of components that make up a finished product Use lot traceability to identify work order components A batch number cannot be used for scheduling planning or shop floor reporting Example A pharmaceutical manufacturer makes acetaminophen powder in large quantities Each run results in a batch of acetaminophen powder ready for processing into tablets a batch with an assigned number that uniquely identifies its origin This ba
205. e Control 28 24 allows variances to update Receipts instead of the variance accounts GL Entries for AP Usage Variance Average Cost Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Expensed Item Fig 13 17 GL Entries for AP Usage Variance Average Cost Recoverable Tax Goods Receipt Purchase AP Tax Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts Recoverable item cost 1 and tax 2 100 00 2t 10 0 a Purchase Accounts Voucher Confirmation Order Receipts Payable Entries created for item 100 001 100 00 cost 3 variance 4 tax 10 00 40 00 on item cost 5 and tax on 5 10 00 variance 6 4 00 AP Usage AP Tax Variance Recoverable 40 00 4 4 00 6 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt qx Purchase Goods Recelpt z Inventory Order Receipts Entries created for received 400 00 100 00 item cost 1 but not tax Voucher Confirmation Purchase Accounts Order Receipts Payable Entries created for item 100 00 100 00 cost 2 variance 3 tax i 40 00 on item cost 4 and tax on 10 00 variance 5 4 00 AP Usage AP Tax Variance Recoverable 40 00 10 00 2 4 00 5 QAD 378 User Guide Master Data Fig 13 18 GL Entries for AP Rate Variance Average Cost Recoverable Tax FAQAD GL Entries for AP Rate Variance Average Cost Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Goods R
206. e Database Update Caecum 12345678 Domain for Header Display Ct QADDB Bu MOI afp afp domain QADDB ahh i Abbas s Domain 1 QADDB ani Anitha QADDB demo2 European Operations Demo2 QADDB B domi domaint for site 1 QADDB o dom2 domainz QADDB dsk dorn DSK Domain QADDB epmdomi epm domain 1 QADDB Li eyk Elma s domain QADDB Li O amp Note Ina multi database environment all databases must be connected or you cannot create a new primary site record This is to ensure that the site does not already exist as a primary site in a domain in another database This is also true when you delete a primary site although in this case additional restrictions may prevent you from deleting the site Connection Site Defaults The data associated with the site connection record defaults from the primary site record but is validated in the target domain The entity associated with the site must exist in the connection domain or an error is generated The connection record is created with the primary site s default inventory status if the inventory status is valid in the connection domain Otherwise the first inventory status in that domain is used The site connection record is created with the same Transfer Clearing account sub account and cost center as the primary site if this combination is valid in the target domain Otherwise the value from Inventory Control 3 24 in the target domain is used If this is not found the value from
207. e If you are using the PRO PLUS Supplier Performance module performance can be monitored based on commodity codes Create valid commodity codes and associate groups of items with them in Commodity Code Maintenance 1 4 19 The associated code then displays in Item Master Maintenance and can be modified if needed Note Corporate commodity codes are distinct from the commodity codes used to classify goods for Intrastat reporting purposes These are set up with Commodity Code Maintenance 2 22 3 in the Intrastat module Planning Data The material planning department uses item planning data to determine how and when to replenish inventory This data affects MRP purchasing manufacturing work orders repetitive schedules and master scheduling configured products and costing Most of the fields are used in material requirements planning MRP Master Sched amp Plan Orders Time Fence Items Sites 21 Fig 2 6 Item Planning Data Item Master Buyer Planner P Phantom E Maintenance Supplier P Min Ord Max Ord 1 4 1 Item Planning Data Pur Mfg Code MRP Required amp Order Policy POQ Batch Qty 1 0 OrderPerod P Safety StkiO Safety Time 0 Reorder Point 0 Revjaa P Issue Policy PO Site p Pur Mfg p Configuration ATO P Inspect Ins vtrjo P Matri ATP Enforce None P Family ATP Run Seq uf a P Ord Mult Op Based Yield Yield Cum LT 2
208. e Lot Numbers Any lot number can be specified for any item number Unique Lot Serial per Item Number You cannot assign an item on an order a lot or serial number that is already used by that item on another order For example if work order WO1 assigns item A a lot number of 10 no other purchase or work order can assign lot number 10 to item A FAQAD 148 User Guide Master Data b For more information on the effects of the Single Lot fields see Single Lot per Receipt on page 169 Tip This setting also affects Returns to Supplier RTS in the Service Support Management module When this field is Yes and you have received an item lot you cannot receive it again on an RTS FAQAD 2 Unique Lot Serial Numbers You cannot assign an item a lot or serial number that is already used by another item in inventory For example if item A has a lot number of 10 item B cannot be assigned a lot number of 10 Rework work orders expense work orders and distribution orders do not have this restriction Single Lot per WO Receipt Indicate whether work order receipts are restricted to a single lot No Multiple receipts for an order can use the same lot number if needed Yes A new lot number is required for each receipt This setting determines the default for the Single Lot field of Work Order Receipts 16 11 and Work Order Receipt Backflush 16 12 where it can be changed as needed Note The Single Lot settin
209. e Used 2 17 Carriers Menu Shipping functions 2 18 Shipping Group Document Shipping functions For information on Menu shipping groups see User Guide Distribution A 2 19 Credit Terms Trailer Codes Transactions for sales purchasing service Menu support accounts payable and accounts receivable 2 20 Freight Charges Menu Transactions for sales purchasing service support accounts payable and accounts receivable 2 21 Customer Supplier Banks Accounts Payable and Receivable Menu 2 22 Intrastat See Chapter 8 Intrastat on page 263 2 24 Addresses Taxes Control Address functions Except for employee addresses all addresses are stored in the same address table ensuring consistency of information An eight character address code assigned to each address is the key identifier of that address An address code can be associated with different address types For example an employee address code can be used as a salesperson address for sales and commission reporting and as a supplier address for reimbursement of expenses Fig 6 1 Address Table 1 Relationships Companies Suppliers Customers Company Supplier Customer Banks Remit tos Ship tos ties ito Docks End Users i Salespersons Customer iH Supplier Banks Engineers Employees QAD 182 User Guide Master Data Table 6 2 Address List Types FAQAD The system stores information on customers suppliers and salespersons in mas
210. e and to review and modify Intrastat data at any time between order entry and shipment However you can only delete order data using the appropriate order maintenance program At invoice posting this information is recorded in Intrastat history Sales Order Maintenance Order 5010064 Sold To 0100 R Bill To 0100 R Ship To 0100 R Use Order Intrastat Data Maintenance Order Line 1 to enter all Item Number 10 10000 OASIS TM COOLING SYST HOME INDUST MODEL Intrastat data Intrastat Item Country of origin USA P in one frame Commodity Codes P Statistical Procedure 00000001 f Terms of Delive F Port of Arrival Dispatch 003 P Nature of Transactioi Region of Origin Dest cA P Country of Dest Dis Port of Transshipment 001 P Mode of Transport Q Automatically Updating Invoice History Intrastat data records are copied to Intrastat history records automatically during sales order shipment and purchase order receipt The system can update unreported records during subsequent vouchering or invoicing However once Intrastat records have been reported on a final Intrastat declaration the system no longer updates them Voucher Updates Voucher Maintenance 28 1 automatically updates the Intrastat history record associated with each voucher receiver line when the line closes The following Intrastat data is recorded for each voucher receiver line e Reference date if reference logic is 2 or 3 Statistical value i
211. e code of the trailer charge subject to the tax Tax By Output only Total indicates that the tax rate was applied to the order total for all items and trailer charges taxed at this rate Line indicates that the tax rate was applied separately to each item and trailer charge Edited Output only This setting indicates whether the tax amount was ever changed from the system calculated amount The system also displays the factors GTM used to calculate the tax transaction tax date tax rate tax code tax environment tax type item or trailer charge tax class and tax usage Depending on how you set up the tax rate you may be able to change some of the following values To change values Update Tax Allowed must be Yes Trnx Amt This value is the total transaction amount excluding tax Nontaxable Base This is the nontaxable portion of the transaction amount Taxable Base This is the taxable portion of the transaction amount Tax Amt This is the tax amount for the tax type For line 0 it is the transaction tax amount for the tax type For lines 1 999990 it is the amount for the line item or trailer charge Recoverable and Non Hecover Tax This is the recoverable and non recoverable portions of purchase tax Processing GTM 361 Absorb Retain On sales and accounts receivable transactions this is the sales tax that was absorbed and therefore not included in the transaction total On purchasing and accounts payable transact
212. e default status is the item status For memo items the default status is the transaction taxable status For trailer charges the status is the one for the 1 trailer tax detail 2 trailer charge or 3 transaction depending on which one the system finds first Tax In Tax In tax included determines whether tax is already included in line item amounts If it is the system reverse calculates the tax from the item amount and displays it along with the other tax amounts The customer supplier or end user Tax In status determine the default status of the transaction You can override this status for line items For an amount to be tax included Tax In must be Yes and the Allow Tax Included setting for the tax rate must be Yes Note Tax is always added to trailer charges regardless of the value of Tax In Viewing Tax Amounts Processing GTM 359 In the transaction trailer frame review system calculated tax amounts by setting View Edit Tax Detail to Yes The screen displays the total nontaxable and taxable line item and trailer charge amounts the tax date and tax amounts by category Order SO10063 Non Taxable 0 00 Taxable 2 000 00 Tax Date Containers 0 00 Set to Yes to Line Charges 0 00 view tax records View Edit Tax Detail CR Initials Credit Card Action Status Revision 0 EDI PO Ack Sold To 10010001 Bill To 1001000 Line Total 2 000 00 Disc Amt 0 00 Currency USD Service Taxable
213. e how they will be associated with one or more price lists Planning Price Lists In planning for price lists consider the following questions 1 2 Do you offer promotional discounts Do you engage in joint cooperative marketing agreements with retailers where the amount of cooperative marketing is based on the volume purchased over a period of time by the retailer Do you use coupons Do you convert savings resulting from seasonal fluctuations in materials costs into customer discounts Do you offer additional discounts to customers in a geographical area where a product is not moving quickly 10 11 Pricing 51 Do you maintain a minimum price for a product that is the lowest acceptable price offered regardless of the number of discounts Do you offer volume discounts based on quantity and or value Do you negotiate credit terms with your customers Do you negotiate freight terms and freight discounts with your customers Do you want some discounts exclusive of all other discounts or combinable with other discounts Do you want volume discounts based on a range of similar products Setting Pricing Defaults Use Pricing Control 1 10 1 24 to set pricing defaults Discount Combination Type Enter either Additive or Cascading to P See Discount instruct the system what to do when multiple price lists apply a n Automatic AC Regen for Customers Items Enter Yes to have the system automatically add new custo
214. e released If Yes the system does not release work orders and print picklists until there is enough of the item to allocate PO Receipt Status A default inventory status for the item when P See Inventory received on a purchase order This field is optional If not specified ior S on the status of the location or site is used as a default l WO Receipt Status A default inventory status for the item when received on a work order This field is optional If not specified the status of the location or site is used as a default FAQAD 20 User Guide Master Data P See Setting Up Freight Charges on page 206 Fig 2 5 Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 Item Shipping Data b See User Guide PRO PLUS P See Setting Up Commodity Codes on page 270 gt For details about MRP see User Guide Manufacturing AQAD Shipping Data The shipping department uses item shipping data to determine freight charges For example freight charge calculations use the item s shipping weight to determine freight costs Item Shipping Data Ship Weight 1 ib P Net Weight 1 00 Ike P Freight Class Volume 100 00 er P wu SQ In some business environments it is a common practice to use commodity codes to group items for internal business needs For example all suppliers providing a certain kind of commodity represented by a commodity code may be rated together regardless of the particular item Not
215. e system combines sales orders with matching values based on the Yes No settings in the four Match fields sold to ship to bill to and purchase order number Include RMA Issues If Yes the system includes RMA issues in sales order repricing Recalculate Taxes Indicate whether the sales taxes should be recalculated for the sales orders being repriced QAD 84 User Guide Master Data Table 3 4 Reprice Field Settings and Pricing Updates FAQAD Use Sales Order Price Inquiry 1 10 1 17 or Sales Quote Price Inquiry 1 10 1 18 to verify if items are priced correctly Repricing in Sales Order Maintenance Sales Order Repricing 7 1 11 reprices a range of sales orders at one time You can also reprice individual sales orders or lines directly in Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 This kind of repricing is controlled with the Reprice field Reprice always defaults to No in Sales Order Maintenance and cannot be modified for new orders On existing orders enter No to have repricing only occur when requested for a particular line This protects orders from inadvertent changes and minimizes the number of times pricing history records are updated For existing orders Reprice has several functions in Sales Order Maintenance When Reprice is Yes for a line You can update List Price Discount and Net Price fields during line item entry f prices were determined automatically the system automatically recalculates the bes
216. e tax rate For recoverable taxes the tax point is normally invoice receipt However as a comparison this section shows the entries for both tax points Inventory Items Figure 13 6 shows the GL entries for purchases of inventory items The tax point determines whether the update to AP Tax Recoverable occurs at goods receipt or invoice receipt Inventory items are items you purchase to use in manufacturing or to sell to customers FAQAD 364 User Guide Master Data Fig 13 6 GL Entries for Inventory Item Standard Cost Recoverable Tax FAQAD GL Entries for Inventory Item Standard Cost Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt ls Purchase AP Tax Inventory Order Receipts Recoverable 100 00 1 100 00 10 00 10 00 Goods Receipt Entries created for received item cost 1 and tax 2 a EE Purchase Accounts dedu EU Ml Order Receipts Payable ntries created for item 100 00 100 00 cost 3 and tax 4 10 00 10 00 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt Purchase Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts item cost 1 but not for tax una 100 00 1 A Purchase Accounts AP Tax Metelli Order Receipts Payable Recoverable cost 2 and tax 3 woe e A n 10 00 Variances Three kinds of variances occur during the purchasing accounts payable cycle purchase price variance AP usage variance an
217. e taxable regardless of destination leave the ship to zone blank TxC Tax Class You can enter tax classes for customers and or suppliers subject to the tax types in the environment If all shipments are taxable regardless of customer or supplier leave the tax class blank Do not enter item tax classes GTM only uses these to select tax rates Description This field contains a description of the combination of ship from ship to and tax class FAQAD Implementing GTM 327 Tax Environment Maintenance Tax Environment Description Tax Types Tax Zone Tax Class Combinations Ship To Zone T C Description CAN ONT All Tax Classes Tax Type Enter the type codes to include in the environment The codes you enter apply to all combinations of ship froms ship tos and tax classes in the environment Seq Sequence Specify the priority in which tax types are calculated in a tax environment The tax type that is calculated first must have a lower sequence number than the other tax type If all taxes are calculated independently of each other leave the sequence number for all tax types set to 1 In tax on tax situations in which a tax includes another tax amount enter a lower sequence number for the tax that is calculated first For example in some Canadian provinces provincial sales tax PST is based on the item amount plus the goods and services tax GST GST has a lower sequence number than PST R Rounding Method Ro
218. e than one undistributed PCO ecmtO6 p Add Modify Delete PCO Item Data Number PCO00007 ID Database Title Major Redisgn of Coolers Item Number 10 10000 Description OASIS TM COOLING SYST UM EA HOME INDUST MODEL End Product Comments 0 Prod Line 1000 Item Type CONFIG P Drawing 10 10000 Added 05 28 1992 Stetus AC Drawing tc Sie Design Group accTi P ETE Disposition P Current Rev AB Released Rev AB New Rev AC O Q Key fields in the program are as follows End Product Specify the end product affected by the PCO Often PCO details apply to low level components that are meant to affect higher level items Specifying the end product enables the system to generate reports of PCOs affecting that product even when the effect is indirect Comments Enter Yes to attach comments regarding the change Product Change Control 125 New Rev Enter a revision level indicator for the item The item s revision level is updated when the PCO is implemented Revision levels are alphanumeric codes such as 1b aa B3 c 34 6q3 To use strictly numeric values fill the number with zeros 0001 0002 and so on The New Rev value must be greater than the Released Rev value which shows the revision level of the most recently released PCO affecting the item Status New items created for a PCO can be given an item status that prevents their use in live transactions The status field on the PCO can be set so tha
219. eceipt item cost 1 and tax 2 Entries created for received Voucher Confirmation Entries created for item cost 3 variance 4 tax on item cost 5 and tax on variance 6 Goods Receipt Entries created for received item cost 1 but not tax Voucher Confirmation Entries created for item cost 2 variance 3 tax on item cost 4 and tax on variance 5 Inventory Purchase Order Receipts 100 00 QD icon D 2 10 00 Purchase Accounts Order Receipts Payable 100 00 3 3 100 00 10 00 2 30 00 5 10 00 6 3 00 AP Rate AP Tax Variance Recoverable 30 00 6 3 00 6 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Purchase Inventory Order Receipts 100 00 1 D 100 00 Purchase Accounts Order Receipts _ Payable __ 100 00 2 100 00 30 00 10 00 e 3 00 AP Rate AP Tax Variance Recoverable 30 00 8 10 00 4 3 0015 AP Tax Recoverable Processing GTM 379 Memo Items Memo items are non inventory items such as office supplies Figure 13 19 shows GL entries for memo items The tax point determines whether the update to AP Tax Recoverable occurs at goods receipt or invoice receipt Fig 13 19 GL Entries for GL Entries for Memo Item Memo Item Recoverable Tax Average Cost Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Expensed Expensed AP Tax Entries created f
220. ective date is added to the old prices Hound to Two Decimal Places Round to Nearest Whole Number Hound to Nearest Ten Round to Nearest One Hundred Round to Nearest One Thousand Set only one of these to Yes indicating the rounding method to be used when creating the new price list structure Update Defaults to No Determines if the target price list is actually updated based on the parameters specified No is generally specified to create a report of potential changes before they are made It is recommended that you run Price List Copy first using the report only option by setting Update to No and Print Audit Trail to Yes This lets you review changes before actually creating or updating the target price Print Audit Trail Defaults to No Indicates if an audit report should be printed If Yes a report prints showing the effect of applying the copy parameters to the target price list If No a report does not print Processing List Discount Prices Use list discount price tables for purchasing scheduled orders and some service transactions The following example shows how they are used on purchase orders but the process is similar for other transactions When entering an order the Price Tbl and Disc Tbl fields display in the header These fields record the price table and discount table code for the transaction Values for both default from the supplier but you can override them if necessary Using control program options you c
221. ed Lot reference if used The system calculates total item inventory by adding all on hand balances from inventory detail records Records also provide details on inventory status codes and expiration dates grades and assay percentages Modify inventory attributes using Inventory Detail Maintenance 3 1 1 or Detail Maintenance by Item Lot 3 1 2 Use Inventory Detail by Lot Inquiry 3 1 13 to generate a report Creating Inventory Transactions Inventory transactions move inventory to or from a location Examples of inventory transactions include ssuing existing inventory to a work order Receiving purchased materials into inventory Shipping goods Purchase Order Receipts E Raw E k Je Inspection Materials amp sso B jus Service Items Shipments to Customer Use the programs in Table 9 1 to create inventory transactions Menu Number Program 3 4 1 Transfer Single Item 3 4 2 Transfer Multi Item 3 4 3 Transfer With Lot Serial Change Inventory Control 289 Menu Number Program 3 4 4 Batchload Transfer With Lot Serial Change 3 Issues Unplanned 3 8 Issues Return to Supplier 3 9 Receipts Unplanned 3 10 Receipts Sales Order Return 3 11 Receipts Return to Stock 3 12 Receipts Backward Exploded Transfers A transfer is a movement of inventory to a new location You can use three kinds of inventory transfers single item multi item and transfer with lot serial chan
222. ed Date and time the program was initiated Nodes Exploded Current number of items or customers processed Elapsed Time Time it took for the system to update each item or code Process Stopped Time the program completed At the end of the build the system generates a summary report listing the analysis code type code value active status and each customer or item selected by the build Pricing 57 Tip Although builds can be run online batch mode may be more efficient due to potentially long run times QAD 58 User Guide Master Data Fig 3 9 Analysis Code Detail Maintenance 1 8 13 FAQAD Detailed Selection of Analysis Code Nodes Use Analysis Code Detail Maintenance 1 8 13 to inactivate or reactivate individual items and customers selected for a code An asterisk in the Sel field indicates an active node Navigate to the item or customer you want to modify Then press Enter to toggle its current state Analysis Code Detail Maintenance Type Customer Code Retail Retail Customers Update Parent Codes Node Description 2001000 Canadian Supply Corp 20010002 Mississauga Reliable 2011000 King Street Supply 2032000 Centre D Affaires 3001000 Bureau de Fournir 3002000 Centre de Nouvelle Node Description 2001000 Canadian Supply Corp To select a node by name press Go to access the update frame at the bottom of the screen You can type the first character of the node name to go di
223. ed Locations on page 37 for details Fig 6 8 Reserved Location Maintenance 2 1 9 1 b See Reserved Locations on page 37 for details FAQAD Creating Reserved Locations Use the functions on the Reserved Locations Menu 2 1 9 to associate any number of reserved locations with a customer address One of these locations can be designated as the customer s primary location Note You can also create this association directly in Location Maintenance 1 1 18 R nce Address 10010003 Reliable Center Location Description Inv Status Primary nu Location Description Inv Status Primary Finished Goods o When you create a sales order for a customer with a reserved location the reserved location defaults during line item entry For other customers the system automatically blocks sales order line item entry or shipment from a reserved location The location you specify must be set up with an inventory status that prevents items from being allocated or considered by planning functions You can use the report and inquiry on this menu to view the inventory in reserved locations associated with various customer addresses and drill down to associated sales order detail Detail Allocation Inventory Inquiry 2 1 9 5 Detail Allocation Inventory Report 2 1 9 6 Setting Up Supplier Addresses Set up supplier addresses in Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 and Supplier Remit to Maintenance 2 3 13 Supplier addre
224. ed Price list A has a sequence number of 100 with a 20 discount Price list B has a sequence number of 200 with a 30 discount Using the additive method the system calculates the discounts as follows 100 20 20 100 30 30 20 30 50 A discount of 20 is recorded for price list A and 30 for B The total discount is 50 and the net price is 50 It does not matter which discount is calculated first because the best list price is used to calculate both individual discounts Applying the Cascading Method Using the cascading method for the same example the system first performs the calculations for price list A since it has the lower sequence number 100 100 x 1 20 20 100 20 80 Calculations are then performed for price list B 80 80 x 1 30 24 80 24 56 The total discount for the order is 44 and the net price is 56 For this order line a discount of 20 is posted in the general ledger for price list A and 24 for B Pricing 67 QAD 68 User Guide Master Data Tip If a manual price list is included in the pricing determination the system assigns it sequence 999 This ensures that manual discounts are calculated last when the cascading method is used b See Applying the Additive Method on page 67 FAQAD If the sequence numbers are reversed calculations are first performed for price list B 100 100 x 1 30 30 100
225. ed in Routing Maintenance 14 13 1 Routing Maintenance Rate Based 14 13 2 Process Definition Maintenance 15 13 and Process Formula Maintenance 15 18 Additions changes and removals of item specification and test steps developed in Item Specification Maintenance 19 1 13 A single PCO can affect numerous item numbers formulas product structures routings processes or item specifications New item numbers required by PCOs or PCRs can be created using a screen similar to Item FAQAD Product Change Control 101 Data Maintenance 1 4 3 accessed from PCR and PCO Maintenance The revision number of an item added this way is blank until the PCO adding it is finally implemented Add new items needed by a PCR or PCO with an inactive status to ensure they do not appear prematurely on production reports and are not visible to MRP While new items are inactive you can set up additional data such as inventory planning and costing When implemented a PCO can change an inactive item s status to active Note You cannot maintain item site data using PCC functions It is usually better to maintain such data locally by sites You also cannot use PCC to maintain alternate routings or co by product structures To use PCRs and PCOs you first create new production and planning records or copy existing records into PCRs PCOs from production database tables If you copy records you can modify them in the PCO and specify the requir
226. ed product changes These changes do not affect database tables used for production and planning until the PCO is approved and incorporated When this happens modified records and any new records are copied from the PCO back into the production environment Figure 4 1 illustrates the process of copying data into a PCO making changes and updating the production tables QAD 102 User Guide Master Data Fig 4 1 PCO Change Process FAQAD QAD ERP PCO Base PCO with changes Item Files gt Item Files Item Files E Structures amp Structures amp Structures amp Formulas Formulas Formulas mi Routings amp gt Routings amp 2 Routings amp Processes Processes Processes Item Specs gt Item Specs D Item Specs Implement QAD ERP BOO QAD ERP G Item Files a Item Files Structures amp Structures amp Approve F l F l PCO and ormulas ormulas Incorporate m Routings amp rf Routings amp Processes Processes Item Specs Item Specs Product changes are copied into production and planning tables after an effective date is set for a PCO The effective date becomes the start date for new records This way product changes can be used for planning before the actual effective date arrives and before the records are used for production Any changes made by a PCO to item records are copied into mast
227. ed tag information Generates a report showing all deleted tags Typically you delete only tags that have been posted using Inventory Balance Update 3 16 21 Delete Enter No to review tags selected for deletion without actually deleting them The system generates a report showing tag numbers selected for deletion and whether they have been posted or voided Enter Yes to actually delete selected tags Archive Enter Yes to have deleted tag information archived Physical Inventory 305 Archive File Enter the file to which you want the system to archive deleted tag information Freezing Inventory Balances After deleting old tags freeze the inventory to be counted using Inventory Balance Freeze 3 16 4 The system records the current quantity on hand for all selected inventory and uses this record to carry out the inventory count Note Freezing inventory does not prevent the system from processing regular inventory transactions Changes to inventory during a count must be included for the count to be accurate Select inventory to be frozen using one or more of the following criteria Tip Specify a single Site selection site 10000 or a range Location site 10000 to 20000 To select Product Line all items leave the tem Number range blank ABC Class Creating Printing Tags Each item to be counted needs a tag showing the item s site location and item number Then record count information on the tag
228. efault data used in inventory control sales purchasing planning and costing is loaded You can customize costs and other information by company site once you set up the initial record Figure 2 2 shows the major elements that are implemented during product definition in the order they are set up Only product lines and items are mandatory Usage of the other elements varies by company and is described in other chapters S Optional Structures Fig 2 2 ROGER C Product Definition Discount Flow gt Prices ERN 1 Li gt Price Lists r 1 l 1 Product Structures nl Sener Product i i Lines gt i Formulas i i m gt i in Process i Definitions I p Configuration E 1 i Item data is divided into four categories that roughly parallel how companies typically divide up the maintenance responsibility Table 2 1 lists the data types and responsible departments FAQAD 14 User Guide Master Data Table 2 1 Item Data FAQAD Data Type Responsible Department General Data Product Engineering or Research and Development Inventory Data Inventory Control or Materials Management Planning Data Material Planning Cost Data Cost Accounting Because some information serves multiple programs a field that is the responsibility of one particular organization within your company may not be where you expect it For example the default list price for a product might be determined by the sales depart
229. eful feature An alternate approach is to set up your main locations in Location Maintenance 1 1 18 and define sublocations using the lot reference field Location Types Some items require special storage conditions such as temperature control or sterile environments Storing these items in an inappropriate location can cause inventory to become unusable Location type codes enable you to control the type of inventory stored in a location Specify the type code for a location in Location Maintenance 1 1 18 Then identify the items that require this type of storage by specifying the same type code for the item in Item Inventory Data Maintenance 1 4 5 or Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 When an item is received the system checks the location and item type If they are not the same an error displays Single Item Locations Some locations can be used to store different types of the same kind of material For example a vat may contain any kind of liquid such as olive oil ammonia or acetic acid However at any one time you only want one type of liquid in that location Items Sites 37 Define these locations as single item locations by setting Single Item to Tip Yes in Location Maintenance When a location is designated as a single D PS item location it can only have an on hand balance for a single lot of one also if it is used item at a time Reserved Locations Enter Yes in Reserved Locations to display the second
230. el Program 2 22 1 Intrastat Setup Menu 2 22 1 1 Flow Indicator Maintenance ieflowmt p 2 22 1 2 Flow Indicator Browse iebr002 p 2 22 1 4 Terms of Delivery Maintenance ietodmt p 2 22 15 Terms of Delivery Browse iebr008 p 2 22 1 7 Nature of Transaction Maintenance ienotmt p 2 22 1 8 Nature of Transaction Browse iebr004 p 2 22 1 13 Mode of Transport Maintenance iemotmt p 2 22 1 14 Mode of Transport Browse iebr003 p 2 22 1 16 Port Maintenance ieportmt p 2 22 1 17 Port Browse iebr005 p 2 22 1 19 Statistical Procedure Maintenance iespmt p 2 22 1 20 Statistical Procedure Browse iebr007 p 2 22 1 22 Region Maintenance ieregmt p Intrastat 265 Number Menu Label Program 2 22 1 23 Region Browse iebr006 p 2 22 3 Commodity Code Maintenance iecommt p 2 22 4 Commodity Code Browse iebr001 p 2 22 6 Item Intrastat Data Maintenance ieptmt p 2 22 7 Item Intrastat Data Inquiry ieptiq p 2 22 11 Order Intrastat Data Maintenance iedmt p 2 22 12 Order Intrastat Data Report ieordrp p 2 22 13 Intrastat Maintenance iehmt p 2 22 14 Intrastat Inquiry iehiq p 2 22 15 Intrastat Inquiry by Invoice iehinviq p 2 22 16 Intrastat Inquiry by Voucher iehvouiq p 2 22 17 Intrastat Inquiry by Order iehordiq p 2 22 19 Intrastat Declaration Print iehprt p 2 22 20 Intrastat Declaration Reprint iehrprt p 2 22 23 Intrastat Delete Archive iehup p 2 22 24 Intrastat Control jepm p Before Intrastat data can be collected and reports generated you must set up and initialize
231. eld 327 GMP See U S FDA Good Manufacturing Practices grade 151 changing 159 defined 153 Group Maintenance 110 adding users 111 groups PCC 110 adding users 112 approval 116 replacing users 113 114 product change control PCC distribution 119 GTM See Global Tax Management GTM H Harmonized Tariff Codes 173 Health Industry Numbers 173 l Implementation PCO 138 import PCR PCO 139 Inbound Account Maintenance 230 Incorporation PCO 106 138 Incorporation Planning Report 106 136 Incorporation Selection 106 137 139 Individual License Maintenance 178 individual licenses defining 178 initializing PCOs 108 inquiries Intrastat 281 memory considerations 295 workfiles and 295 Intrastat 263 283 audit trail information 283 data for orders 274 delete archive records 282 features 264 FAQAD inquiries and reports 281 manual update of records 278 order maintenance example 274 printing declarations 279 qualitative information 283 quantitative information 283 region code 272 setting up 266 addresses for declarants and agents 267 codes 266 commodity codes 270 company addresses 272 country codes 273 Intrastat item data 271 item net weight 273 Intrastat Control 268 Intrastat Declaration Print 279 Intrastat Declaration Reprint 281 Intrastat Inquiry 281 Intrastat Inquiry by Invoice 281 Intrastat Inquiry by Order 282 Intrastat Inquiry by Voucher 281 Intrastat Item field changing to Yes 276 Intrastat Maintenance 274 278
232. em date not the effective date You can include firm planned orders or MRP planned orders on the report which are marked On Order Reports can be generated in summary or detail format The summary shows the total expired value and ending value for each product line within a site The detail report shows item information within each product line in the site total expired value ending value quantity on order expired quantity and ending quantity Inventory Valuation Reports Inventory valuation reports display the inventory value of quantities on hand by product line or location Some reports show inventory values as of a specified date You can include negative inventory in each report and on some you can select whether items with an initial GL value of zero are valued using this initial zero or the first available cost Use Inventory Valuation Report 3 6 13 to review the value of inventory in a site by product line or item number The total value of each item is shown with a grand total for the product line Use Inventory Valuation by Location 3 6 14 to review the value of inventory in each location of a site by product line or item number The total value of each location is shown with a grand total for the site Use Inventory Valuation as of Date 3 6 15 to review the value of all items in a product line as of a user specified date The total inventory in each site is shown with a grand total for the product line Inv
233. em to default to the source currency If you are copying from one currency to another the system calculates and a default Cur Conv Factor using the exchange rate effective on the price list start date The system adjusts prices on the target list using the conversion factor you specify Item and To Enter a range of item numbers to be used as selection criteria in choosing prices to be copied Start Start date defaults to today s date and defines the start date for the new pricing structure created by the copy This field is applied differently by the system in different situations If the source and target codes and currency are the same and the date entered matches the start date currently on the source price list a new price list is not created Instead the existing price list is modified according to any adjustment percentage entered In other cases where the source and target codes and currency are the same the system uses the Start Date as the start effective date on the target list and adds an ending effective date on the source list one day before target s start date If the source and target codes are different the start date is used on the target and the source list is not affected Expire If specified the system uses the Expiration date as the end effective date for the target price list Adjustment Defaults to 100 0096 Specific prices Amount Type P are multiplied by the adjustment percent then rounded
234. ems ordered Manual Enter a code identifying a manual price list or leave blank Effective Enter the pricing effective date in MM DD YY format The default is the system date Currency Enter the applicable currency for price list calculations and display The default is the base currency Accumulated Quantity If price list Qty Type is Quantity enter the number of items for this order Either Ord Qty value or Break Qty value default is Ord Qty Accumulated Amount If price list Qty Type is Amount the currency amount accumulated for this order Either Ord Qty List Price value or Accum Qty List Price value default is Ord Qty List Price Show Only Selected Choose Yes to have the system show only price lists that are selected for use in determining list and net prices Choose No to have the system show all price lists considered for evaluation of the list and net prices In either case a Yes or No appears in the Sel column indicating the system selection process The default is Yes The system calculates the price for the item and customer you selected for each price list that matches the selected item and customer combination Viewing Orders by Price List Use Customer Orders by Price List Inquiry 1 10 1 15 to ensure that a customer does not exceed the maximum number of orders or to see how a price list is used Cust Orders by Price List Ing Customer p Price List JP Open SOs Only Output terminal eo o
235. enance when generating an 20 48 EMT PO Distribution Order Maintenance N A 42 Logistics Accounting 235 Standard Tax Function Type Logistics Tax Type Sales Order Shipments 13 43 Pending Invoice Maintenance when shipping Shipper Confirm Shipper Unconfirm RMA Maintenance when shipping or receiving RMA Shipments RMA Receipts SO Shipper Maintenance 14 44 DO Shipment N A 45 RMA Maintenance 36 46 Accrual Currency The system determines the accrual currency for inbound and outbound logistics charges as follows For inbound charges the system always uses the base currency For outbound charges the system uses the order freight list currency and the logistics supplier currency to determine the accrual currency When the order currency and logistics supplier currency are the same the system uses the order currency for logistics accruals Otherwise the system uses the base currency Accruing Inbound Logistics Charges After you have defined inbound accrual expense and variance accounts and assigned them to logistics charges codes you can begin the accrual process Inbound logistics charges accrue during PO receipts FAQAD 236 User Guide Master Data Fig 7 12 Inbound Accrual Work Flow b See User Guide Financials A for more information on cost elements and product costing FAQAD Y Assign terms of trade to item suppliers Create
236. ending vouchers closed during vouchering in Voucher Maintenance 28 1 For convenience Logistics Charge Pending Voucher Maint is also located on the Accounts Payable menu as 28 12 Although you can match invoice amounts from logistics suppliers to pending vouchers with blank suppliers in Voucher Maintenance based on the control setting it is easier to match pending vouchers when logistics suppliers are assigned When you receive more than one invoice for the same logistics charge you can enter the supplier from the first invoice and voucher the amount then change the supplier on the pending voucher before vouchering the second invoice Example A single pending voucher is created for freight and you receive two invoices one from a shipping agent for transporting the goods to a local port and another from a local carrier for transporting the goods from the dock to your company warehouse Log Charge Pending Voucher Maint Pending Voucher ID 99 Supplier fI Swift Transport Closed Voucher Logistics Charge Code Freight Freight Internal Ref RC1061 PO Receiver External Ref TCS4456223 Ship From 002 Toronto Computer Services Ship To 10000 Quality Products Inc Transaction Date 07 11 2002 GL Effective Date 07 11 2002 Accrued Amt 2 50 Currency USD Vouchered Amt 0 00 Open Variance Amt 2 50 Pending Voucher ID Enter a number identifying a pending voucher Supplier Enter a logistics supplier Entering a supplier does
237. ent sections for standard costing and average costing illustrate tax accruals in more detail Costing System at Site Tax Amount Taxable Amount See Standard Recoverable Inventory Items page 364 Purchase Price Variances page 365 AP Usage Variances page 366 AP Rate Variances page 367 Memo Items page 368 Returned Items page 368 Standard Non Recoverable Inventory Items page 370 Purchase Price Variances page 371 AP Usage Variances page 372 AP Rate Variances page 373 Memo Items page 374 Returned Items page 368 Average Recoverable Inventory Items page 376 Processing GTM 363 Costing System at Site Tax Amount Taxable Amount See AP Usage Variances page 377 AP Rate Variances page 378 Memo Items page 379 Returned Items page 379 Average Non Recoverable Inventory Items page 381 AP Usage Variances page 382 AP Rate Variances page 383 Memo Items page 384 Returned Items page 384 Standard Cost This section shows tax accruals for a simple purchase order and voucher To review the first for recoverable taxes then for non recoverable taxes entries for average cost see Average Cost on page 375 Recoverable Tax Most European countries have a sales tax system that allows recovery of tax on purchases A recoverable purchase tax amount is one that you are allowed to offset against sales tax payable Such tax amounts are tracked separately in the GL For Global Tax Management they update the AP Tax account for th
238. ent costs of PO line items with the allocated amounts Current costs are updated only when the last cost method is used for the current cost set If another costing method is used current costs for purchased items are not updated Example Item A and item B are purchased from a single supplier and shipped to a company location The GL and current costs for these items consist of the unit cost from the item supplier and the cost to ship each item Item A Item B Material 10 12 Freight 3 2 Total cost 13 14 When the order arrives item A is received in a quantity of 400 and item B in a quantity of 200 Table 7 2 shows the accrued freight charges for each item The logistics supplier sends an invoice in the amount of 2000 for freight The total accrued freight is 1600 When the freight invoice is vouchered the system uses the following equation Apportion Value Line Item Accrual Total Accrual Total Invoice Amount Item POQty GL Freight Accrued Freight Apportion Value A 400 3 1200 1200 1600 2000 1500 B 200 2 400 400 1600 2000 500 The actual freight cost for item A is 3 75 per unit 1500 400 and 2 50 for item B 500 200 When the last cost method is used for the current cost set the system updates the current costs for items A and B with the allocated values Logistics Accounting 217 You specify the apportion method in Logistics Charge Code Maint 2 15 1 The default system defined apporti
239. entation purposes enter either a state or provincial tax identification number or a value added tax registration number If you activated VAT registration in Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 this field displays the label VAT Registration The numbers for European Union countries are validated based on formats defined in VAT Registration Format Maint 2 13 3 20 When you enter an ID in a customer or supplier record the system checks that it has a valid EU country prefix If it does the system verifies that the rest of the number matches the format for that country If either the prefix or number is invalid an error displays The system does not verify that the country prefix matches the country code in the customer or supplier address For example the system does not prevent you from entering a French tax ID for a German supplier Tax ID Misc 1 2 3 For reference and documentation purposes enter any other tax identification numbers that are useful Within City This setting determines whether the address is in the city limits for taxation purposes It affects only GIM processing that occurs in conjunction with the Sales and Use Tax Interface for U S tax processing Product Lines and Items In Product Line Maintenance 1 2 1 and Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 enter the GTM item tax class in all product line and item records If necessary change the taxable status to Yes to accommodate exemption reporting If you a
240. entory Control 301 Use Inventory Valuation as of by Loc 3 6 16 to review the value of inventory in each location of a site on a user specified date The total value of each location is shown with a grand total for the site To have the system consider locations that have had detail records deleted since the effective date set Recalculate Deleted Locations to Yes Stock Journal In many countries businesses are required to validate inventory movement over a range of dates to verify that no fraud occurred in inventory accounting Use Stock Journal 3 6 18 to validate the movement in inventory balances over a range of dates The report shows all inventory transactions together with beginning and ending stock balances In addition the report contains the following information for each inventory movement Shipper number Invoice number when appropriate Order number when appropriate Quantity received or issued Transaction date Effective date Customer or supplier address code Internal transaction number for tracking purposes Transaction type Device History Record Report Use Device History Record Report 3 6 20 to display the production history of a finished device if it is a serialized end item or an end lot of finished devices Multiple levels of component history can be included The output of this report can be used by medical device manufacturers to help satisfy the reporting requirements outlined in
241. er as would be the case for consolidated order processing each database requires only the site codes for its own operations FAQAD 30 User Guide Master Data b See User Guide Manager Functions for details on security Fig 2 9 Site Maintenance 1 1 13 FAQAD Site Security System security features let you determine which users and groups of users can perform inventory transactions at a particular site Set up site security in Site Security Maintenance 36 3 15 Site security applies to programs that affect inventory data and have a site field as part of the selection criteria Site security does not affect inquiries reports or delete archive functions In a multiple domain environment site security must be defined separately for each domain Creating Sites Use Site Maintenance 1 1 13 to set up sites in your database Note The Transfer Ownership field is active only if you are using the optional Supplier Consignment Inventory module This module is described in User Guide Distribution B Entity Default Inventory Status Automatic Locations Domain EMT Supplier External Supplier eoo Transfer Variance Acct 5030 Transfer Ownership O Site Enter a unique identifier for a site Even though consolidated order processing and DRP may not be implemented in the immediate future it is a good idea to make site codes unique across all databases Entity Entity codes differentiate G
242. er Expense Accoun Distribution Order Variance Accoun Customer Type Optionally enter a code classifying customers by type During shipment processing the system searches for GL accounts using the type of the order customer This field is validated against codes set up in Generalized Codes Maintenance for field cm type Channel Optionally enter a code identifying a distribution channel This field is validated against codes set up in Generalized Codes Maintenance for field so channel When searching for GL accounts the system first looks for a match in the detail logistics accounts If no match is found the accounts entered in Logistics Charge Code Maint for the logistics charge are used When searching for a match in the detail accounts the system uses the following hierarchy 1 Matching logistics charge code product line site and supplier or customer type 2 Matching charge code product line and site with a blank supplier or customer type 3 Matching charge code and product line Logistics Accounting 233 Calculating Taxes for Logistics Charges The system calculates taxes on logistics charges and creates tax detail records for them identified with unique tax transaction types For inbound charges the tax status depends on the tax data defined for the charge in Logistics Charge Code Maintenance Outbound charges use the tax parameters associated with the freight charge on the order or shipment For details
243. er List Price Displays the price for one unit of the item using the item stocking unit of measure at the item s default site Total This Level GL Cost Displays the total GL cost for the item s default site It includes all cost elements for this level and lower levels Total GL Cost Displays the default purchase price It includes this level costs excluding any overhead cost elements Price Table List Price Price or cost for one unit of the item using the price table unit of measure Overrides the item master list price or cost Minimum Price Maximum Price A range of acceptable values for the line item net price cost list price cost minus any discounts If the line item net price cost is outside this range the system displays an error message Generating Price Lists by Item After defining item prices in the item master you can create price tables automatically Use Price List Generation by Item 1 10 2 6 to create price tables from item master prices You can create prices for one or a range of items and product lines Price List Generation by Item uses only item master list prices not item cost to calculate the new list price It creates only type L price lists using the default item stocking UM as the price list UM Once the lists are created use Price List Maintenance to add minimum maximum prices and change prices Price List Generation By Item Item Number P Prod Linen P Target Price Table JP Target
244. er a brief 24 characters description for this logistics charge Taxable Indicate whether this logistics charge is taxable This field applies when the charge code is used for inbound purposes Outbound freight charges use the tax parameters associated with the freight charge on the order or shipment Tax Class Enter the tax class used for an inbound taxable logistics charge Close Accruals on First Voucher Enter the default setting for the Close Line field in the Logistics Charge Matching Maintenance frame in Voucher Maintenance You can override the default in Voucher Maintenance No If you might receive multiple invoices for this charge set this field to No For example a freight charge may include one invoice for overseas shipping and another for transportation from the dock to your warehouse Yes If you typically receive a single invoice for this logistics charge set this field to Yes Logistics Supplier Optionally enter a default logistics supplier for this logistics charge Apportion Method Specify the apportioning method used when invoices for logistics charges are vouchered 01 Apportion by the accrued value The total invoice amount is allocated to individual line items as a ratio of the accrued logistics charges This apportion method is the only one currently provided with the Logistics Accounting module If necessary you can create a Progress program with your own apportion method logic and specify the cod
245. er item tables in a separate implementation step on the PCO effective date Product Change Control 103 PCR PCO Life Cycle Figure 4 2 represents the PCR PCO life cycle Fig 4 2 PCR PCO Life Cycle Tasks in Not Approved This Box Are Optional Approve PCR Create and maintain PCR Approved Route PCR Close PCR Create PCO Not Approved Approved v Create and maintain PCO Release and distribute PCO Route PCO Incorporate PCO Approve PCO Implement PCO PCR Life Cycle PCRs can contain the same information as PCOs but cannot be taken past the approval stage to release They are useful for companies that receive requests from various sources such as customers or field representatives and hold the requests for further processing You can set up PCC to require a PCR approval process Once approved PCRs are typically closed or converted into PCOs A PCR approved or not has no effect on the system until converted into a PCO FAQAD 104 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Creating and Maintaining PCRs Create PCRs in PCR Maintenance 1 9 2 1 Also use PCR Maintenance to capture and modify item product structure formula routing process and item specification records The Type Design Group combination determines the PCR routing slip and distribution group Routing PCRs for Approval When a PCR is
246. es as space permits Setting Up Rounding Methods During transaction entry the system calculates numbers that must be rounded up or down to the nearest tenth hundredth or other unit before they can be printed on reports or displayed on the screen Rounding conventions vary by country and tax requirements In GTM you can define multiple rounding methods and assign the appropriate one to each tax type in the tax environment Three rounding methods are supplied 0 rounding to ones rounding to tenths 2 rounding to hundredths If you need additional rounding methods define them in Rounding Method Maintenance 2 13 1 17 To verify data setup use Rounding Method Browse 2 13 1 18 and Report 2 13 1 19 Note Rounding methods can also be associated with currencies Rounding Method Maintenance is also available as option 36 2 9 Fig 12 6 um Rounding Method Sa Maintenance Rounding Method 1 2 13 1 17 Description Round to Tenths Rounding unit o 100 Rounding Threshold 0 0500 Decimal Point Hounding Method Enter a 1 character numeric code that identifies a method for rounding calculated amounts Codes 0 1 and 2 are system supplied FAQAD 324 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Description Enter a description of the rounding method The description prints on most browses and reports as space permits Rounding Unit The rounding unit must be an integer or a decimal that is a power of
247. es frame displays i i Work Order m Attributes In Assay 9 Maintenance GradeiB and Work Order Expire Datejos zs os B F Inspect gs Attribute Receipt Status Active Batch Batcho6734 Maintenance Single Lot Lot Number O Q Work order attributes are stored in the work order master When a work order is created Receipt Status and Active default from Item Site Inventory Data Maintenance 1 4 16 If Compliance Active is Yes you can assign work order attributes batch number and lot number to end items in Work Order Maintenance 16 1 When Compliance Active is No and the item is lot controlled only the Single Lot field can be modified When you receive items into inventory you can modify assay grade expire date and receipt status unless items with the same lot and reference numbers already exist in the location with different attributes If you have not specified attributes on the work order and no inventory detail records exist the system assigns default values from location or site records Note You can always modify attributes at receipt regardless of the setting of Compliance Active Why Are Attributes Important While attributes are described here primarily for work orders attributes also relate to purchase orders repetitive transactions and advanced repetitive transactions Attributes you enter on an order eventually are assigned to inventory records during order receipt whether it is a purchase
248. es for this line item The field is editable only if Vary Pricing Date by SO Line in Sales Order Control is Yes When the control program field is No the Pricing Date of the order header is used and cannot be changed on individual lines When you update the header the system automatically changes the date on all lines Credit Terms Interest 6 Credit terms interest for this line This field defaults from the header You can edit the value on individual lines only if Vary Pricing Date by SO Line in Sales Order Control is Yes When the control program field is No the header value is used and cannot be changed on individual lines When you update the header the system automatically changes the Credit Terms Interest field on all lines Pricing 87 Tip This field only affects the current maintenance session Fig 3 26 Sales Order Line Item Price Fields QAD 88 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Reprice Editable only if Reprice is No in the order header In this case you can select individual line items for repricing When set to Yes for a line the List Price Discount and Net Price fields can be edited and if the original price was calculated by the system it is automatically recalculated Manual Defaults from the Manual field in the sales order header You can specify a different manual price list for this line as needed This field only has effect if Reprice is Yes Fixed Price Initially defaults from the order he
249. es in programs that reference customers as well as determining how customer transactions are processed For example Credit Hold determines whether orders for a customer are automatically put on credit hold Reserved locations associated with customer addresses determine how order inventory is allocated A sales order or sales quotation references three customer addresses The addresses can be the same or each can be different Sold to customer The customer placing the order Bill to customer The customer paying the invoice Ship to customer The customer receiving the order Many sales order fields derive defaults from customer address records Sales order header information such as default credit terms and currency are determined by bill to customer as is trailer information such as accounts receivable accounts Other fields default from the sold to customer unless a customer record was entered for the ship to address for the order These include site language taxable status and other tax defaults salesperson commission remarks ship via and FOB point There are several ways to set up sold to bill to and ship to customers depending on the extent to which they share defaults If site language price list information and so on are the same for sold to and ship to customers set up these addresses in one step using Customer Ship to Maintenance 2 1 13 If the defaults differ set up the addresses in both Customer Mainte
250. eset Cumulative Shipped Reset 7 5 18 CYC CNT Cycle count adjustment Cycle Count Results Entry 3 14 CYC ERR Cycle count error Cycle Count Results Entry 3 14 CYC RCNT Cycle count recount Cycle Count Results Entry 3 14 ISS CHL Location change issue Inventory Detail Maintenance 3 1 1 ISS DO Distribution order shipment Distribution Order Shipments 12 17 22 ISS FAS Final assembly order issue Sales Order Shipments 7 9 15 ISS GIT Distribution order receipts Distributed Order Receipts 12 15 20 ISS PRV Return to vendor supplier Purchase Order Return 5 13 7 ISS RV return to vendor supplier Issues Return to Supplier 3 8 ISS SO Issue sales order item Sales Order Shipments 7 9 15 ISS TR Inventory transfer issue Transfer Single Item 3 4 1 ISS UNP Inventory unplanned issue Issues Unplanned 3 7 ISS WO Issue work order item Work Order Component Issue 16 10 ORD PO Purchase order booking Purchase Order Maintenance 5 7 ORD SO Sales order booking Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 ORD SEO Material order booking Material Order Maintenance 11 11 1 Inventory Control 293 Transaction Type Description Program Creating RCT CHL Location change receipt Inventory Detail Maintenance 3 1 1 RCT DO Distribution order receipt Distributed Order Receipt 12 15 20 RCT FAS Receive final assembly Sales Order Shipment 7 9 15 RCT GIT Distribution order shipment Distribution Order S
251. ess reserved location inventory Effect of Reserved Locations in Sales Order Functions When an item is entered on a sales order the default location is normally the one associated with the item in Item Master Maintenance When reserved locations exist for the order customer a new method is used to determine the default location The system checks for reserved location records for the ship to customer address then the sold to address and finally the bill to address If a record is found with Primary set to Yes this location is used as the Items Sites 39 default If reserved locations are defined for one of the order address records but none are designated as primary the first reserved location found alphabetically within the site is used as the default The calculation of quantity available to allocate during line item entry takes into account inventory in the customer s reserved locations even though the inventory status is defined with Available set to No Inventory Status Codes Use Inventory Status Code Maintenance to create and modify inventory status codes Assign inventory status codes to sites with Site Maintenance 1 1 13 and locations with Location Maintenance 1 1 18 Optionally assign default inventory status codes for purchase order or work order receipts to individual items using Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 Item Inventory Data Maintenance 1 4 5 or Item Site Inventory Data Maintenance 1 4 16
252. fault codes for new tax rate records in Domain Account Control 36 1 If necessary you can later override these codes for individual tax rates Setting Up Tax Rates GTM tax rate records enable you to configure the software to support many different kinds of taxes and transaction conditions The major decision points are as follows Not all decisions apply to all tax types in all countries The tax type tax class tax usage and starting ending date range to which the tax rate applies The percentage used to calculate tax Whether taxes are calculated by line or by transaction total The taxable base or item amount subject to tax The minimum maximum item amounts subject to tax The amount of purchase tax that is recoverable against sales tax The tax calculation method Whether a user can override system calculated tax amounts Whether tax amounts are reverse calculated from item amounts that already include tax The GL accounts sub accounts and cost centers to which tax amounts involving this tax rate are posted Whether the tax on purchased items sold as part of a service contract are absorbed rather than collected Whether purchase tax amounts are retained and paid directly to the government rather than remitted to suppliers Implementing GTM 333 Whether purchase taxes are accrued for GL reporting upon receipt of goods or the supplier invoice Whether taxes are based on sales minus credit terms discounts or on the full s
253. frame displays Fig 4 11 Maintain Users in Groups Remove User Maintain Users in Groups MBA C FE es TEES SE User ID tnd Tamara M Dillon Options 3 1 Add User 2 3 Remove User Available Groups acctl elecl Replace User Remove User Selected Groups FAQAD Add gt Remove gt lt Done gt User ID Enter the user ID of the user being removed Available Groups The list box includes all groups to which the user being removed belongs Defining Approval Routings Approval routings specify who needs to approve a change and in what order approvals are required Approval routings are represented by routing slips which can be created manually or copied from routing templates and modified Routing slips also indicate who is to be notified when documents are approved Every PCR and PCO requiring approval must have a routing slip Create original routing slips in Routing Slip Maintenance 1 9 1 5 or copy existing routing slip templates and make required modifications If you modify a routing template the changes only affect new PCRs and PCOs Product Change Control 115 Fig 4 12 _ Routing Slip Maintenance Routing Slip Maintenance S S Routing Slip Maintenance Severity List REWORK P Users Notified At Subm Users Notified At Approval Routing Slip Enter a unique code identifying the routing Description Enter a description of the routing Severit
254. frame of Location Maintenance where you assign reserved locations to specified customers Reserved locations let you dedicate inventory to a specific customer or customers to ensure an adequate supply for sales orders Note Use Reserved Location Maintenance 2 1 9 1 to make adjustments P See page 192 to the reserved location data set up in Location Maintenance Fig 2 12 Location Maintenance Site i ite 10000 San Diego Main Plant 1 1 E 1 8 Reserved Location 800 Finished Goods Location Data Address Name Primary Location Address Name Primary Location o INN o Enter a customer address and indicate whether this location is the customer s primary location The primary location always defaults on new sales quotes and orders Each customer can have only one primary location at a site but you do not need to designate any reserved location as primary When you create a sales order for a customer with a reserved location the reserved location defaults during line item entry For other customers the system automatically blocks sales order line item entry or shipment from a reserved location Important The system does not prevent you from reserving the same site and location for multiple customers You must ensure that only appropriate customers are assigned to reserved locations Use Reserved Location Browse 2 1 9 2 and Report 2 1 9 3 to monitor customer associations with reserved locations FAQAD 38 User Guide Ma
255. g you can match the amounts from pending vouchers to actual invoice amounts The more information provided on the pending voucher such as the supplier of the logistics charge the easier it is to match to an invoice QAD 218 User Guide Master Data Table 7 3 Logistics Accounting Programs FAQAD When purchased items are shipped from an item supplier you might not know the name of the logistics supplier until the goods arrive Logistics charges can accrue without specifying a logistics supplier After an invoice arrives you can define the logistics supplier on the pending voucher using Logistics Charge Pending Voucher Maintenance 2 15 7 During vouchering it is easier to match invoice amounts to pending vouchers when logistics suppliers are assigned Note When you ship items to a customer you must specify the logistics supplier or an error is generated Internal and External References Each pending voucher includes an internal reference and optionally an external reference An internal reference is a code identifying a shipment or receipt created by the system such as a receiver number or shipper ID An external reference is an identifier supplied by a third party logistics supplier such as a bill of lading number carrier tracking number or packing slip number When you are using Logistics Accounting you can specify these reference numbers in pop up frames in some order maintenance programs During vouchering u
256. g for Logistics Accounting FAQAD 222 User Guide Master Data Fig 7 2 Setting Up Logistics Accounting b See User Guide Financials A for information on setting up accounts AQAD Menu No Description Additional Processing 11 7 1 1 RMA Maintenance Creates pending vouchers accrues 11 7 1 13 RMA Receipts logistics charges and calculates tax 11 7 1 16 RMA Shipment 12 17 21 Distribution Order Processing Creates pending vouchers accrues 12 17 22 Distribution Order Shipments logistics charges and calculates tax Setting Up Logistics Accounting Figure 7 2 shows steps for setting up Logistics Accounting Each step is discussed in detail in the following sections Set up GL accounts Define logistics charge codes Set up NRM sequence numbers Set up the control program Setting Up GL Accounts Define logistics accounts by product line and site ed i mamma optional You can define default GL accounts sub accounts and cost centers that are accessed when logistics charges are accrued and vouchered Separate sets of accounts can be used to track inbound and outbound logistics charges For outbound logistics charges you can use separate sets of accounts to track the costs associated with shipments to customers and shipments to other company locations Each logistics charge account is identified by an account code an optional sub account code a
257. g the Trade Management TrM module Design groups are used in the Product Change Control module to determine who is responsible for changes affecting the item Item Status Code Use Item Status Code Maintenance 1 1 5 to define status codes to associate with items in Item Master Maintenance or Item Data Maintenance Status codes indicate where an item is in its life cycle from planning through design production and obsolescence For example you can set up a status code of AC to show that an item is actively manufactured and sold and one of OB to identify obsolete items Items Sites 17 Use item status codes to restrict which transactions can occur for a particular item When you process an item transaction the system checks the item s status code to verify that the transaction is not restricted If it is an error message displays and you cannot proceed You also can use item status codes for selecting records in some reports and other functions For example when you are updating ABC code rankings and calculations using Item ABC Status Report Update 1 5 9 or 3 6 3 you can enter a comma separated list of item status codes to be excluded The function does not process items associated with specified codes Codes and Master Comments Codes such as group and type are useful because they provide a short convenient way to categorize and identify items However more extensive information related to an item may be needed For example
258. ge Use Transfer Single Item 3 4 1 to transfer a specified quantity of a single item from one location to another If inventory status codes specified in the From and To fields differ for an item you can select the one to be used Use Transfer Multi Item 3 4 2 to transfer more than one item from one location to another Only entire quantities are transferred not partial quantities This transaction generates a report showing the items and quantities transferred Use Transfer With Lot Serial Change 3 4 3 to transfer a specified quantity of a single item from one location to another and change the lot serial and lot reference numbers associated with the item Use Batchload Transfer With Lot Serial Change 3 4 4 for the same b See User Guide purpose as 3 4 3 However this program also supports CIM loading Piin id Sdn of inventory information by allowing you to specify values for fields details on CIM that are prompted for interactively in the standard Transfer With Lot Serial Change This is especially important when using CIM load to transfer data between the system database and an external system FAQAD 290 User Guide Master Data FAQAD If Verify GL Accounts is Yes in Domain Account Control the system checks the GL calendar to ensure that the effective date specified for a transfer is within an open fiscal period The default effective date is the system date If a shipping group exists for a transfer you
259. gs have no effect when Lot Control Level is set to 0 Single Lot per PO Receipt Indicate whether purchase order receipts are restricted to a single lot No Multiple receipts for an order can use the same lot number if needed Yes A new lot number is required for each receipt This setting determines the default for the Single Lot field of Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 where it can be changed as needed Single Lot per REPET Receipt Indicate whether end item receipts in repetitive transactions are restricted to a single lot No Multiple receipts for an order can use the same lot number if needed Yes A new lot number is required for each receipt This setting determines the default for the Single Lot field of Repetitive Labor Transaction 18 14 as well as Backflush Transaction 18 22 13 and Move Transaction 18 22 19 in Advanced Repetitive Defining Inventory Attributes Attributes are critical to managing the flow of inventory in a warehouse Of the various attributes status is the most important since you can restrict transactions based on status When compliance is active you have more options for setting and using attributes Typically the status of an item is determined by its location In a regulated environment a special status for quarantined items is often created and assigned to a particular location Quarantined items are held in that location until they are inspected approved for use and transferred
260. he Amount Type field Pricing 73 Continue entering values for each quantity or amount break The frames illustrated in Figure 3 17 and Figure 3 18 display when amount type is Accrual Discount Discount Amt Markup or Net Price Fig 3 17 EN Price List Account and aee P a Coe Maintenance Project fields L Proti P 1 10 1 1 Discount Acer sl ia H and Accrual ir JP P LP Account Fields Prje P wu SQ Discount Acct Sub Acct CC and Project For Discount Discount Amt Markup or Net Price price lists enter an account code for tracking discount amounts Sub account cost center and project are optional If you do not associate accounts with price lists discounts are posted to the Sales Discount account specified in the order maintenance program For accrual price lists the label of this field changes to Expense A percentage of the net price accrues to the account specified in the Accrual Acct field The Expense account is required and used to balance the credit posted to the Accrual account Accrual Acct Sub Acct CC and Project These fields apply to accrual price lists only The account you enter is used to track the accrual amounts in the general ledger Proceed to the next frame Min Qty A quantity or amount The Min Qty field changes to Min Amt if the Qty Type field is set to Amount Discount A discount percentage The Discount label changes to Markup Net Price or Disc Amt depending on
261. he existing record although you can use other PCO Maintenance functions to change them To replace one component item with another across all bills of material create a PCO and use Copy Where Used into PCO to include every product structure record that used the old component Then use Replace Product Structure Component to deactivate the existing product structure records and add new ones that specify the new component In this way you can set up mass component maintenance on a PCO in two relatively simple steps Maintaining Routing Records Important To use these functions Routings must be Yes in Enable PCC Routing Maintenance 14 22 Select Routing Data Maintenance to make additions changes and removals to both standard and rate based routings To modify processes use Process Data Maintenance FAQAD 128 User Guide Master Data Fig 4 23 PCR PRO Detail Maintenance Routing AQAD The Routing Data Maintenance submenu has three selections e Copy Routing to PCR PCO Copies routing records into the PCO Displays the operation for a routing and enables you to select any number of steps for inclusion in the PCO Once copied operations can be modified with Detail Maintenance PCR PRO Detail Maintenance Routing Used to add operations to a routing deactivate operation steps and edit routing changes already added to a PCO Records are not actually deleted Deactivating a record sets an ending effective date whe
262. he following month and so on For these terms set Due Date From to 4 end of week However if you specify only the Due Date From the amount of time between the invoice date and the payment due date may be too short for a reasonable response For example for the end of month proximo terms described above an invoice dated September 30 would be due October 10 To prevent this situation specify the Min Due Days This feature Addresses 201 QAD 202 User Guide Master Data Table 6 5 Proximo Terms One Month Table 6 6 Proximo Terms Bimonthly Fortnight FAQAD moves the due date to the next period whenever the number of days between the invoice date and the payment due date is too short for a reasonable response There are many ways to set up proximo terms Table 6 5 through Table 6 7 illustrate sample proximo terms defined with Credit Terms Maintenance Due Days 10 Due Date From 2 End of Month Min Due Days 15 If Invoice Date Is June 1 30 Due Date From 3 End of Fortnight Min Due Days 30 Invoice Dates June 1 14 June 15 30 You want to process payments on the 10th of the month and there must be at least 15 days between the invoice date and the payment due date For monthly proximo terms Due Days identifies the calendar day of the payment month Specify Due Days only for end of month proximo terms Payment Due Date Is July 10 Your payment due date is either the 15th or
263. he system does not maintain an audit trail of changes In some environments the government may require you to set this to No Allow Tax Included Specify whether this tax rate reverse calculates taxes from line item amounts on transactions for customers and suppliers whose Tax In tax included status is Yes If you set Allow Tax Included to Yes GIM reverse calculates tax based on the tax rate s percentage and tax method A tax environment should have no more than one tax type with a rate having Allow Tax Included set to Yes Multiple tax included rates can lead to tax calculation errors Note Tax is always added to trailer charges regardless of the setting of Tax In EC Sales List This setting is used only on tax rates for European Community countries with recoverable value added taxes If Yes sales and purchases that use these tax rates are included in the EC Sales Listing 2 13 15 8 a report submitted to the government as verification that recoverable purchase VAT claimed back by your company is correct for the amount of VAT it collected on sales EC Process Work This setting identifies tax rates that apply to work performed in another European Community country Sales Tax Account Identify the sales tax liability credited whenever tax is calculated on sales to a customer Account sub account and cost center default from Domain Account Control 36 1 but you can override them Sales Tax Absorbed Identify the sales tax lia
264. he value on a printed document Symbols reports 183 screens 183 taxes 184 Numerics 1 1 1 40 1 1 13 36 1 1 18 34 36 1 2 1 27 1 2 5 27 1 2 9 27 1 2 13 27 1 2 17 27 1 4 1 14 1 4 3 100 124 1 4 5 14 18 1 4 7 14 1 4 9 14 1 4 16 14 1 4 17 14 1 4 18 14 22 1 5 9 18 1 5 12 17 1 8 1 54 1 8 7 56 1 8 19 57 1 8 20 59 1 9 1 1 110 1 9 1 3 111 1 9 1 5 115 1 9 1 7 117 1 9 1 9 118 121 1 9 2 1 119 1 9 2 4 104 1 9 2 8 131 1 9 2 13 119 1 9 2 16 105 132 Index 1 9 6 1 105 108 133 1 9 6 2 131 1 9 6 13 134 1 9 7 1 105 119 121 135 1 9 7 3 106 136 1 9 7 4 106 137 139 1 9 7 5 106 138 1 9 7 13 138 1 9 9 1 131 1 9 9 6 108 1 9 11 131 1 9 13 120 139 1 9 14 121 139 1 9 24 108 1 10 1 24 51 1 10 2 5 94 1 10 2 6 92 1 22 1 166 1 22 4 152 1 22 13 167 1 22 16 1 174 1 22 16 4 175 1 22 16 7 175 1 22 16 9 175 1 22 16 13 177 1 22 16 16 178 1 22 19 160 1 22 22 165 1 22 23 162 1 22 24 146 2 1 1 187 188 2 1 7 191 2 1 9 1 37 192 2 1 9 5 192 2 1 9 6 192 2 1 13 186 2 3 1 192 199 2 3 13 192 QAD 388 User Guide Master Data 2 5 1 185 3 4 1 289 2 5 16 186 3 4 2 289 2 11 211 3 4 3 289 2 12 183 341 3 4 4 289 2 13 1 1 321 3 6 1 298 2 13 1 2 321 3 6 2 298 2 13 1 3 321 3 6 3 18 298 2 13 1 5 322 3 6 5 299 2 13 1 6 322 3 6 6 299 2 13 1 7 322 3 6 8 299 2 13 1 9 322 3 6 9 300 2 13 1 13 329 3 6 13 300 2 13 1 17 323 3 6 14 300 2 13 1 18 323 3 6 15 300 2 13 1 19 323 3 6 16 301 2 13 1 22 328 3 6 18 301 2 13 1
265. hese reports do not necessarily satisfy local tax laws You often must write custom reports FAQAD 386 User Guide Master Data Fixing Common Tax Problems Table 13 4 describes common tax processing problems and possible causes Table 13 4 Common Tax Problem Possible Cause Processing i Problems Warning No tax environment found using GTM could not find a tax environment for default the ship from ship to tax zone Error Tax rate does not exist The transaction has the right tax environment but the wrong tax type Tax was calculated incorrectly FAQAD combination so it inserted the error code from Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 GTM can also select the wrong environment if the tax zone was wrong in the address records for your company the customer or the supplier a No tax rate exists for the tax type item or trailer charge tax class item or transaction tax usage and or transaction tax date b If the system finds a tax class or tax usage specific rate for an item or trailer charge it expects to find one for all applicable tax types The tax environment has the wrong tax type Field settings in your transaction must be consistent with corresponding settings for the tax rate For example for tax to be reverse calculated Tax In must be Yes in both the transaction line item frame and the tax rate record Occasionally the system calculates tax correctly but they do not match t
266. hipments 12 17 22 RCT PO Purchase order receipt Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 RCT RS Inventory return to stock Receipts Return to Stock 3 11 RCT SOR Inventory sales order return Receipts Sales Order Return 3 10 RCT TR Inventory transfer receipt Transfer Single Item 3 4 1 RCT UNP Inventory unplanned receipt Receipts Unplanned 3 9 RCT WO Receive work order item Work Order Receipt 16 11 RJCT WO Reject work order item Work Order Receipt 16 11 TAG CNT Physical inventory update Inventory Balance Update 3 16 21 WIP ADJ Work in process adjustment WIP Material Cost Revaluation 16 22 WO CLOSE Work order close Work Order Accounting Close 16 21 Reviewing Transaction History Use the programs on the Transaction History Menu 3 21 to view inventory transaction history Use Transactions Detail Inquiry 3 21 1 to display detailed inventory transaction history records ordered by transaction number Use Transactions by Item Browse 3 21 2 to display inventory transaction history for an item number ordered by transaction date starting with the most recent Use Transactions by Order Report 3 21 13 to display inventory transaction history by sales order or work order number Use Transactions by Item Report 3 21 14 to display inventory transaction history by item number Use Transactions Accounting Report 3 21 16 to display the costed GL transactions created for each transaction QAD 294 User
267. hose assigned by current Export Administration Regulations This field is for reference only Comments Enter Yes to display a screen for recording special requirements restrictions or other GTM specifications QAD 196 User Guide Master Data b See User Guide Distribution A for information on date calculations Fig 6 12 Delivery Transit Time Maintenance 2 16 1 FAQAD Setting Up Delivery Transit Times Use Delivery Transit Time Maintenance 2 16 1 to enter standard transit time data for inventory deliveries between the shipping site and the specified ship to country state and city The system uses delivery transit times in some automatic date calculations For example when Calculate Promise Date is Yes in Sales Order Control 7 1 24 the system checks the ship from site and the delivery destination to determine the transit time It uses the specified number of days along with date information on the order to calculate promise dates or due dates From Site 10000 To Country Code mex Mexico To State To City mexico city Transit Days 15 O Q From Site Enter the code representing the site from which inventory is shipped This field cannot be blank and the site must already be defined in Site Maintenance 1 1 13 To Country Code Enter the code representing the country to which inventory is delivered You can leave this field blank If you enter a value it must already be defined in Country Code Ma
268. iance 5 amp 3 00 AP Rate Variance Inventory 30 00 10 00 3 00 6 QAD definition such items have no standard cost Figure 13 15 shows GL entries for memo items The tax point determines whether the update to 374 User Guide Master Data Memo Items Memo items are non inventory items such as office supplies By AP Tax Recoverable occurs at goods receipt or invoice receipt Fig 13 15 GL Entries for Mama Item GL Entries for Memo Item Standard Cost Non Recoverable Tax Non Recoverable Tax Goods Receipt Entries created for received item cost 1 and tax 2 Voucher Confirmation Entries created for item cost 3 and tax 4 Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Expensed Expensed Purchases Item Receipts 100 00 D 100 00 10 00 3 10 00 Expensed Item Accounts Receipts Payable 100 00 S 100 00 10 00 4 i 10 00 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt Entries created for received item cost 1 but not for tax Voucher Confirmation Entries created for item cost 2 and tax 3 FAQAD Expensed Expensed Purchases Item Receipts a D 100 00 Expensed Purchases ne Expensed Accounts Item Receipts Payable 10 Q 100 00 10 00 Processing GTM 375 Returned Items When you return items the system clears the item cost and the tax from the accounts updated by the original receipt and the
269. implementation details at different factories accommodating variations in specific item numbers work centers and so on Domain then becomes an important selection criterion in PCR PCO Import Export 1 9 13 Product Change Control 121 Type and Design Group This combination must be defined in PCR PCO Type Maintenance 1 9 1 9 The values specified determine the approval cycle distribution group and document change type If a number is not entered and autonumbering is used this combination also determines the PCO number Once you have created or accessed a PCO you can enter and change Title Reason Class Originator and User Codes These are user defined and typically used to provide PCO reference summaries They do not affect PCO processing but display in PCO Browse 1 9 2 14 Print PCR PCO 1 9 9 1 and Release and Distribution 1 9 7 1 After entering basic PCO data a section menu enables you to navigate elsewhere in PCO Maintenance Click the arrow next to a menu selection to activate it Number PCO00007 Type PCO Design Group ACCT1 Created By hme 06 12 2002 Orig R PCO PCR Function Maintenance Text Data Maintenance Item Data Maintenance Structure Data Maintenance Routing Data Maintenance Formula Data Maintenance Process Data Maintenance Item Specification Maintenance Trailer Maintenance Select PCR PCO Section Tip Review routing slip and distrib
270. imum prices if selected for a given line item even if the list price is manually overridden List prices are the foundation of pricing logic The choice of exclusive base combinable and base combinable as the Comb Type does not apply to list prices They must be set up with a Comb Type of combinable Discount 96 Percentage subtracted from the item list price Discount Amt Amount subtracted from the item list price Markup Percentages added to item cost in a specified cost set Must be either a base or exclusive combinable type Net Price Discounts resulting in a fixed price Must be either a base or exclusive combinable type Pricing 61 gt See Discount Types on page 61 P See Calculating Best Prices on page 65 FAQAD 62 User Guide Master Data Accrual Similar to Discount except that a percentage of the net price accrues to a specified general ledger account without reducing the net price and independent of discount Credit Terms Specified for an order or quote independent of other discount types Freight List Specified for an individual order or quote line item independent of discount Freight Terms Specified for an order or quote independent of discount Other Pricing Elements The system processes pricing by line item As a sales order or quote is entered the system determines the following Who the pricing customer is Which price lists combine with
271. in inventory history records with a brief description of each type and the name of one of the programs that creates the transaction Note Many of these transactions are created in more than one program In this case the table simply indicates a typical program associated with the transaction and is not intended to be a complete list FAQAD 292 b See Inventory Status Codes on page 39 b See User Guide Distribution B Table 9 2 Inventory Transaction Types FAQAD User Guide Master Data Each inventory status code can include a list of restricted transactions This allows you to manage how items locations and sites are used However to maintain system integrity some transactions cannot be restricted this way Note In Table 9 2 transactions that cannot be restricted appear in boldface type If you are using either Supplier Consignment Inventory or Customer Consignment Inventory the system creates additional transaction types to manage consigned inventory Transaction Type Description Program Creating CST ADJ Standard cost adjustment Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 CUM RADJ Cumulative received adjust Cumulative Received Maintenance 5 5 5 13 CUM RRES Cumulative received reset Cumulative Received Reset to Zero 5 5 5 14 CUM SADJ Cumulative shipped adjust Cumulative Shipped Maintenance 7 5 16 CUM SRES Cumulative shipped r
272. ince this data cannot be defined per site If general item data for an item varies by site you must set up the item with different item numbers Fig 2 3 Item Master Maintenance eie ERA CIC Az Maintenance Item Number 88 100 ipti TO f 1 4 1 Item Data um lEA P Item Data Prod Line 1500 Item Type COMP Drawing 88 100 Added 05 28 1992 Status AC Rev AA Design Group Group AUTO Drawing Loc Promo Group Price Break Cat The item number description product line and unit of measure UM are the most visible and most important engineering fields The item number is the index for item data Whenever you enter a number P See User Guide in an Item field it is validated against numbers in the item master The Porn id on fields for unit of measure group type and status permit virtually any details on combination of characters Most of these fields are validated with hala generalized codes and look up browses can be set up Item Number and Description Most companies have not escaped controversy when determining conventions for item numbering and item descriptions Proponents of significant semi significant and nonsignificant item numbering schemes argue the advantages and disadvantages of coding information into an item number With the system any numbering scheme is possible Using a significant numbering scheme may be less important because users have access to help windows that can be searched by item number or de
273. ing the Fixed Price field in the sales order header or the line item frame must be set to No Otherwise the order is skipped even if it matches selection criteria The Fixed Price field appears in Customer Maintenance e Sales Quote Maintenance header and line Sales Order Maintenance header and line RMA Maintenance header and line Fixed Price defaults from Customer Maintenance to Sales Quote Maintenance and then to Sales Order Maintenance If you do not use sales quotes the value defaults directly from Customer Maintenance to Sales Order Maintenance The value of Fixed Price on an order header determines the default for each line as it is added When a sales quote is released to an order the system resets the Fixed Price value on the order header to the value associated with the customer The line item Fixed Price value is unchanged During order repricing you have the option to Check credit limits after new prices are applied and make various credit adjustments Print sales orders Combine sales orders Include RMA issues e Recalculate taxes 81 FAQAD 82 User Guide Master Data Fig 3 24 Sales Order Repricing 7 1 11 FAQAD Use Sales Order Repricing 7 1 11 to reprice and print sales orders and sales quotes for a specified range of order numbers Sales Order Repricing Sales Order 10001 P Last Price o B Order Date 04 23 00 B Due pae E Check Credit Z Print Sales Order
274. initial product installation VAT Registration Format Init 2 13 3 25 utvatreg p loads an initial set of format definitions for valid value added tax VAT registration code formats required for European Union EU countries The initial data load includes valid format definitions for EU member countries as of January 2007 Use VAT Registration Format Maint 2 13 3 20 to define codes needed if additional countries join the EU Specify a VAT prefix country code country name and up to 9 valid formats Processing functions validate that the specified VAT code matches a format defined for the associated country in this program Use the following standards for creating a format Do not enter the country code as a prefix The system builds valid records by adding the value from the VAT Prefix field 9 represents any number 0 9 A represents any letter A Z X represents any number 0 9 or letter A Z Define a record with blank VAT Prefix to allow for a blank ID in any addresses in a country without a VAT registration number Note The Dutch format VAT prefix NL requires the letter B as a hard coded character in position 10 999999999899 FAQAD 342 User Guide Master Data Fig 12 14 Address Tax Data Window AQAD Customers Suppliers and End Users You can set up default tax data for customers suppliers and end users which is then used on transactions Figure 12 14 Note End users are defined in the Service Supp
275. intenance 2 14 1 To State Enter the code representing the state to which inventory is to be delivered You can leave this field blank This code is validated against codes entered in Generalized Codes Maintenance for delt_state if any To City Enter the city to which inventory is to be delivered You can leave this field blank Values are not validated Transit Days Enter the number of calendar days to transfer inventory from the inventory site to the delivery location defined by the specified combination of country state and city The system adds this number to the due date to calculate the promise date automatically You must enter a non zero positive integer Addresses 197 Note By leaving To Country To State and To City blank you can create a generic default transit time that calculates a promise date for any unspecified delivery location Setting Up Carrier Addresses Use Carrier Maintenance 2 17 1 to create carrier names and addresses telephone and FAX numbers contact names and the carrier s tax ID on printed shipping documents Carriers are identified by an address list type of carrier A carrier handles the transportation of goods from a shipping site Typically shipments require a single carrier However sometimes a series of carriers is needed For example a shipment can be transported by truck to be loaded onto a train transported by train to be loaded onto a ship then transported by ship to its final
276. ions it is the purchase tax that was retained for direct payment to the government Correcting Transaction Tax Amounts Depending on how you set up GIM you can selectively override system calculated tax amounts The default behavior is determined first by Update Tax Allowed in Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 then by the same field in individual tax rate records 2 13 13 1 In transactions View Edit Tax Detail always lets you review how the system calculated taxes If Update Tax Allowed is Yes you can also change the taxable base tax and recoverable tax amounts Use this feature to match amounts on manually issued documents Typically you edit tax amounts only when transaction tax amounts must exactly match an external document You can also edit taxes when entering transactions for which you have not set up standard rates However the system does not maintain an audit trail of changes so accounting regulations may prevent you from using this capability If you do edit tax amounts one of the following messages displays when you exit transactions Recalculate Tax Enter Yes to recalculate tax and taxable base amounts based on the current data you entered in the transaction Do this if you ship or receive a different quantity than originally entered Copy Edited Tax Values Enter Yes to copy previously edited tax amounts to this transaction or No to recalculate taxes based on current transaction information For example
277. ipts instead of Purchase Order Receipts and Expensed Purchases instead of QAD 382 User Guide Master Data Inventory In addition for memo items an option in Accounts Payable Control 28 24 allows variances to update Expensed Item Receipts instead of the variance accounts Fig 13 21 GL Entries for AP Usage Variance GL Entries for AP Usage Variance Average Cost Average Cost Non Recoverable Tax Non Recoverable T ax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Purchase Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts item cost 1 and tax 2 100 00 0 D 100 00 i H 10 06 10 00 Voucher Confirmation Purchase Accounts AP Usage Entries created for item Order Receipts Payable Variance cost 3 variance 4 tax 100 00 100 00 40 00 4 on item cost 5 and tax on 10 00 EE 4 9918 variance 6 4 00 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Fas Purchase Goods Receipt Inventory Order Receipts Entries created for received 10000 100 00 item cost 1 but not tax 7 7 Voucher Confirmation Hee i LANE Entries created for item em ecerpls al P a m cost 2 variance 3 tax O 40 00 on item cost 4 and tax on 10 00 variance 5 4 00 AP Usage Variance Inventory 40 00 10 00 4 4 001 6 FAQAD Processing GTM 383 Fig 13 22 GL Entries for AP GL E
278. iscount This also controls the format for prompting of a discount SO Default Pricing Date Specify a default price date for sales orders by entering Due Date Order Date Performance Date Promise Date or Required Date Price SO by Line Enter Yes to recalculate prices as lines are entered in a sales order Enter No to recalculate prices only once when the order is complete SO Factor Rounding The number of decimals to which factors are rounded in a sales order The default is 3 Display SO Discounts as Valid values are Discounts or Factors For a 1096 discount the factor is 0 90 or 1 0 10 The default is Discount This also controls the format for prompting of a discount Promotions Prefix If Trade Management TrM is installed use this field to identify price lists generated by TrM Setting Up Analysis Codes In best pricing you classify customers and products using analysis codes Analysis codes are based on characteristics such as region salesperson or item number and can be linked to form combinations or sets For example analysis codes can link regions as shown in Figure 3 3 Parent A All Western European Customers Northwestern Southwestern European European Customers Customers Pricing 53 Analysis Code N groups customers in Northwestern Europe Analysis Code S groups customers in Southwestern Europe Analysis Code A combines the two groups by linking codes N and S Code A is referred
279. isplay sales order information on the detail report Stock Status Report Use Stock Status Report 3 6 1 to review an item s total quantity on hand and quantity on order by site The report gives information for each location containing the item Location information shows each item s lot serial number reference number and quantity on hand Reorder Report Use Reorder Report 3 6 2 to see if an item is below the reorder point or safety stock The report shows all locations containing the item and indicates those below the reorder point or safety stock Also shown are any open orders for the item the quantity open and the supplier name Item ABC Status Report Update Use Item ABC Status Report Update 3 6 3 by product line or site to calculate item ABC class codes Calculations can be made by a combination of either sales or issues and cost or gross profit Three fields can be updated for existing records ABC class codes tem average usage Cycle count intervals Inventory Control 299 You can also change default ABC classification percentages Depending on the option selected the report lists items in descending sales or issue value and shows an item s old and new ABC classifications Inventory Detail Report Use Inventory Detail Report 3 6 5 to see inventory availability status in detail or summary format The summary report lists item inventory information at the site level Quantity on hand Availa
280. isplays on reports as well as in Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 FAQAD 24 User Guide Master Data b See Alternate Product Line Accounts on page 27 for details b See User Guide Financials A for details on the control program AQAD Product Lines A product line is a group of similar items or products At the corporate level a company s sales and operations are often planned reported and analyzed by product line rather than by individual item or product This higher level view of activity makes it easier to relate day to day operations to the company sales and operations plan By dealing with an aggregate it is sometimes possible to get a clearer more accurate picture For example a shipment forecast for a product line is more accurate than a forecast for a specific item Before you define product lines you should determine the most important criteria for grouping items Unfortunately different departments usually want to divide items differently For example Sales may want to group products by target market but Manufacturing wants to group products by production method Product lines group items for accounting and planning purposes e Each product line is associated with specific GL accounts for inventory sales and purchases By default transactions for items belonging to the product line update these GL accounts You can also set up alternate product line accounts when it is necessary to aggrega
281. item tax class tax usage effective date combination Set up a generic rate first then copy with Tax Rate Copy Update 2 13 13 5 and customize it as necessary Fig 12 12 Tax Rate Copy Tax Rate Copy Update Update 2 13 13 5 i E Current Tax Code 7 New Tax Code 7 00 Tax Type THAI VAT Item Tax Class Tax Usage 1 P RSL Current Effective Date 04 28 1995 New Effective Date 06 12 2002 Current Tax 0 00 New Tax 0 00 Description Intrastate Purch Resale oo Current Tax Code Enter the tax code of the tax rate to copy The tax type item tax class tax usage current effective date current tax rate percentage display for the selected rate New Tax Code Leave blank for the system to assign the next available tax code incremented from the Last Tax Code value in Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 Alternately enter a previously unassigned value New Effective Date Specify the starting date for using the new tax rate in tax calculations If you do not specify a date the system inserts the record creation date When you enter multiple tax rates the default effective date is the one in the last record entered New Tax Enter the percentage for the new tax rate Tax Rate Copy Update redisplays information from the source tax rate and allows you to customize settings FAQAD Implementing GTM 339 Setting Up GTM Control In Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 enter the following values to complete setup
282. ith a country code in User P See User Guide Maintenance That country code maps to the alternate code you enter Pe d s here If you do not have an alternate country code specified here the system displays an error message in User Maintenance ISO country codes must be defined in Generalized Codes Maintenance If you enter an alternate code that is used for another country the system displays a warning message The ISO country code helps determine the locale for the user The system uses the ISO code to set up date and number formats and other interface elements for each user s session EC Country This code identifies member countries of the European See Chapter 8 Union EU This information determines whether an inventory err i on transaction relates to an intra EU inventory movement that should be included in Intrastat reporting This field is not used for GTM NAFTA Country Reference only Identifies member countries of the North American Free Trade Agreement DEA Country Reference only Identifies countries under the jurisdiction of the United States Drug Enforcement Administration GATT Country Reference only Identifies countries as members of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade Country Group Use this field to categorize countries Use letter codes such as those assigned by current Export Administration Regulations Country Type Reference only Use this field to categorize countries Use letter codes such as t
283. just the price again set Reprice to Yes for the order or the line item Then you can update the List Price Net Price and Discount fields during order entry Although repricing a manually priced line never changes the manual entry it may adjust discounts based on current information This processing logic supports posting to the intended discount accounts as identified in price list records It also enables you to track discount programs in the general ledger Pricing History The system maintains history records for pricing changes These records detail the source of each price and discount per order line Use Sales Order Pricing Report 7 15 7 to view this information Pricing history is also maintained for manually entered prices and gives a Tip complete record of the source manual or price list of each price used for ee a sales order Using this information the system preserves manually source of the entered prices even when Reprice is Yes current prices only FAQAD 86 User Guide Master Data Fig 3 25 Pricing Fields in Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 AQAD Pricing history ensures that out of balance posting to discount accounts does not occur When posting discounts to the general ledger price list history is used not the difference between list and net since there can be many discounts each with different account numbers Understanding Sales Order Maintenance Fields Several fields in Sales Order Maintena
284. k outbound logistics charge accruals expenses and variances associated with sales order and RMA shipments Distribution Order Accrual Account Expense Account Variance Account Enter the accounts sub accounts and cost centers used to track outbound logistics charge accruals expenses and variances associated with distribution order shipments The sales order and distribution order accounts provide the defaults in Logistics Charge Code Maint 2 15 1 Defining Logistics Charge Codes Use Logistics Charge Code Maintenance 2 15 1 to define codes for each logistics charge incurred and payable to a third party supplier when purchasing or shipping items You can also define the accrual expense and variance accounts used to track each logistics charge These accounts default from Logistics Accounting Control but you can change them A logistics charge code can be used for inbound charges outbound charges or both There is nothing to indicate whether a logistics charge code is used for outbound or inbound purposes When an inbound and outbound charge is managed differently define two separate codes FAQAD 228 User Guide Master Data P See Creating Logistics Cost Elements on page 236 for details on cost elements Fig 7 7 Logistics Charge Code Maint 2 15 1 FAQAD Inbound Logistics Charges Inbound logistics charges can include freight duty insurance and so on You can indicate whether an inbound logisti
285. key suppliers who are to be notified at the beginning and end of an approval cycle Enter full e mail addresses maximum 240 characters Leave blank to notify only internal personnel Enter approval routing details in the Detail Maintenance frame Routing Slip Maintenance Routing Slip newprodi Detail Maintenance Group doci Documentation Group Sequenceil Severity Level i P Can Re Route wA Notify When Next Sequence Enter a number from 0 to 999 specifying the group s sign off position relative to other groups in the routing If zero groups can review the document in any order Table 4 1 illustrates three types of approval sequences Hierarchical Semi Hierarchical Non Hierarchical Engineering 0 Engineering 0 Engineering 0 Production 10 Production 0 Production 0 QA 20 QA 0 QA 0 Finance 30 Finance 10 Finance 0 When a non hierarchical order is used groups can review the document in any order Skip some sequence numbers to facilitate addition of groups in the future When a hierarchical or semi hierarchical order is used you can use the Notify When Next field in combination with the Next Only field in PCR PCO Approval to display only those PCOs approved by all subordinate groups Set Enforce PCO Approval Group Sequencing to Yes in PCC Control to ensure that users follow the correct sequence during approval Product Change Control 117 Severity Level Enter a number indicating what severity of defec
286. l lot number settings manually enter a lot number to use at order receipt Lot Control Level Lot Control Level This database level setting is the most straightforward to employ If you want to use single lot per receipt settings Lot Control Level must be 1 or 2 If you do not want to use either of these features you can still use Lot Control Level to control lot number uniqueness for each item level 1 or across all items in inventory level 2 Single Lot per Receipt and Lot Number Field If you select level 1 or level 2 lot control then you can use single lot settings You can have a different default setting for work orders purchase orders and repetitive transactions Further the single lot setting Compliance 163 Fig 5 11 Lot Control Hierarchy FAQAD 164 User Guide Master Data Table 5 7 Lot Control Settings FAQAD can be changed for each order at the time of receipt A receipt lot number can be specified in the Work Order Attributes frame when the single lot setting is No and auto lot numbering is not used Auto Lot Numbering Automatic lot numbering works with any lot level setting Since automatic lot numbering is set for each item you can choose to have some items auto numbered and some not Deciding on Lot Control Level Table 5 7 shows five different ways of combining lot control features Lot Auto Control Single Lot Lot Example Level Lot No No Effect 1 0 Y When Lo
287. l that enables you to control and monitor product changes from inception through implementation With PCC you can modify item engineering data product structures routings formulas processes and item specifications without affecting the records that control production activity You can define an approval cycle for product changes After approval changes can be incorporated into the database tables that manage product definition PCC is built around two types of documents Product change requests PCRs record requests for product changes PCRs only affect your product definitions when incorporated into a product change order PCO Typically they are not strictly controlled More than one PCR can exist per item Product change orders PCOs manage the introduction of changes into your product definitions PCOs are usually strictly controlled through an approval process Only one PCO can exist for an item at any one time PCRs and PCOs can be used to control changes to most item related data in a manufacturing environment including the following Basic item master data maintained in Item Data Maintenance 1 4 3 Tip Additions changes and removals of product structure and formula ae records including alternate BOMs maintained in Product Structure order ECO Maintenance 13 5 and Formula Maintenance 15 5 rograms available M ee menu 13 13 Additions changes and removals of product routings and processes maintain
288. lays Warning No tax environment found using default The system then uses the error environment from Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 If this happens investigate and correct the problem Processing GTM 355 Table 13 1 describes the tax environment selection criteria for different transaction amounts Table 13 1 Item Ship To Tax Zone Ship From Tax Zone Tax Class Tax Environment Selection Criteria Inventory items Transaction ship to tax Line item ship from Transaction tax zone tax zone class if any Memo items Transaction ship to tax Transaction ship from Transaction tax zone tax zone class if any Trailer charges Transaction ship to tax Transaction ship from Transaction tax zone tax zone class if any Next GTM searches for the tax rate for each tax type in the tax environment For each tax type GTM searches for an optimal tax rate based on a combination of transaction and line item conditions Tax class Tax usage Transaction tax date Figure 13 2 summarizes the search priority for selecting a tax rate for a tax type GIM selects a rate only if there is a complete match between the conditions of the transaction and the tax rate Any nonmatching criteria must be blank For example if a tax rate has a matching item tax class and tax date but a different tax usage it is not selected Fig 13 2 Selection of Tax Rate Rate for Item Tax Class Tax Usage and Tax Date y No
289. le tax Retained tax A liability credited for sales tax payable It is updated by Invoice Post 7 13 4 and AR DR CR Memo Maintenance 27 1 A liability credited whenever your company absorbs tax instead of charging it to the customer This occurs for example when your company gives an item to a customer but you still pay tax on it even though the sales price is zero It is updated by Invoice Post 7 13 4 and DR CR Memo Maintenance 27 1 An asset debited for recoverable amounts or a liability when treated as a contra account to sales tax payable It is updated by Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 PO Shipper Receipt 5 13 20 and confirmed AP vouchers 28 1 28 6 28 7 A liability credited when you withhold tax on purchases and remit it directly to the government instead of to the supplier It is updated by Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 PO Shipper Receipt 5 13 20 and the AP voucher confirmation programs 28 6 28 7 Table 12 6 Tax Amounts Posted to GL FAQAD 332 User Guide Master Data b See User Guide Financials A See Implementing Special Taxes on page 343 FAQAD The relevant general ledger maintenance functions are as follows Account Code Maintenance 25 3 13 Sub Account Code Maintenance 25 3 17 Cost Center Code Maintenance 25 3 20 To verify data setup use browse and report programs in the General Ledger Setup Menu 25 3 After you update your chart of accounts specify the de
290. lear Target List Defaults to No Determines if the target price list should be cleared before copying the new prices If No adds the prices to the existing target price list If Yes clears the target price list first and then copies the new prices Update Item Price Indicate if the item base price should be adjusted during this process If Yes the base price for the item is set to the target price Two other conditions must be true the source price list must have a P or L amount type and the target price list currency must be the base currency Each item number on the price list is updated with the first price on the price list If No item base prices are not affected Create Supplier Item Defaults to No and indicates that if the supplier item price does not exist it should be created If this is Yes a new price is created if one does not exist If this is No a list is not created If Create Supplier Item is Yes and the price exists the value of Clear Supplier Price determines if the price is cleared before the copy or if an end effective date is added to the old price Create Target List Defaults to Yes and indicates that if the target price list does not exist it should be created If this is Yes a new list Is created if one does not exist If this is No a list is not created If Create Target List is Yes and the list exists the value of Clear Target List determines if the list is cleared before the copy or if an end eff
291. llows 1 Printa cycle count worksheet 2 Count the items listed on the worksheet 3 Enter the initial count quantity in the system 4 Review the results and enter recount quantities if necessary Printing Cycle Count Worksheet Use Cycle Count Worksheet Print 3 13 to print a worksheet listing items selected for cycle counting their locations ABC code last count date if applicable and the quantity on hand Use the worksheet to record the count quantities The system selects items by comparing the current date with the item s last count date If the elapsed time is greater than the period specified in the Cycle Count Interval field in Item Master Maintenance the system selects the item for cycle counting If this is the first time you are cycle counting an item the system selects it by item number Entering Initial Count Enter the count quantity in Cycle Count Results Entry 3 14 When entering the initial count quantity set Cycle Count Type to I Initial Inventory Control 297 If an item s count quantity does not match the system s the system checks Tip to see if the count is within both the percent tolerance and the amount bere an tolerance If it is the system updates its quantity accordingly If the count Inventory Control is not within tolerance the item must be recounted by ABC class Fig 9 3 Cycle Count Results Entry Cycle Count Type I R Initial 3 14 Item Number 10 10000 Tolerance Method
292. lobal Tax Management Control 2 13 24 is used QAD 234 User Guide Master Data Table 7 7 Inbound Logistics Tax Types Table 7 8 Outbound Logistics Tax Types FAQAD When determining the tax rate the system uses The tax class of the logistics charge The tax usage of the logistics charge supplier if available otherwise the tax usage of the purchase order line site Table 7 7 lists the inbound logistics tax types and the related standard tax transaction type Function Standard Tax Type Logistics Tax Type Purchase Order Maintenance 20 48 Blanket Order Maintenance Blanket Order Release to PO Build PO from Requisitions PO Fiscal Receiving 23 26 Purchase Order Receipts 21 27 PO Shipper Receipt Outbound Tax Calculations The calculation of taxes on outbound logistics charges is similar to the tax calculation that occurs for the associated order Unique logistics charge tax transaction types are used These tax transaction types can be used to distinguish the tax on the freight accrual from the standard transaction tax Table 7 8 lists the outbound logistics tax types and the related standard tax transaction type Distribution orders do not have a standard tax type since unless you are using Logistics Accounting taxes are not calculated Standard Tax Function Type Logistics Tax Type Sales Quote Maintenance 10 40 Sales Order Maintenance 11 41 Sales Order Maint
293. logistics supplier invoice for payment Voucher Maintenance When Logistics Accounting is enabled Figure 7 26 shows the two additional processing paths added to Voucher Maintenance for vouchering logistics charges Logistics Accounting 255 Fig 7 26 Voucher Voucher Maintenance Header Transaction Flow PO Number not entered PO Number entered Voucher Logistics Charges Yes Auto Select Yes Auto Select No PO No not entered Auto Select No Auto Select Yes Voucher Logistics Charges No Logistics perat Coe Auto Select y v m Logistics Receiver Receiver Logistics Selection Matching Becca Charge oe Maintenance Detail Matching Detail Maintenance 5 Logistics mm i Open Receiver Voucher Charge Logistics Detail Receivers Meneng Trailer Matchin Marching Maintenance B g Maintenance Maintenance standard functionality dy Logistics Accounting enabled Voucher Header Frame To process vouchers for logistics charges do not reference purchase orders in the header frame You must enter a supplier code for the logistics supplier and set Voucher Logistics Charges to Yes Fig 7 27 Voucher Voucher Maintenance Maintenance 28 1 Batch 1012 Control 50 000 Total 0 000 Voucher Leave Order ad blank j Control 45 00 Effective 07 30 2002 ERS Total 0 00 Tax Date 07 30 2002 Enter logistics Supplier 00100 Swift Transport 2100 Hueneme Road
294. lp QAD provides an extensive online help system Help is available for most fields found on a screen Procedure help is available for most programs that update the database Most inquiries reports and browses do not have procedure help About This Guide 3 For information on using the help system in the different environments refer to User Guide Introduction User Guide QAD Desktop and User Guide QAD NET User Interface QAD Web Site QAD s Web site provides a wide variety of information about the company and its products You can access the Web site at http www qad com For users with a QAD Web account product documentation is available for viewing or downloading from the QAD Online Support Center at http support qad com You can register fora QAD Web account at the QAD Online Support Center Your customer ID number is required Access to certain areas is dependent on the type of agreement you have with QAD Most user documentation is available in two formats Portable document format PDF PDF files can be downloaded from the QAD Web site to your computer You can view them with the free Adobe Acrobat Reader HTML You can view user documentation through your Web browser The documents include search tools for easily locating topics of interest FAQAD 4 FAQAD User Guide Master Data Conventions Several interfaces are available the NET User Interface Desktop Web browser Windows and charac
295. m Maintenance 1 22 16 10 Country USA Authority US COM Control Number 44 Description Packing Materials Unit of Measure LB Comments 1 Itern Number 88 4000 Preference Criteria A Address Code Address Code Address Code Originating Country Originating PercentD 00 Enter the country code and authority or leave Country blank if this record applies to all countries Then specify the control number associated with one or more items Every product that is exported from the United States requires an Export Control Classification Number ECCN These are defined in the U S Commerce Control List Other fields apply to common control requirements or can be used as needed Status Enter a user defined status If your company requires Harmonized Codes for NAFTA use this field to enter a Producer Status Class Enter a user defined class If your company requires National Drug Code NDC numbers use this field to enter drug classes such as class 1 2 or 3 If your company is NAFTA compliant use this field to enter a Regional Value Content RVC value Preference Criteria Enter a user defined preference criteria If your company is NAFTA compliant use this field to enter appropriate codes Address Code Enter up to three addresses associated with the item such as the primary ship from site or primary exporter AQAD Compliance 177 Originating Country Enter the code for the country where
296. master price Pricing 89 Type P Fixed discount prices used primarily for net pricing and foreign currency pricing Type L Multiple list price tables Discount price lists can also be used for quantity break pricing During transaction entry the system looks for one price list when calculating net item price on scheduled orders or RMA returns and when calculating cost on purchase orders If an applicable price is not found either the item master list price is used or GL cost minus overhead Note RMA returns are an exception if no price is found on the list the return price defaults to zero Use Price List Maintenance 1 10 2 1 to maintain list and discount price tables During implementation use Price List Generation by Item 1 10 2 6 to create price tables from existing list prices in the item master Once price lists are created you can quickly create lists in other currencies using Price List Copy 1 10 2 5 Creating Price Lists Each item has a base price expressed in base currency Price lists are used to store other pricing structures such as prices in other currencies prices or discounts for a certain unit of measure for example a case or full truckload discounts at different quantity levels or prices calculated as a percentage markup over GL cost The system looks for a matching price list in the following order 1 Currency price list item number unit of measure 2 Currency price list item number
297. me There is no automatic purge of this information at period or year end To delete pending vouchers for logistics charges that have not been or are not expected to be vouchered use Uninvoiced Logistics Charge Delete Archive 28 21 First run the program without actually deleting any records by setting Delete to No Review the resulting report before setting Delete to Yes then run the program again to delete the pending vouchers that match the Logistics Accounting 261 selection criteria When Archive is Yes the system copies the selected records to an ASCH file that can be reloaded using Archive File Reload 36 16 5 Generating Logistics Reports Table 7 11 lists logistics accounting reports and inquiries with a brief description of their purpose Report Table 7 11 Description Logistics Logistics Charge Code Inquiry 2 15 2 Terms of Trade Inquiry 2 15 5 Inbound Account Inquiry 2 15 14 Outbound Accrual Account Inquiry 2 15 17 Outbound Expense Account Inquiry 2 15 20 Logistics Charge Variance Report 28 17 13 Open Logistics Charge Report 28 17 14 SETS e Accounting Reports Displays details for individual logistics charge codes Displays the logistics charge codes and responsibilities associated with a terms of trade code Displays account sub account and cost center information maintained in Inbound Account Maint Displays account sub account and cost center information m
298. me lot number Each receipt transaction requires a new lot number Set Single Lot to No to allow the same lot number to be used for multiple receipts The single lot restriction works the same way for all three order types so you can adapt the settings to your needs Note When Auto Lot Numbers is Yes and a lot group is specified in the item master the system automatically increments the numeric portion of the lot number for each successive receipt against the same order or line This means that you cannot receive the same lot in multiple receipt transactions or receive multiple lots in the same transaction regardless of whether Single Lot is Yes During order entry you can modify the default value of Single Lot in any of the following programs Purchase Order Maintenance 5 7 Blanket Order Maintenance 5 3 1 Work Order Maintenance 16 1 Work Order Attribute Maintenance 1 22 4 Repetitive Labor Transaction 18 14 Backflush Transaction 18 22 13 Move Transaction 18 22 19 Supplier Lot Numbers The Supplier Lot field is a reference field for entering supplier lot numbers in Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 Purchase Order Receipts Order 326 Supplier 002 Status Pack Slip Ln Item Number UM Qty Open 486 66 EA 1 0 EA 0 0 EA UM Receipt Qty UM Project Due 04 28 1995 Line 1 1 P wocf JP Quantity 0 0 5 toyse P Cancel B 0 0 Supplier Lot SUP 100598 Supplier Lot Item Number 48
299. ment but this field is considered cost data normally maintained by accounting To support this potential division of responsibilities there are two ways to load item master data From Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 you can enter all item data This is the only program that can be used to create new item numbers This method is the most convenient From separate programs you can create the item record 1 4 3 then enter planning data 1 4 7 inventory data 1 4 5 and cost data 1 4 9 This method offers the most security because access to the individual programs can be restricted with menu security If your company manages the same items at multiple sites you can control plan and cost items separately for each site Data can be differentiated by site using the item site data programs 1 4 16 1 4 17 1 4 18 Programs that process an item at a particular site first looks for item data specific for the site If none is found the system uses the item master record Internally the system requires one and only one item master record for each item Item site data is optional General Item Data Every item has some relatively static information that describes its general characteristics regardless of how it is used This includes the item s description product line unit of measure drawing revision status and so on Items Sites 15 Any general data you set up for an item must be valid for all sites in the system s
300. ment for Cities Subject to FL FL APOPK FL STATE 1 2 Florida Tax FL FL LUNDE DRUG FL 2 2 Orange County Tax and Orlando ORACO City Tax 3 FL FL OCOEE FOOD FL ORLAN 3 2 FL FL OVIED FL FL WINPK FAQAD 326 User Guide Master Data Set up tax environments in Tax Environment Maintenance 2 13 5 1 To verify data setup use Tax Environment Browse 2 13 5 2 and Report 2 13 5 3 Fig 12 7 Tax Environment Tax Environment Maintenance Maintenance 2 13 5 1 Tax Tax Environment CAN PEI CAN ONT Zones Tax Class Combinations Tax Zone Tax Class Combinations Ship From Zone Ship To Zone TRC Description All Tax Classes Tax Environment Enter a 16 character code that identifies a set of tax types for a tax zone tax class combination On transactions this code identifies the transaction or line item tax environment Description Enter a description of the tax environment Unique descriptions make selecting zones easier but the system does not prevent you from entering the same description for multiple tax environments The description prints on most reports and browses as space permits Ship From Zone You can specify the tax zone from which goods are shipped However if all shipments to the environment s ship to zone are taxable regardless of origin leave the ship from zone blank Ship To Zone You can specify the tax zone to which goods are shipped However if all shipments from the environment s ship from zone ar
301. mers or items to existing analysis codes Otherwise enter No If No Analysis Code Detail Build must be run after new customers and items are added Automatic AC Regen for Edits of Customers Items Enter Yes to have the system automatically add modified customers or items to existing analysis codes Otherwise enter No If No Analysis Code Detail Build must be run after existing customers and items are modified QO Default Price Date Price date indicates which price lists are Tip On a sales quote effective for a quote Specify a default price date by entering Due Gide Dare isthe Date Order Date Promise Date or Required Date field labeled Quote Date Price QO by Line Enter Yes to recalculate prices as lines are entered in a quote This updates prices immediately if a combination of items or quantities qualifies for a better price Enter No to recalculate prices only once when the quote is complete QO Factor Rounding The number of decimals to which factors are rounded in a sales quote The default is 3 This field only has effect when discounts are displayed as factors FAQAD 52 User Guide Master Data b See User Guide Trade Management for details Tip These codes are not the same as those created in GL Report Writer Fig 3 3 Parent and Child Analysis Codes FAQAD Display QO Discounts as Valid values are Discounts or Factors For a 10 discount the factor is 0 90 or 1 0 10 The default is D
302. ms were not found or were counted using bulk tags These cannot be voided Set this field to Yes for leftover tags Use Tag Void Status Update 3 16 7 to declare unused bulk tags void Only voided bulk tags can be deleted Updating Inventory Balances When all tags are accounted for and count results are satisfactory use Inventory Balance Update 3 16 21 to update quantity on hand balances The system changes each item s quantity on hand to the difference between the frozen quantity on hand and the count quantity Example The frozen quantity of Item Z is 100 The count quantity 50 issued 47 counted is 97 The update quantity is 23 The updated quantity on hand for Item Z is 97 FAQAD 308 User Guide Master Data FAQAD 310 User Guide Master Data FAQAD 312 User Guide Master Data AQAD Global Tax Management Global Tax Management GTM supports multinational enterprises in calculating taxes on business transactions The types of taxes the formulas used to calculate them and when taxes are assessed often vary considerably between countries GIM can process taxes for multiple countries within the same database Features GIM offers an unlimited number of taxes and rates each associated with customers suppliers or items You can also define when taxes are calculated the formula used to calculate them and the amount subject to tax GTM also supports the following situations and conditions
303. n base currency Invoice value in transaction currency Voucher number Invoice value in base currency Intrastat 277 Voucher date Note When a voucher is modified or deleted after it has been reported you must correct the Intrastat history manually using Intrastat Maintenance 2 22 13 If a voucher is deleted before it has been reported the system updates the receiver s Intrastat history record appropriately When the total vouchered quantity for a receipt exceeds the receipt quantity the system does not collect any more Intrastat data This is true even when the receipt history has not been reported When this situation occurs you should modify the quantity on one of the associated vouchers or correct the Intrastat history manually using Intrastat Maintenance Invoice Updates Intrastat history records associated with shipment lines are updated at invoice post when the shipment Intrastat record has not been reported Posting the invoice has these effects Changes the Intrastat history record type from 1 indicating a shipment to 9 indicating an invoice This effectively deletes the shipment record Note For standard sales orders only one type of Intrastat record exists at a time Updates the invoice number and invoice date fields in the history record In addition if SO Reference Date Logic is set to 2 in Intrastat Control the reference date is updated with the invoice date If you are using the Customer C
304. n intra EU trade Enter country codes for customers and suppliers Specify net weight and net weight UM for each item involved in intra EU trade Figure 8 3 outlines typical steps for setting up Intrastat codes d Enter valid codes for modes of transportation Enter valid codes for ports Enter valid codes for statistical procedures Enter valid codes for regions Intrastat 267 Depending on the requirements of the country where you use Intrastat some codes are required and others are optional For each maintenance program there is a corresponding browse Use Flow Indicator Maintenance 2 22 1 1 to define at least two flow indicators one for Arrivals transactions and one for Dispatches transactions Use Terms of Delivery Maintenance 2 22 1 4 to enter valid codes if your country requires this information Use Nature of Transaction Maintenance 2 22 1 7 to enter valid codes if your country requires this information Use Country Code Maintenance 2 14 1 to define countries where P See Setting Up Country Codes your company does business on page 194 Use Mode of Transport Maintenance 2 22 1 13 to enter valid codes if your country requires this information Use Port Maintenance 2 22 1 16 to enter valid codes if your country requires this information The system uses the information to validate the Port of Arrival Dispatch and Port of Transshipment fields
305. n the PCO is incorporated ecmt12 p PCR PCO Detail Maintenance Routing Number PCO00007 ID Database Routing Code 10 10000 OASIS TM COOLING SYST Operation 10 Batch Quantity 1 0 Deactivate Standard Operation Work Center 10000 ASSEMBLY QASIS TM UNT Machine Description ASSEMBLE PER SPEC Machines per Operation 1 Milestone Operation Overlap Units 1 Subcontract LT 0 Queue Time 0 0 Setup Crew 0 00 Wait Time 0 0 Run Crew 1 00 Setup Time 0 0 Tool Code Run Time Batch Qty 1 0 Supplier Run Time 1 0 Inventory Value 0 00 Move Time 0 0 Subcontract Cost 0 00 Yield Percent 100 00 Comments PCH PRO Detail Maintenance Routing Rate Based Works just like Add Edit Deactivate Routing except for differences in maintained data fields The differences are the same as those between standard Routing Maintenance 14 13 1 and Routing Maintenance Rate Based 14 13 2 Maintaining Formula Records Important To use these functions Formulas must be Yes in Enable PCC Formula Maintenance 15 22 Select Formula Data Maintenance to do the following Copy formulas into a PCO Product Change Control 129 Copy where used data into a PCO Maintain PCR PCO formula details Replace formula components These functions work just like the Product Structure Maintenance functions except for differences in maintained data fields The differences are the same as those between Product Structure Maintenance
306. n the party responsible for paying the logistics charge Customer The site receiving PO line items is responsible for the logistics charge payment This charge is accrued during purchase receipts when Logistics Accounting is active Supplier The item supplier is responsible for paying this logistics charge No accrual takes place Assigning Terms of Trade to Suppliers Assign default terms of trade to applicable item suppliers in Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 The default terms of trade are used when the supplier is entered on the order header of a purchase order blanket order or supplier scheduled order Logistics Accounting 239 Note When a PO is created automatically from requisitions in Build PO from Requisitions 5 2 18 or from an EMT order during sales order processing in Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 the default terms of trade assigned to the item supplier are used When default terms of trade are not found logistics charges do not accrue for these orders Supplier Maintenance Supplier Address Supplier 002 Name Toronto Computer Services Temporary Address 75 Queens Road Address Address City Toronto State ONT Post Format 0 Country Canada CAN County Attention Telephone f 2 Ext Fax Telex Added 04 28 1995 Logistics Accounting Data Terms of Trade Terms of Trade Enter the default terms of trade for this supplier Processing Purchase Orders When you create an order in Purchase O
307. n the system If you enter a supplier type you must enter a details about specific site security Supplier Type Optionally enter a code classifying item suppliers by type During PO receipts and returns the system searches for GL accounts using the supplier type of the item supplier not the logistics supplier This field is validated against codes set up in Generalized Codes Maintenance for field vd type Fig 7 10 Outbound Accrual Outbound Accrual Account Maint Account Maint Logistics Charge Code DomFrt Domestic Freight 2 15 16 Product Line 2000 ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS Site 12000 Electronics Division Supplier Type Sales Order Accrual Account 2320 P Distribution Order Accrual Accounti2321 P FAQAD 232 User Guide Master Data Fig 7 11 Outbound Expense Account Maint 2 15 19 FAQAD Supplier Type Optionally enter a code classifying suppliers by type During shipment processing the system searches for GL accounts using the supplier type of the logistics supplier If you enter a supplier type you must enter a specific site This field is validated against codes set up in Generalized Codes Maintenance for field vd_type Outbound Expense Account Maint Logistics Charge Code DomFrt Domestic Freight Product Line 2000 ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS Site 12000 Electronics Division Customer Type Ret Retail Stores Channel Sales Order Expense Account Sales Order Variance Accoun Distribution Ord
308. nance 2 1 1 and Customer Ship to Maintenance Addresses 187 During order entry the bill to address defaults to the sold to unless a different bill to address is assigned The ship to address also defaults to the sold to Alternate ship to addresses can be set up in advance or entered as needed for one time drop shipments There can be more than one ship to address for a single sold to or bill to customer Add temporary ship to addresses during quote or order entry These are deleted automatically by Closed AR Delete Archive 27 23 when no open records remain for the ship to address Make temporary ship to addresses permanent in Customer Ship to Maintenance 2 1 13 by setting Temporary to No Creating Customer Addresses Figure 6 4 illustrates Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 Fig 6 4 Customer Maintenance Customer Address 2 1 1 Customer Maintenance Customer 10010001 Name Westwood Reliable Address Westwood Shopping Center city westwood JP stateGR IP Post 66023 Country United States of America usa P Attention 2 Roses Sone po EE QM aeaa ow Fax Telex Customer Data Sort Name Westwood Reliable Type Salespsni JJP Multiple Region US Ship Via GROUND Currency USD AR Acct 1200 Dual Pricing Cur Resale 89 02 03 X88P Site 10000 Remarks STORE HOURS BETWEEN 10 30 AND 5 PM Lang US City State Province County Used for tax calculations A country code must be specified and is validated Forma
309. nce 7 1 1 relate to best pricing Line Pricing Order Date 06 12 2002 f Line Pricing Confirmed Required Date 06 12 2002 fl Manua P CurrencyjjUSD Language US P Manual promise Bates 6 2 2002 B seio P Teen CP C A Due Date 06 13 2002 l Chamel P ixed Price Perform Date E Projet 1P Credit Terms 2 10 30 P Fixed Price enoe n Credit Terms 00 Purchase Order COD Reprice 0O Remake 0000000000000 Entered s pnm Reprice Ww S Line Pricing Affects only newly created orders On existing orders it defaults to No and cannot be changed For new orders it defaults from Price SO by Line in Pricing Control 1 10 1 24 Enter Yes to have the system recalculate price breaks for the order as lines are entered Enter No to recalculate only once when order entry is complete Manual Enables you to manually enter a price list code to be considered for order lines This price list must be set up with Manual set to Yes in Price List Maintenance 1 10 1 1 Manual price lists do not necessarily determine the order line price but are used in conjunction with other price list search algorithms to determine the best price Fixed Price Sets the default for each line added to the order Only lines with Fixed Price set to No are updated by Sales Order Repricing 7 1 11 Defaults from the Fixed Price setting defined for the Sold To address This use of fixed price should not be confused with fixed
310. nd an optional cost center code Use the functions on the General Ledger Setup Menu 25 3 to set up GL accounts before defining default logistics accounts in the Logistics Accounting module Logistics Accounting 223 Table 7 6 lists the accounts used by Logistics Accounting The Type column indicates how the account is used The Use column indicates the transaction that uses the account Table 7 6 Account Type Use Logistics Charge Accrual Liability PO Receipt Voucher e E Expense Expense PO Return amp Variance Expense Voucher Sales Order Accrual Liability Shipment Voucher Sales Order Expense Expense Shipment 5 Sales Order Variance Expense Voucher t Distribution Order Accrual Liability Shipment Voucher Distribution Order Expense Expense Shipment Distribution Order Variance Expense Voucher Note When Logistics Accounting is used the Sales Freight Applied and Sales Freight Accrued accounts defined in Domain Account Control 36 1 are not used for logistics charge accrual transactions unless you specify the same accounts in Outbound Accrual Account Maint and Outbound Expense Account Maint The following illustrations show the functions that create GL transactions for logistics charges and the accounts used In both examples an invoice in the amount of 110 is received from the logistics supplier and applied to the accrued amount Figure 7 3 summarizes the GL transactions created and accounts used to P See page
311. nd new address codes are already associated with a shipping group or shipment the old address code is deleted rather than changed This prevents duplication in the group lets you defin nsportation of Logistics Charges 235 gistics Charges 245 chers 253 ics Charges 254 Reports 261 214 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Introduction Logistics costs are the costs incurred when a product is moved from one location to another These costs can include not only the freight charges paid to carriers but also insurance duty customs clearance handling charges and so on Depending on the freight terms these costs can be paid by the supplier and recharged to the customer within the item price or as a trailer charge They can also be paid by the customer directly to the carrier insurer customs and so on As manufacturing companies increasingly look for cheaper materials and components from remote sources logistics costs have become a more significant aspect of cost management Accurate product and customer profitability information that includes the total cost of purchasing or selling items supports better pricing and financial analysis decisions Logistics Charges The individual costs payable to third party suppliers for the transportation of goods are referred to as logistics charges Logistics Accounting lets you define logistics charges for any inbound and outbound transportation costs payable to third party
312. necessary Before logistics charges can be accrued during the shipment process a logistics charge code logistics supplier and shipment identifier must be defined Processing shipments Creates pending vouchers for logistics charges Creates GL transactions for the logistics charge accrual amounts Calculates tax on logistics charges FAQAD 250 User Guide Master Data b See Updating Freight Terms on page 245 P See Setting Up Freight Charges on page 206 Tip You can ship and receive from RMA Maintenance Fig 7 23 Sales Order Shipments Logistics Accounting Detail FAQAD The system uses the freight terms assigned to an order to determine whether an accrual is created for each order line or the entire shipment The system calculates freight charges based on the order customer or ship to site information and freight information entered in the programs on the Freight Charges menu Note Only one pending voucher is created for each shipment or shipper When logistics charges are accrued by order line detail lines are added to the pending voucher and the accrual value is updated Discrete Shipments Processing a discrete shipment in any of the following programs creates a pending voucher when the freight terms assigned to the order or line indicate an accrual level of shipment and a freight list is specified on at least one order line e Sales Order Shipments 7 9 15 Pending Invoice Mainten
313. ng In der Schwemme 8 Frankfurt Germany Port of Arr Disp Statistical Procedure Port of Transshipment Include Memo Items O are prompted to view or edit import export data Choose Yes to display the following window Scroll through the order lines by positioning the cursor in the Order Line field and using the Up and Down arrow keys In most cases Intrastat codes entered in the order header apply to all order lines Where there are exceptions to this Intrastat information Order 5010064 Sold To 0100 R Order Line 1 Item Number 10 10000 Intrastat Item Commodity Code 45 Terms of Delivery CFR Nature of Transaction 02 Country of Dest Disp GER Mode of Transport 8 Bill To 0100 R Ship To 0100 R OASIS TM COOLING SYST HOME INDUST MODEL Country of Origin USA Statistical Procedure 00000001 Port of Arrival Dispatch 003 Region of Origin Dest CA Port of Transshipment 001 ov can be entered and maintained at the line level Intrastat 275 Fig 8 10 Sales Order Maintenance Intrastat Frame 7 1 1 Fig 8 11 Viewing Intrastat Data in Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 FAQAD 276 User Guide Master Data Fig 8 12 Order Intrastat Data Maintenance 2 22 11 b See PO Reference Date Logic on page 269 FAQAD Entering Data in Order Intrastat Data Maintenance Use Order Intrastat Data Maintenance 2 22 11 to enter all Intrastat data in one fram
314. ng 385 reports 385 retained 350 reverse calculated 351 rounding methods 323 tax on tax 349 troubleshooting 386 viewing amounts 359 tax on tax 329 temporary locations 35 terms credit 200 delivery 267 freight 210 trade 237 Terms of Delivery Maintenance 267 Terms of Trade Maintenance 237 Trailer Code Maintenance 205 328 trailer codes defaults 205 tax status 328 taxable 205 Trailer Tax Detail Browse 328 Trailer Tax Report 328 Transaction by Item Inquiry 293 Transaction Detail Inquiry 293 batch numbers 159 Transaction History Menu 293 transaction types expired inventory 171 inventory 291 Transactions Accounting Report 293 294 FAQAD 402 User Guide Master Data Transactions by Item Report 293 Transactions by Order Report 293 Transactions Delete Archive 294 Transfer With Lot Serial Change 289 Transfer Multi Item 289 transfers inventory 289 Transfer Single Item 289 triangulation Intrastat 273 troubleshooting common GIM problems 386 type inventory transactions 291 location 36 PCR PCO 118 tax 320 U Unallocated Inventory Inquiry 302 Uncounted Tag Report Update 306 307 unit of measure 16 acceptable values 16 alternates 16 usages tax 321 Use Intrastat field 268 User Maintenance PCC groups 107 users adding to PCC groups 111 V Value Added Tax VAT registration formats 343 registration numbers printing 340 FAQAD variable overhead 22 VAT Registration Number Report 385 VAT See Value Added Tax V
315. nits Remarks Close O S A pop up window displays the current attribute settings Fig 5 6 Receipt Attributes Receipt Attributes Assay 0 00 Active Set Active to Pop Up GradeiB Active Yes to use Expire Date 06 12 2002 fl Active the attribute Inventory staus P Active v Use As Default alues wu SQ Change attributes as needed and choose Yes in the associated Active field to use your selections Choose Yes in the Use As Default field to assign the entered attributes as defaults for the current order All future receipts to the same order will have the specified attributes Choose No in all of the Active fields and choose Yes in the Use As Default field to clear the default values All attribute values are set to blank for this order If inventory exists for a location lot and reference combination with attributes that are different from the ones on this order an error message displays Choose No in the Active fields of the conflicting attributes to correct the error Active Fields and Blank Inventory Status Active fields enable you to enter a blank for a valid inventory status For example if the PO Rcpt Status field is blank the system cannot determine whether you want to assign a blank status code or if you want to accept a default setting previously assigned to an item location or site The Active field solves this problem If the Status field is blank and Active is FAQAD 156 User Guide
316. not been met You can then decide if this appropriate for your needs Max Qty In conjunction with Qty Type specified either the maximum order item quantity or maximum order currency amount allowed for price list default is 0 zero Break Cat In conjunction with specified Min Net Ord value an additional category by which item quantities or currency amounts can accumulate for required price list minimum Enter blank if you aren t using break categories Otherwise enter the item master break category code associated with the item being priced or the break category code assigned to another item The default is blank Config Disc Either Yes or No Applicable to configured products If Yes the price list applies to everything in a configured product when pricing a configured item otherwise ignored If No it only applies to the specific item Manual Enter Yes if this price list should only be considered during line item pricing when it is specified in the Manual price list field Enter No if this price list should be considered anytime it applies to the customer or item Pricing 71 QAD 72 User Guide Master Data Tip The system applies lower numbers first Fig 3 16 Price List Maintenance 1 10 1 1 Min Qty and Credit Terms Fields FAQAD Max Orders Defines the maximum number of orders that can be priced using this list for a given customer This field is for reference only It is normally used with man
317. nse WO Issue WO Close 5 Mix Variances Expense Joint Order Set Close E Cost of Production Expense Nonproductive Labor Subcontract x PO Receipts Subcontract Usage Variance Expense WO Close Subcontract Rate Variance Expense WO Close Work in Process Asset Work Orders Backflush Rep Method Variance Expense Work Orders Repetitive SFC Account Type Use Service Labor Expense Call Project Activity Recording Service Overhead Expense Call Activity Recording Service Expense Expense Call Project Activity Recording E Expense Due Liability Invoice Post N Service Returns Expense Call Activity Recording Deferred Revenue Liability Contract Maintenance Accrued Revenue Asset Contract Maintenance Alternate Product Line Accounts In some applications you may need to set up alternate accounts for the same product line For example you can specify only one inventory account in Product Line Maintenance 1 2 1 If different locations within a site are used for raw materials WIP and finished goods you probably do not want to post inventory transactions for these locations to the same inventory account You can set up alternate accounts in the following programs Assign purchasing accounts to sites or sites and supplier types in Purchasing Account Maintenance 1 2 5 Assign work order accounts to sites in Work Order Account Maintenance 1 2 9 Assign inventory accounts to sites or sites and locations in
318. nspect would come before Stores Permanent Temporary Locations Locations can be defined as permanent or temporary When you define a location as permanent the system maintains all location detail records for that site location until they are deleted using Zero Balance Delete Archive 3 23 Since detail records are maintained locations with zero balances appear on reports If you define a location as temporary the system automatically deletes inventory detail records when the location s balance falls to zero It does not delete the location code Since zero balance locations do not have detail records they do not appear on reports Items Sites 35 Fig 2 11 Location Maintenance 1 1 18 b See Setting Up Inventory Control on page 286 for details FAQAD 36 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Automatic Locations The system can automatically create location codes whenever you enter an undefined value Do this by setting Automatic Locations to Yes in Site Maintenance 1 1 13 This option is useful if you frequently need to define a new location while entering a transaction Note The system automatically creates new location codes without verification This means you can inadvertently create a new location code from a typing error For example if you type STWCK instead of STOCK the system creates a location code called STWCK If a site has a complex network of storage locations automatic locations may be a us
319. ntained The other domain can be in this database or in another connected database When you are using multiple databases operating over a network the system uses the domain associated with a site to determine where database records should be updated For example when a function such as DRP requests information for a site the system looks up the database name associated with the domain record and accesses that database automatically This can be the current database another database on the same machine or a remote database on another machine Site Connection Records To help you manage the relationships among sites and domains you can optionally create connection records in related domains when you create a new primary site Note You can also create a connection record directly by specifying a domain other than your current working domain In this case the system ensures that the site already exists as a primary site in a different domain or an error is generated Choosing Domains to Update The system generates a list of active domains in the current database and all databases defined in Database Connection Maintenance You can choose which domains to update from this list Before the list displays you are prompted to set a default for the Update field Set this to Yes if you want to create connection site records in most related domains You can then change exceptions to No Items Sites 33 Fig 2 10 es Creating Domain Nam
320. ntenance 166 expired inventory transaction 172 lot master records building 165 modifying 166 lot numbers assigned prior to activating Compliance 162 auto lot numbering 161 167 compliance 147 expired inventory 171 Lot Level Control field 154 multiple database 161 reusing 161 supplier 161 171 Lot Transactions by Date Browse 294 Lot Transactions by Date Inquiry batch number display 159 Lot Transactions by Tran Inquiry 294 Lot Where Used Inquiry 295 batch number display 159 Lot Serial Number History Menu 294 luxury taxes 347 M Maintain Users in Groups 111 adding users 112 removing users 114 replacing users 113 manual price lists 86 master comments copying text into PCO 123 vs codes 17 material requirements planning MRP item planning data 20 memo items Intrastat 270 tax accrual 374 Menu Security Maintenance PCO update access 140 minimum price 51 Mode of Transport field 270 Mode of Transport Maintenance 267 Move Transaction automatic lot numbers 169 Multi Lot Inven Detail Update 159 multiple databases site codes 29 sites 32 N NAFTA 195 National Drug Codes 173 Nature of Transaction Maintenance 267 net weight item data for Intrastat 273 nodes analysis codes 57 non recoverable tax 369 notification PCC approvals 115 Number Range Maintenance 225 Number Range Management NRM logistics accounting 224 numbers auto lot 161 items 15 PCR PCO 108 0 OR logic 53 56 Order Intrastat Data Maintenance 27
321. ntory Data Maintenance 1 4 5 to specify net weight and net weight unit of measure UM for each item involved in Intra EU inventory movements Note The Corporate Commodity Code field in Item Master Maintenance does not reference Intrastat commodity codes Fig 8 8 Item Master Maintenance yu Item Master z Maintenance Item Number 10 15000 Description NOMAD TM COOLING SYS UM EA AUTOMOTIVE UNIT t 1 4 1 Item The UM field Shipping Data is to the right Prod Line 1500 Item T ee Drawing 10 15000 of the Net rod Line em Type rawing 10 f i Added 05 28 1992 Status AC Rev AB Weight field Design Group Group AUTO Drawing Loc The system Promo Group PG1 Price Break Cat calculates net weight when Item Shipping Data creating Corp Comm Code PP Intrastat Ship Weight 6 00 Ike i KG 1 Freight Class D0000010 o history records Net Weight Enter item net weight Unit of Measure Enter item unit of measure FAQAD 274 User Guide Master Data Fig 8 9 Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 FAQAD Recording Intrastat Data for Orders Once Intrastat is set up you can record Intrastat data using either standard order maintenance programs or Order Intrastat Data Maintenance 2 22 11 Entering Intrastat Data in Sales Order Maintenance This section describes how to enter Intrastat data in Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 The same steps can be used to record Intrastat data in most other standard order maintenance
322. ntrastat history records for memo items Otherwise enter No This value becomes the default for Include Memo Items on order headers You can override it during order entry Declarant Branch ID and Agent Branch ID Optional Enter the company address codes to use as the default declarant and default agent in Intrastat Declaration Print 2 22 19 Commodity Code Enter the commodity code to use when an Item Intrastat Data record does not exist Mode of Transport and Port of Transshipment Enter the default transportation code values for Intrastat orders You can change these values during order entry These are optional fields Setting Up Commodity Codes Use Commodity Code Maintenance 2 22 3 to set up codes for classifying goods for Intrastat reporting Create codes for each EU country since each has its own coding scheme for the last four digits Note Intrastat commodity codes are distinct from the corporate commodity codes defined in Commodity Code Maintenance 1 4 19 Commodity Code Maintenance Authority Country GER Commodity Code ELEC Description Consumer Electronics Supplementary UM L Country Enter a valid country code for each country in which your company has sites Commodity Code Enter a commodity code Description Enter a description of the commodity Supplementary UM Enter an optional supplementary unit of measure For conversions this value must be defined in Unit of Measure Maintenance 1 13
323. ntries for AP Rate Variance Rate Variance Average Cost Non Recoverable Tax Average Cost Non Recoverable Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Tax Goods Receipt Purchase Entries created for received Inventory _ Order Receipts item cost 1 and tax 2 100 00 T Se 10 00 10 00 Voucher Confirmation Purchase Accounts AP Rate Entries created for item Order Receipts Payable Variance cost 3 variance 4 tax 100 00 S J100 00 30 00 on item cost 5 and tax on 10 00 5 PN 3 0016 variance 6 e 3 00 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt Purchase Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts item cost 1 but not tax 100 00 1 CD 100 00 Voucher Confirmation ks bii 1 IDE Entries created for item FEET eceipts Oli B 00 cost 2 variance 3 tax 0018 amp 30 00 on item cost 4 and tax on 10 00 item cost variance 5 3 00 AP Rate Variance Inventory 30 00 8 10 00 3 3 00 5 QAD 384 User Guide Master Data Memo Items Memo items are non inventory items such as office supplies Figure 13 23 shows GL entries for memo items The tax point determines whether the update to AP Tax Recoverable occurs at goods receipt or invoice receipt Fig 13 23 a GL Entries for Memo Item Average Cost Non Recoverable Tax Non Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Expensed Expensed Entries created for received Purchases Item Receipts item cost 1 and tax 2 TU
324. number FAQAD 282 User Guide Master Data Use Intrastat Inquiry by Order 2 22 17 to review Intrastat history records by order number Deleting and Archiving Intrastat History Use Intrastat Delete Archive 2 22 23 to delete or archive Intrastat history records Use Archive File Reload 36 16 5 to return history records to the database Fig 8 16 Intrastat Delete Archive 2 22 23 Intrastat Delete Archive Reference Date 4 HH Delete Archive Archive File Delete Enter Yes to delete information or No to review selected records Archive Enter Yes to copy each selected record to the disk file displayed in the Archive File field Types of Intrastat Data Recorded data for each Intrastat history record can be classified into three groups Qualitative information describes inventory movement and helps customs officials understand trends in the flow of goods Quantitative information describes the value net weight and supplementary UM if required of the inventory movement This information gives customs officials the currency value of the shipment both in net and unit measurements Audit trail information gives you a way to match Intrastat data to the business transactions from which it originated This is useful for responding to customs inquiries and audits Table 8 2 lists the various data fields that belong to the three types of Intrastat data FAQAD Qualitative Information
325. nventory See Locations transactions for the item E page 34 for etails Location Type Type identifies special storage requirements of the item such as flammable humidity controlled outside If you assign the item a location type it can only be received into a location that matches Automatic Lot Numbers This field determines if the system assigns See Chapter 5 lot numbers automatically If Yes the system assigns the work order s an number as the lot number If you are using the Compliance module on lot groups lot numbers can be generated based on a lot group format Average Interval The number of calendar days used as the averaging interval in ABC computations Cycle Count Interval The number of calendar days between cycle counting this item Shelf Life Shelf life indicates the number of calendar days you can hold the item in inventory before it becomes unusable The system adds this figure to the item s receipt date to calculate the expiration date You cannot allocate ship or issue expired inventory Allocate Single Lot This field indicates whether the system should always fill sales orders and work orders from a single lot of this item If Yes you can manually allocate orders from more than one lot using Sales Order Manual Allocations 7 1 6 or Work Order Bill Maintenance 16 13 1 but the system displays a warning message Key Item Indicates if this item must be available before a work order can b
326. o purchasing related Intrastat history records 1 Inventory transaction effective date 2 Voucher effective date 3 Tax point or voucher date The system records whichever date falls earlier in the month The tax point date is the 15th day of the month following the transaction effective date For sales related Intrastat transactions the reference date is always set to the invoice effective date The reference date assigned to an Intrastat history record determines when it is reported Reference date is the main criterion for selecting Intrastat history records for reporting SO Reference Date Logic Enter 1 2 or 3 to indicate the method you use to assign a reference date to sales related Intrastat history records QAD 270 User Guide Master Data b See page 20 for details FAQAD 1 Use the inventory transaction effective date 2 Use the invoice effective posting date With this setting an uninvoiced record is not reported in Intrastat Declaration Print 3 Use the tax point or invoice date The system records whichever date falls earlier in the month The tax point date is defined by Intrastat regulations as the 15th day of the month following the transaction effective date The reference date assigned to an Intrastat history record determines when it is reported Reference date is the main criterion for selecting Intrastat history records for reporting Include Memo Items Enter Yes if you typically create I
327. oes not exist in the new domain is not imported Setting Up PCC Security Since PCC activities can affect your production environment the following security steps are advised Set Security in PCC Control to Yes for additional control of approvals Place menu level security on PCR and PCO Maintenance programs and on update functions elsewhere in the system Access to PCO Maintenance Detail Functions Each submenu in PCR and PCO Maintenance exists as a menu entry in the Product Change Utility menu 1 9 25 Using Menu Security Maintenance 36 3 10 to restrict access to a program on menu 1 9 25 also restricts access to the corresponding program in PCO Maintenance Example Restricting access to Item Data Maintenance 1 9 25 3 also restricts access to the Item Data Maintenance screen of PCR or PCO Maintenance Restricting Access to Other Functions Once PCC is implemented prevent direct modification of controlled records by setting menu security on the following programs For product structures Product Structure Maintenance 13 5 Product Structure Copy 13 9 Component Change 13 10 Alternate Structure Maintenance 13 15 and Configured Structure Maintenance 8 1 For routings Routing Maintenance 14 13 1 Routing Maintenance Rate Based 14 13 2 Routing Copy 14 13 6 Routing Update 14 13 7 Product Change Control 141 For formulas Formula Maintenance 15 5 Formula Copy 15 8 Batch Quantity Change
328. of the control program Fig 12 13 Global Tax Management Control Global Tax m i Management Tax Zone Control 2 13 24 Tax Environment Country Code UsA P Rounding Method 2 P Tax Method 01 P Tax By Line 7 Accrue Tax at Receipt Accrue Tax At Usage Discount Tax at Invoice Discount Tax at Payment O Update Tax Allowed 0 Update History Allowed These fielo Keep Tax History affect tax Validate VAT Registration history anc Print VAT Registration 0 Display Detail on Reports V reporting Last Tax Code Tax Zone Enter the default tax zone to be used during transaction entry when the system cannot find a matching tax zone for an address record Tax Environment Enter the default tax environment to be used during transaction entry when the system cannot match the ship to ship from tax zones and customer or supplier tax class to a tax environment Country Code Enter a code to display as the default in Tax Zone Maintenance This code represents the top level in the tax zone hierarchy Rounding Method Enter the default rounding method for tax types in Tax Environment Maintenance Rounding method determines how tax amounts for the tax type are truncated Tax Method Tax By Line Accrue Tax at Receipt Discount Tax at gt See Tax Rate Invoice Discount Tax at Payment Update Tax Allowed These fields MEUM on all set defaults for the corresponding fields in Tax Rate Maintenance me U
329. ogistics Supplier Shipment Outbound ID 11 7 1 16 RMA Shipments Logistics Supplier Shipment Outbound ID 12 17 13 Distribution Order Workbench Freight Data Logistics Supplier Outbound 12 17 14 Distribution Order Freight Data Logistics Supplier Outbound Maintenance 12 17 21 Distribution Order Processing Freight Data Logistics Outbound Supplier Shipment ID 12 17 22 Distribution Order Shipments Freight Data Logistics Outbound Supplier Shipment ID 28 1 Voucher Maintenance Voucher Logistics Charges Both Include Blank Suppliers Logistics Charge Code The programs listed in Table 7 5 perform additional processing when Logistics Accounting is used In most cases no changes to the user interface are needed the processing is internal to the program logic The discrete shipment programs prompt for a shipment ID These include Sales Order Shipments and distribution order and RMA programs that ship items Logistics Accounting 221 Menu No Description Additional Processing 5 2 18 Build PO from Requisitions Copies terms of trade from supplier record to new POs copies logistics supplier from Logistics Charge Code Maintenance calculates tax on logistics charges 5 3 6 Blanket Order Release to PO Copies terms of trade and logistics supplier from blanket orders to released POs calculates tax on logistics charges 5 13 1 Purchase Order Receipts Creates pending vouchers ac
330. on method is identified with code 01 If required your company can set up custom methods and assign them different codes Follow these steps to define additional custom methods to accommodate special requirements 1 Create a two character code in Generalized Codes Maintenance 36 2 13 for field lc apportion method Use a number from 50 to 99 codes 01 through 49 are reserved for QAD use This code identifies your custom method 2 Create a Progress program that includes the apportionment logic 3 Name the program laappmxx p where xx is your two character code Place the program in your PROPATH so the system can find it 4 Modify Voucher Maintenance to call your new program when the method is not 01 The subprogram of Voucher Maintenance that needs to be modified is apvolaa5 p Example You create a new apportionment method identified with code 50 You should use program file 1aappm50 p to store method 50 Pending Vouchers Vouchers convey authority to pay invoices Vouchers control who receives payment how much they receive and when payment is sent Vouchers are typically recorded after an invoice is received from a supplier Pending vouchers track the estimated amounts owed to suppliers before an invoice is received for the actual amount Pending vouchers for logistics charges are created automatically during purchase receipts and shipments Logistics charge accruals are also referred to as pending vouchers During voucherin
331. on order shipments 225 Number Range nce Sequence Master 36 2 21 1 FAQAD 226 User Guide Master Data Fig 7 6 Logistics Accounting Control 2 15 24 b See Vouchering Logistics Charges on page 254 FAQAD Specify default GL accrual expense and variance accounts for tracking inbound and outbound logistics charges You can define a separate set of default outbound accounts for sales order and distribution order shipments If you only want to track inbound logistics charges you can leave the Outbound fields blank If you only want to track outbound logistics charges you must first define inbound accounts when Verify GL Accounts is Yes in Domain Account Control The accounts defined in Logistics Accounting Control are used as the defaults when you create a logistics charge code in Logistics Charge Code Maint 2 15 1 Since these are default accounts none of the static data or transactions that reference them are changed when these accounts are modified in Logistics Accounting Control Logistics Accounting Control Use Logistics Accounting LT Inbound Match Blank Suppliers O Accrual Account 2310 Expense Account 5610 Variance Account 5710 Outbound Sales Order Shipment Sequence ID la p Log Acctg SO Ship ID Distribution Order Shipment Sequence Il p Log Acctg DO Ship ID Sales Order Accrual Account 2 Sales Order Expense Account 5620 P Sales Order Variance Account 6560 Distribu
332. onsignment Inventory module invoicing P See User Guide a consigned shipment has additional effects on unreported shipment d um for records Since customers are only invoiced for the portion of a shipment consignment they have used both shipment and invoice type history records can exist simultaneously until all inventory is consumed Posting the invoice updates any unreported shipment data for consigned inventory as follows The quantity shipped is reduced by the quantity invoiced When the quantity on the shipment record is reduced to zero it is deleted and reporting is done on the record created during invoicing Invoice value in transaction and base currency is recalculated using the current sales order price FAQAD 278 User Guide Master Data b See Printing Intrastat Declarations on page 279 Fig 8 13 Intrastat Maintenance 2 22 13 FAQAD Statistical value in base currency net weight and supplementary units are recalculated based on the invoiced quantity When SO Reference Date Logic is 2 in Intrastat Control the invoice number and invoice date are updated and the reference date is updated with the invoice date Manually Creating Intrastat History Use Intrastat Maintenance 2 22 13 to add and modify Intrastat history records directly This is useful for data that are not entered automatically such as DRP transactions Transfers that use transactions on the Inventory Transfer Menu 3
333. ontrol Work Order Attributes Compliance Control Multi Lot Attribute Update Component Issues Controlled Substances Compliance 147 Use Compliance Control illustrated in Figure 5 2 to set up these features Fig 5 2 Compliance Compliance Control Contol 1 22 24 Compliance Active 7 Modify Component Issue Modify Co By Product Receipts Lot Control Level 0 0 Allow Duplicate Lot Numbers 1 Unique Item amp Lot Serial Combinations 2 Unique Lot Serial Numbers Single Lot per WO Receipt Single Lot Per PO Receipt Single Lot per REPET Receipt O Compliance Active Enter Yes or No depending on which compliance features you want to use No Only lot control features are active based on the setting of Lot Control Level Yes Work order attributes including batch numbers expired inventory transactions and controlled substances are active Modify Component Issue Enter Yes to issue any component to a Tip work order Enter No to restrict items issued to a work order to those mu listed on the work order bill of material BOM or valid substitute Substitution items Maintenance 13 19 Modify Co By Product Receipts Enter No to require all receipts to be valid items or substitute items for a co product or by product in a joint work order set Enter Yes to allow any item to be received as an unplanned receipt Lot Control Level Enter 0 1 or 2 0 Allow Duplicat
334. or Item Revision History Browse 1 9 9 6 Setting Up PCC Control Use PCC Control 1 9 24 to specify how PCRs and PCOs are processed PCC Control Control Table Auto Number v Security Auto Number Enter Yes to generate document numbers automatically when a new PCR or PCO is created Enter No to enter numbers manually when creating PCRs or PCOs Security Enter Yes to verify user identity when PCR PCO Approval 1 9 6 1 is accessed If Yes users are prompted to enter a password before the screen displays The password they enter must match the one associated with their user record in User Maintenance 36 3 1 Product Change Control 109 Enforce PCO Approval Group Sequencing Specify whether the system lets you complete approval of a PCR or PCO even if it has not yet been approved by a member of a group with a lower sequence number Approval sequences are assigned to groups in Routing Slip Maintenance No the default The system displays a warning message if approvals are attempted out of sequence You can ignore the warning and complete the approval Yes The system displays an error message if you attempt to approve a PCR or PCO out of sequence You cannot complete the current approval This field also controls whether a group member can update the Approved field on a PCR or PCO if it has already been approved by a member of a group with a higher approval sequence When the field is Yes the system displays an erro
335. or quote if you have security access to these fields When this occurs the system records a Manual discount which is the difference between the system generated price and the price entered Example A company offers a promotional discount to customers in a geographic area For qualifying customer A this discount is better than the standard discount Qualifying customer B however qualifies for a better discount than the geographic discount The system assigns the better discount so customer B is not penalized for qualifying for the promotion Discount Sequences When using combinable type discounts the discounts can either be added together or multiplied cascaded Specify which calculation to use in Pricing Control for all orders and price lists When the cascading calculation method is chosen and GL accounts are used to track discounts to individual price lists the discount sequence number becomes important This is because the individual discount amounts can differ depending on the order in which they are applied The net price of the order is the same regardless of sequence numbering When the additive calculation method is used discount sequence number is not significant With this method the calculation uses the best list price with each discount and adds the individual discount amounts to obtain the total discount Applying the Additive Method In a sales order line with a best list price of 100 price lists A and B are us
336. or received Purchases Item Receipts Recoverable item cost 1 and tax 2 D 100 00 10 00 2 10 00 E Expensed Item Accounts an teh Receipts Payable ntries created for item 100 00 G 100 00 cost 3 and tax 4 10 00 d 10 00 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt Expensed Expensed Entries created for received Purchases ltem Receipts item cost 1 but not for tax 100 00 100 00 Expensed Accounts AP Tax Voucher Confirmation Entries created Tor item Item Receipts Payable Recoverable 100 00 100 10 00 cost 2 and tax 3 e e e FAQAD 380 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Returned Items When you return items the system clears the item cost and the tax from the accounts updated by the original receipt and the voucher if you processed the return after paying the supplier invoice Non Recoverable Tax You cannot offset a non recoverable purchase tax amount against sales tax payable Usually such taxes are already included in the item cost Purchasing transactions then back calculate the tax from the item amount assuming you set up the supplier and tax rate records to support this The following section illustrates the GL entries if taxes were not included Inventory Items Figure 13 20 shows the GL entries for purchases of inventory items The tax point determines whether the update to AP Tax Recoverable occurs at goods receipt or invoice receipt Inventory items are items you p
337. order work order or repetitive transaction The only difference among order types is where in the order process the attributes are assigned FAQAD The inventory status attribute can be defined for any unique combination of item number site location lot serial and reference The following table describes which attributes can be defined for each order type and indicates the programs where you define them Compliance Work Order Receipts Pop Up Window 16 11 Order or Attribute Type Menu Attributes Work Order Work Order Maintenance 16 1 Assay Work Order Attribute Maintenance 1 22 4 Grade Expire Date Receipt Status Active Purchase Order Purchase Order Receipts Pop Up Window 5 13 1 Assay Grade Expire Date Receipt Status Active Repetitive Repetitive Labor Transaction Pop Up Window 18 14 Advanced Repetitive Backflush Transaction Pop Up Window 18 22 13 Advanced Repetitive Move Transaction Pop Up Window 18 22 19 Assay Grade Expire Date Receipt Status Active Inventory Status Item Site Inventory Data Maintenance 1 4 16 Item Inventory Data Maintenance 1 4 5 Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 PO Rcpt Status WO Rcpt Status Inventory Status Location Maintenance 1 1 18 Site Maintenance 1 1 13 Inventory Status You can use the two programs in boldface type to modify attributes only when Compliance Active is Yes Note You can change
338. ort Management module Customer Maintenance Customer Address Address Tax Data Customer 0100 Name Hans Maier Taxable Address Bauunterne Tax Zone GER Address In der Sch Tax class P Address Tax Usage City Frankfurt Tax In Format 0 Tax ID Federal Tax ID State Tax ID Misc 1 Country Germany Attention Telephone Fax Telex eae eres Added 03 24 1994 Tax ID Misc 3 In City 0 O Q Taxable Class Price Tbl SIC Disc Tbl Partial OK Fixed Price Update this information in Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 and End User Address Maintenance 11 9 1 Taxable For non taxable addresses change this setting to Yes if you report tax exemptions by tax type in GIM Tax Zone The system selects the default tax zone based on the city county state or province and country in the address Tax Class Enter the tax class Tax Usage Enter the tax usage Tax In Set Tax In to Yes if items shipped to or from the address have tax already included in the line item price Tax ID Federal For reference and documentation purposes enter a federal tax identification number When the Print Tax ID on Invoice field in Sales Order Control is Yes the output of Invoice Print 7 13 3 includes the value of Tax ID Federal This also applies to other programs that let you print invoices Implementing GTM 343 Tax ID State or VAT Registration For reference and docum
339. other price lists Which price lists are candidates for each line item Whether break category discounts apply Whether configured products are included and whether pricing applies across the entire product or at the current level only Which price list yields the best overall price for the customer Who Is the Pricing Customer When selecting price lists the system determines who the pricing customer is as follows When sales orders are entered the system uses the customer number in the Ship To field as the pricing customer if the ship to customer is defined in the customer master Otherwise the system uses the customer number in the Sold To field as the pricing customer AQAD Pricing 63 Discount Combinability The best possible new price of a line item is determined by considering multiple discounts and combining various discounts Combination types instruct the system how price lists combine with other price lists for purposes of multiple discounts and best pricing calculations The choices are Base The standard discount for customers that serves as the basis for additional discounts and can be combined with any non exclusive price list Base price lists are exclusive of other base price lists Combinable Incremental price lists intended to combine with base and other combinable price lists Base Combinable Incremental price lists intended to combine base price lists only Exclusive Exclusive price li
340. oucher Maintenance Date m External Refi P Internal Ref 1e Order P Ship rom P Ship To f Item Number Voucher Open Qty Amt Select All 0 Logistics Charge Code Buyer Approved By Select pending vouchers to process by ranges of dates external and internal reference numbers order number ship from and ship to codes Voucher Open Qty Amt If Yes Invoice Amt defaults to the open amount on the selected pending voucher in the Logistics Charge Matching Detail frame If No Invoice Amt is zero Logistics Accounting 257 Select All If Yes all retrieved pending vouchers are marked with an asterisk indicating selection on the next screen If No the retrieved pending vouchers are not selected In both cases you can manually override the default selection from the Logistics Charge Selection Maintenance frame Logistics Charge Code Enter a logistics charge code to select associated pending vouchers that match the other selection criteria Leave blank to select all pending vouchers Press Go to retrieve all pending vouchers that meet the specified criteria and continue the selection process Logistics Charge Selection Maintenance Frame The Logistics Charge Selection Maintenance frame displays the pending vouchers matching the selection criteria If you specified Yes to Select All an asterisk appears next to each pending voucher in the Sel column Fig 7 29 Voucher Maintenance Voucher
341. ountry codes in Country Code Maintenance 2 14 1 After defining country codes specify the default code for most tax zones records in Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 Setting Up State Province County Codes GTM uses state province and county codes to determine the correct tax zone for an address If these codes are inconsistent the system may assign the wrong tax zone Use Generalized Codes Maintenance 36 2 13 to require users to enter a valid state province or county code by setting up values for fields ad state and ad county Nole After you set up validation you cannot leave these fields blank during data entry Setting Up Tax Zones Tax zones identify geographic regions subject to the same set of tax types and levels of tax reporting All customer supplier and company address records belong to a tax zone On sales purchasing and other transactions the system uses tax zones to determine the tax environment A separate tax zone is required for each country state province county city and postal zone that has distinct tax reporting requirements Since one tax zone can include reporting and tax calculations for another tax zones are organized into hierarchies Set up higher level zones before lower level ones For example set up countries before their component states states before counties and so on P See Setting Up Country Codes on page 194 b See User Guide Manager Functions for information on
342. pdate History Allowed This setting determines whether users can change tax history detail records This setting is relevant only if Keep Tax History is also Yes FAQAD 340 User Guide Master Data b See VAT Registration Codes on page 341 for information on how codes are defined FAQAD Keep Tax History This setting determines whether the system creates tax history records Tax history records are always created on a per item basis This setting must be Yes if Update History Allowed is Yes Validate VAT Registration Enter Yes for the system to validate that VAT registration numbers are in one of the required formats for European Union countries Validation occurs when they are recorded in the Address Tax Window of various address maintenance programs If you set this to Yes because most of your business is within Europe but you also trade with non EU countries you must override the default validation logic so that you can leave the Tax ID State VAT Registration field blank for the non EU addresses To do this set up a blank generalized code for Tax ID State vat ccode in Generalized Codes Maintenance 36 2 13 Print VAT Registration This setting specifies whether the system includes VAT registration numbers on printed documents Set it to Yes to print the relevant VAT registration numbers on documents such as sales quotes sales orders invoices DR CR memos purchase orders blanket orders shippers vouchers
343. plier FAQAD 212 User Guide Master Data b See Creating a Price List on page 69 Fig 6 22 Address Code Change 2 11 b See User Guide Distribution A for information on shipping groups FAQAD No price lists exist for the old and new address codes where the only difference is the value in the Customer Analysis Code field If lists like this are defined you must adjust the pricing information in Price List Maintenance 1 10 1 1 before attempting to merge Address Code Change Old Address 00000001 Universal Industries List Type enduser New Address 1 L2 p List Type Output Batch ID O Q When your input matches the conditions for merging you are prompted to merge the old address into the new address If you respond Yes most information for the old address code such as sales purchases AR AP and master comments is added to the new one For example any totals maintained by address are summarized such as open accounts receivable and sales history by customer open accounts payable and purchase history by supplier Bank account information is not merged however You must decide manually whether accounts for the old address should be added to the new address Note Supplier address codes entered on routing operations are not changed by this function Review your standard operations routings and processes whenever a supplier address code is changed If you merge address codes and both old a
344. pment ID used as the internal reference when a pending voucher is created Since RMAs are similar to sales orders the logistics accounting fields and processing are the same as Sales Order Maintenance and Sales Order Shipments GL Effects During shipment the system creates a GL transaction for the entire shipment or for each line depending on the freight terms A sales order shipment creates the following GL transactions Debit the Sales Order Expense account for the logistics charge product line site customer type and channel Credit Sales Order Accrual for the logistics charge product line site and supplier type A distribution order shipment creates the following GL transactions Debit the Distribution Order Expense account for the logistics charge product line site customer type and channel Credit the Distribution Order Accrual account for the logistics charge product line site and supplier type Accrual Currency For outbound logistics charges the system uses the order freight list and logistics supplier currencies to determine the accrual currency If the order currency is the same as the logistics supplier currency that currency is used for accruals Otherwise the system uses the base currency for accruals Logistics Accounting 253 Updating Pending Vouchers Use Logistics Charge Pending Voucher Maint 2 15 7 to update a logistics supplier on an open pending voucher You cannot update p
345. prices as used in service pricing which enable the customer to be invoiced for a fixed price regardless of the actual cost of items labor and expenses recorded Reprice Enter Yes at the order header to have the system reprice modified line items The system also reprices other line items belonging to the same break category as a modified item Otherwise enter No If No you can still reprice line items individually in the order detail pop up window If Reprice is No on the order header and you enter a new line the system automatically reprices it Important The value of Fixed Price not Reprice determines which orders are repriced by Sales Order Repricing Sales Order Line Line Item Ln Item Number Qty Ordered UM ListPrice Discount Net Price Price fields 4 44 100 1 0 EA 1 000 00 0 0 1 000 00 Pricing Date Desc CONTROL UNIT HOM Credit Terms Int Pricin Reprice g Lae 12000 di z Pop Up Sp Cost 0 00 o0 Cred Terms Int 0 00 Lot Serial Required Type Qty Allocated 0 0 Promised UM Conv 1 0000 Qty Picked 0 0 Due Date 01 26 1998 Consume Fest Qty Shipped 0 0 Performance Detail Alloc Qty to Invoice 0 0 Pricing 01 26 1998 Taxable Salesperson 1 WING Multiple Frt List Comm aa Line Item p 2900 Category Fixed Price Comments Fixed Price Pricing Date This field defaults from the order header The system uses the pricing date as the effective date in determining pric
346. pts Purchase Price Variance LUN Purchase Accounts AP Tax Order Receipts Payable Recoverable 100 00 3 3100 00 12 50 5 25 00 4 25 00 5 12 50 quantity and you close the receiver line in the voucher Processing GTM 365 Fig 13 7 GL Entries for Purchase Price Variance Standard Cost Recoverable Tax QAD 366 User Guide Master Data Fig 13 8 GL Entries for AP Usage Variance Standard Cost Recoverable Tax FAQAD Figure 13 8 and Figure 13 9 show GL entries for inventory items Entries for memo items update Expensed Item Receipts instead of Purchase Order Receipts and Expensed Purchases instead of Inventory In addition for memo items an option in Accounts Payable Control 28 24 allows variances to update Expensed Item Receipts instead of the variance accounts GL Entries for AP Usage Variance Standard Cost Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Purchase AP Tax Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts _Recoverable item cost 1 and tax 2 100 00 0 D 100 00 10 001 10 00 Voucher Confirmation inki oed Entries created for item 100 00 8 P 100 00 cost 3 variance 4 tax 10 00 40 00 on item cost 5 and tax on 10 00 variance 6 4 00 AP Usage AP Tax Variance Recoverable 40 00 4 00 8 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt 1 z Purchase Goods Receipt f
347. quiry S O sopiwiiq p 1 10 1 15 Customer Orders by Price List Inquiry pppiiq04 p 1 10 1 17 Sales Order Price Inquiry soppiq p 1 10 1 18 Sales Quote Price Inquiry sqppiq p 1 10 1 24 Pricing Control pppipm p Pricing 47 Menu Menu Label Program 1 10 2 PO Sched RMA Rept Price Menu E 1 10 2 1 Price List Maintenance pppemt p 1 10 2 2 Price List Browse ppbr003 p 3 1 10 2 3 Price List Report pppcrp p A 11024 Price List By Item Report pppcrpOl1 p E 1 10 2 5 Price List Copy pppecp p 1 10 2 6 Price List Generation By Item pppeptup p 1 10 13 Volume Discount Maintenance sosdmt p 1 10 14 Volume Discount Browse sobr008 p Additional pricing functions used in the system are described in other guides Service price lists are created in Service Support Management and b See User Guide A used for contract pricing and call billing They are defined and for details on a service pricing managed entirely within SSM Price lists defining default prices and planned costs for items labor P See User Guide and expenses used in projects are created in the Project Realization RRM Management PRM module Trade Management TRM is a separate product that interfaces with P See User Guide sales orders and is used for complex promotional pricing The Trade Management for features of TRM are described in a separate guide details Figure 3 1 illustrates how the system applies the best pricing and list disco
348. r Control Table Auto Number Next PCR PCO Prefix If Auto Number is Yes the system assigns a prefix based on the PCR PCO Type specified and associates the prefix with the Next PCR PCO field to create a unique number Multiple prefixes can be specified Use the null prefix for types that do not reference a specific prefix Next PCR PCO The next number available for an associated prefix When the prefix is used to label a new document the portion of the number after the prefix is determined by this field Fig 4 4 PCC Control 1 9 24 Auto Number Frame Tip Types are defined in PCR PCO Type Maintenance 1 9 1 9 FAQAD 110 User Guide Master Data Defining Groups Routing Slips and Change Types Three kinds of data are defined in the PCC setup menu groups routing slips and document change types These three data structures work together to form a model of your company s product change and approval process Figure 4 5 shows how PCC groups routing slips and change types are used Fig 4 5 PCC Setup Functions PCO No 1 Type Revision Design Group Aries Design Team Approved By Design Team Sustaining Engineer Approval Industrial Engineer Materials Planning ri G oup Mfg Supervisor Cost Accounting Distribution Distribution Group Creating Groups Routing Slip In PCC groups represent users with different functional responsibilities Groups are used in th
349. r Guide Financials A for details on intercompany accounts FAQAD the vouchered amount Any difference is posted to the variance account for the logistics charge Variances are calculated but not recorded when Close Line is No A voucher to a logistics supplier for logistics charges accrued during a purchase receipt creates the following GL transactions Debit the inbound Accrual account for the logistics charge product line site and supplier type Credit Accounts Payable for the logistics supplier A voucher to a logistics supplier for shipments to customers creates the following GL transactions Debit the Sales Order Accrual account for the logistics charge product line site and supplier type Credit Accounts Payable for the logistics supplier A voucher to a logistics supplier for shipments to other company locations creates the following GL transaction Debit the Distribution Order Accrual account for the logistics charge product line site and supplier type Credit Accounts Payable for the logistics supplier When the shipping and receiving sites are in different entities or databases the system automatically generates the appropriate balancing entries in the GL for each site using the Intercompany debit and credit accounts defined in Entity Code Maintenance 25 3 1 1 Deleting and Archiving Logistics Charges The system keeps all of your unvouchered pending vouchers online for an unlimited ti
350. r PCO PCR into your current document If the same records already exist in the target PCO they are not copied Copy PCO to PCO PCR Used to copy all or part of the detail from your PCO to another one If the same records are already included in the target PCR PCO they are not copied FAQAD Product Change Control 123 Two additional functions are available from PCR Maintenance illustrated in Figure 4 19 Number PCROO007 ID Database PCR Type PCR Design Group ACCT1 Created By hme 06 12 2002 Title Request for Larger Frame Reason The space between the motor and the external frame is PCO PCR Function Maintenance Change PCR Number gt Close PCR To PCO Class gt Convert PCR to PCO Originator gt Copy PCR From PCO PCR gt Copy PCR To PCO PCR Close PCR to PCO Used to merge the detail from the PCR you are currently editing into an existing PCO and then close the current PCR If the same records exist in the target PCO they are not copied This is the only way a PCR can affect the production system since PCRs cannot be released and distributed Convert PCH to PCO Converts the PCR you are currently modifying to a PCO You are prompted for a new PCO type and design group since the current type is designed for PCRs Once you enter a valid PCO type and design group combination the PCR becomes a PCO with the same number Maintaining Text Records Select Text Data Maintenance to enter multiple page
351. r Yes If No a warning displays when you create a price list with this analysis code Note This setting has no impact on the active status of customer and item nodes associated with this analysis code You can modify the active status of nodes in Analysis Code Detail Maintenance 1 8 13 Comments Enter Yes to review or update comments Use Analysis Code Report 1 8 17 to view details for a range of analysis codes Enter the analysis code type analysis code range and analysis detail selections to be included on the report Pricing 55 Creating Analysis Code Conditions Use Analysis Code Selection Maintenance 1 8 4 to define how members are selected for inclusion in an analysis code group Use Analysis Code Selection Inquiry 1 8 5 to review analysis codes and their condition fields and ranges Fig 3 7 Analysis Code Selection Maint Type Customer 1 8 4 Code Retail Retail Customers Condition Field Bill to Wildcard Selection ro PIs Type Valid values are item or customer Code Enter an analysis code you created previously considered the parent code Condition Field Enter a characteristic or qualifier You can apply more than one condition to an analysis code If multiple qualifying conditions are selected AND logic is used For example if Condition Field is set to Salesperson 1 and a second Condition Field is set to Salesperson 2 only records meeting both conditions are selected
352. rade 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee 237 Assigning Terms of Trade to Suppliers 004 238 Processing Purchase Orders 00 cee e eee eee eee 239 Processing Purchase Receipts 2 0 0 cece eee eee eee 243 Accruing Outbound Logistics Charges 0 0 ruuruu rrur 245 Updating Freight Terms 245 Processing Orders iuis ca eb m dn caer e Rae aus 246 Processing Shipments 0 cee cece 249 Updating Pending Vouchers 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 253 Vouchering Logistics Charges 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 254 Voucher Maintenance 00 eee eee eee 254 Deleting and Archiving Logistics Charges 0 260 Generating Logistics Reports 1 0 0 0 cece eee ene 261 Chapters lntrastat iii cds de rene cee ses uk RR es an saws eee 263 Introduction soe ce ihe see besa e 9h ERR eve bene RR cw ads 264 Implementing Intrastat 0 eee 266 Setting Up Intrastat Codes 0 2 eee 266 Setting Up Addresses for Declarants and Agents 267 Setting Up Intrastat Control eee 268 Setting Up Commodity Codes 0 0 0 cee ee ee 270 Setting Up Intrastat Item Data 0 0 eee eee 271 Setting Up a Company Address for Each Site 272 Entering Country Codes for Customers and Suppliers 273 Entering Net Weights for Intrastat Items 273 Recording Intrastat Data for Orders 0 0 cece eee eee 2
353. rder Control 7 1 24 Note Currently the system does not calculate adjusting entries on late payments Trailer Codes In addition to line item charges and tax amounts orders often have miscellaneous charges such as freight and service associated with them Use Trailer Code Maintenance 2 19 13 to set up trailer codes prior to entering sales orders Trailer codes can be marked as taxable and associated with a GL account Enter the GIM tax class of this trailer code Trailer items are not subject to commission You can also indicate whether the trailer code should be discounted at time of payment If Yes the trailer charge amount is discounted by Payment Maintenance 27 6 4 in the same way as the sales and tax amounts Once established the three most frequently used taxable and nontaxable trailer codes can be specified as defaults in Sales Order Control 7 1 24 These defaults display on the trailer of every order but can be changed manually Taxable and nontaxable trailer codes for contracts in Service Support Management can be specified in Contract Control 11 5 24 You can also associate a trailer code with freight lists If you want this P See Trailer trailer code to be used rather than the ones defined in Sales Order Control Sueco 7 1 24 you must set Use SO Freight List Trailer Code to Yes in Sales Order Control Note If you are using the PRO PLUS Container and Line Charges P See User Guide PRO PLUS module tr
354. rder Maintenance 5 7 Blanket Order Maintenance 5 3 1 or Scheduled Order Maintenance 5 5 1 13 you can specify the terms of trade The same logistics accounting frames and fields are used in all three programs The system automatically copies terms of trade to the PO when orders are created by releasing a blanket order using Blanket Order Release to PO 5 3 6 Note When you use Build PO from Requisitions 5 2 18 to create a PO the default terms of trade assigned to the item supplier are used When default terms of trade are not found logistics charges do not accrue for these orders After you enter the terms of trade code you can optionally display the terms of trade detail lines and assign a logistics supplier to each charge that is your customer responsibility Logistics charges that are the responsibility of the item supplier do not display Fig 7 14 Supplier Maintenance Logistics Accounting Data b See User Guide Distribution A for details on purchase orders b See Assigning Terms of Trade to Suppliers on page 238 FAQAD 240 User Guide Master Data Fig 7 15 Purchase Order Maintenance Logistics Accounting Data Frame Fig 7 16 Logistics Accounting Detail Frame P See Using List Discount Table Pricing on page 88 b See Customer and Supplier Items on page 23 FAQAD Purchase Order Maintenance Purchase Order PO1042 Supplier 002 Ship To 10000 Supplier To
355. rders and repetitive Then delete any existing duplicate lot numbers using Lot Master Delete Archive 1 22 23 Use Lot Master Build 1 22 22 to create lot master records for all lots referenced in transaction history Then define the lot groups needed to generate automatic numbers using Lot Group Maintenance 1 22 13 When the groups have been established associate them with the appropriate items using Item Inventory Data Maintenance 1 4 5 or Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 When items are received on work orders purchase orders or repetitive orders the system generates lot numbers automatically You can update inventory attributes and manage expired inventory as needed using Multi Lot Inventory Update 1 22 19 or Inventory Detail Maintenance 3 1 1 Lot Control Relationships The settings described in Figure 5 11 along with the auto lot settings in Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 affect lot numbering on several levels Item Level Each lot controlled item can be either automatically numbered or manually numbered Order Level Each work order purchase order or repetitive transaction can be restricted to a single lot per receipt or received Auto Lot into several lots If the Lot Database Level single lot setting is No Number Sets database wide and auto lot numbering is lot number not used you can Single Lot requirements and per Receipt opens up access to the order level and item leve
356. re formula records after the PCO has been implemented Qty On Hand Current on hand inventory balance for the component Qty On Order Total quantity of supply on order for the component due on or before the entered effective date Projected Usage Total demand quantity required for the component due on or before the entered effective date Balance Total of Qty On Hand Qty On Order Projected Usage yielding the component s expected on hand inventory balance as of the entered effective date Value Total monetary cost of the component inventory quantity in the Balance field using the item costs associated with the entered Cost Method Product Change Control 137 Use this report to estimate the future cost of obsolete inventory as of a given effective date Run the report with different effective dates to determine which effective date minimizes inventory scrap rework costs Typically this report is considered in combination with other factors such as the impact of changed routings processes new tooling scrap and rework costs purchased part lead times and the mandatory date for the change Nonetheless future component inventory balances are relevant in almost all situations and provide valuable planning information Incorporation Selection Use Incorporation Selection 1 9 7 4 to set PCO effective dates Released and distributed PCOs display in order beginning with the PCO entered in the first frame Enter criteria such as
357. re useful if you use standard account codes but differentiate product lines with sub accounts or cost centers Product Line Accounts Table 2 2 lists each product line account the account type and typical programs that use the accounts Note If you are using the optional Customer Consignment Inventory or Supplier Consignment Inventory modules an additional set of consignment accounts can be update in Product Line Maintenance Items Sites 25 Fig 2 7 Product Line Maintenance 1 2 1 b See User Guide Distribution B FAQAD 26 User Guide Master Data Table 2 2 Product Line Accounts AQAD Account Type Use Inventory Asset Inventory Transactions H E Inventory Discrepancy Expense Inventory Counts e E Scrap Expense WO Receipt Cost Revalue Expense GL Cost Change Sales Income Invoice Post Sales Discount Expense Invoice Post 2 Exempt Sales Income Invoice Post S COGS Material Expense SO Shipment lt COGS Labor Expense SO Shipment E COGS Burden Variable Expense SO Shipment COGS Overhead Fixed Expense SO Shipment COGS Subcontract Expense SO Shipment Purchases Expense PO Receipt Non Inventory eo PO Receipts Accrued AP Liability PO Receipt Voucher 2 Overhead Applied Expense PO Receipt t PO Price Variance Expense PO Receipt AP Usage Variance Expense Voucher AP Rate Variance Expense Voucher Floor Stock Expense WO Close Material Usage Variance Expense WO Close Material Rate Variance Expe
358. re using e mail to notify users of PCC activities make sure that each user has a valid e mail address and definition b See User Guide Manager Functions for information on E Mail Definition Maintenance QAD 108 User Guide Master Data b See User Guide Manager Functions for information on users and security Fig 4 3 PCC Control 1 9 24 FAQAD Note For security audit purposes you cannot delete a user ID in User Maintenance after it has been successfully used for login Instead unneeded IDs are deactivated When a user who is involved in the PCC life cycle is deactivated be sure to update PCC groups and routing slips so that e mail notifications are not sent to users who no longer can access the system for example those who have left the company 5 Set up printers and batch IDs 36 13 2 36 14 1 36 14 3 Users can be notified at various points in the PCC life cycle either by printed reports or e mail Batch IDs are useful for running large print jobs during off hours Also PCOs can be distributed 1 9 7 1 incorporated 1 9 7 5 and implemented 1 9 7 13 using batch IDs that execute nightly 6 Initialize PCOs in PCC Control 1 9 24 The first time you enter PCC Control you are prompted to initialize PCOs to current revision level Answer Yes to have the system create PCO 000000 which records current revision numbers for all items in the system The initial revision numbers serve as a starting point f
359. re using the Service Support Management module assign tax classes to service categories in Service Category Maintenance 11 21 9 Implementing Special Taxes This section provides additional information on how to implement certain kinds of taxes in GTM b See VAT Registration Codes on page 341 gt See External Interface Guide Sales and Use Tax b See User Guide Service Support Management A FAQAD 344 User Guide Master Data FAQAD Tax Exemptions In GIM tax exemptions are set up by tax type You can implement separate tax types for each exemption or group all exemptions into one tax type Select the approach that supports the level of detail required for governmental reporting Reporting by Exemption 1 In Tax Type Maintenance 2 13 1 1 set up a separate tax type for each exemption In Tax Environment Maintenance 2 13 5 1 assign the type to each tax environment affected by the exemption In Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 set up 0 tax rates for each exemption tax type If the exemption is by customer or supplier set up 0 rates by usage code If the exemption is by item or trailer charge set up 0 rates by item tax class In the respective maintenance programs set the Taxable status of all exempt customers suppliers product lines items and trailer charges to Yes Transactions with a non taxable status do not calculate tax but you will be unable to report the reason since GTM
360. ready for review comment and approval route it using Route PCR for Approval 1 9 2 4 Groups and users who must approve the PCR can be notified with or printed output that the PCR is ready for review PCRs that have been routed for approval can be revoked if necessary for revision or correction Note PCR approval groups are not the same as standard security groups used throughout the system They apply only to the PCC approval process Approving PCRs Use PCR PCO Approval 1 9 6 1 to monitor the queue of submitted PCRs add comments and approve or disapprove each PCR Disapproved PCRs can be routed back to reviewers for reapproval The order of approvals is determined by the routing slip attached to each PCR Once a PCR has been approved electronically by all necessary personnel it can be closed or converted into a PCO using PCR Maintenance 1 9 2 1 PCO Life Cycle The life cycle of a PCO is more extensive than that of a PCR since PCOs typically affect production data Creating PCOs Create PCOs in PCO Maintenance 1 9 2 13 Also use PCO Maintenance to capture and modify item product structure formula routing process and item specification records You can also create PCOs by copying or combining existing PCOs or PCRs or by converting PCRs Product Change Control 105 Routing for PCOs for Approval When a PCO is ready for review comment and approval route it using Route PCO for Approval 1 9 2 16 Groups and use
361. rectly to its location in the list of nodes Note A deselected node can only become active again by being selected in this program Running Analysis Code Detail Build has no effect on its status Viewing Analysis Code Nodes There are two inquiries for viewing analysis code nodes Use Analysis Code Detail Inquiry 1 8 14 to view specified analysis codes and their nodes Use Analysis Code Where Used Inquiry 1 8 15 to view the analysis codes to which a specified node belongs Copying Analysis Codes Use Analysis Code Copy 1 8 20 to copy an existing analysis code as a basis for creating a new one Type Customer Code Club Club Shoppers Enter the new To Private analysis code name here Type Enter Customer or Item Code Enter the analysis code to be copied To Enter the name of the new analysis code Setting Up Item Price Break Categories Price break categories let you assign volume price breaks for multiple items Discounts can be calculated based on the quantity or amount ordered on multiple lines of a sales order or quote Example One hundred green bicycles are ordered on line 1 of a sales order 100 red bicycles on line 2 and 200 bicycle reflectors on line 3 The reflectors receive a price break based on the quantity of bicycles ordered 200 not the quantity of bicycles plus reflectors 400 The bicycles also receive a price break based on the number of bicycles ordered 200 Price List P
362. redit Limit Adjustment 191 Customer Item Maintenance 23 Customer Maintenance 187 188 Intrastat country codes 273 Customer Orders by Price List Inquiry 79 Customer Ref is Customer Item field 23 Customer Ship to Maintenance 186 Customer Supplier Bank Browse 199 Customer Supplier Bank Maintenance 198 Customer Supplier Bank Report 199 customers 186 analysis codes regeneration 51 banks 198 bill to 186 country codes 273 credit data 189 default GTM tax data 342 freight data 190 reserved locations for 192 ship to 186 sold to 186 Cycle Count Results Entry 296 297 Cycle Count Results Report 297 Cycle Count Worksheet Print 296 cycle counting 41 296 initial counts 296 interval 19 recounts 297 results report 297 D date PCO effective 137 pricing effective 51 reference 269 SO reference 269 declarant selecting for Intrastat print 280 Declarant Branch ID field 270 declarations printing Intrastat 279 reprinting 281 selecting for final print 280 default inventory status 154 FAQAD delete archive Intrastat records 282 inventory tags 304 lot masters 162 Delivery Transit Time Maintenance 196 Detail Allocation Inventory Inquiry 192 Detail Allocation Inventory Report 192 298 Detail Approval Maintenance 134 Device History Record Report 301 discount tables 88 requiring 98 discount types accrual 62 credit terms 62 discount 61 discount amt 61 freight list 62 freight terms 62 list price 61 markup 61 ne
363. ree ways e Design Groups designate which users have authority to create and maintain PCRs and PCOs For example members of an engineering team might make up one design group PCRs and PCOs are organized by type and design group since the design group is the driving force behind change development Distribution Groups designate which users are notified automatically when a PCO has been released Approval Groups designate which users have authority to approve PCRs and PCOs Use Group Maintenance 1 9 1 1 to define PCC groups FAQAD Product Change Control 111 Fig 4 6 Group Maintenance o T R Group Master an Group accti Description Accounting Group In the first frame enter a unique group name and a brief description Use the second frame to add users to the group and specify group attributes Important Users added to groups must be previously defined with User Maintenance 36 3 1 Fig 4 7 Group Maintenance 1 9 1 1 Add Group Master Users Group acctl Description Accounting Group Add Users User idm P Expire Date Copies Output Expire Date Optionally enter a date when the user is no longer considered an active member of the group Copies Enter the number of printed copies to be printed on the Tip printer specified in Output Enter zero to have the user notified by a a P e mail Maintenance 36 3 1 Output Typically the printer on which PCC related notices are printed Changing
364. region class current credit limit date of last credit review or date of last credit update Adjustment Enter a percentage for adjusting the credit of selected customers Indicate decreases with negative percentages Compound Simple The system uses one of three methods to calculate a new credit limit amount N is the number of days since the last time the customer s credit limit was updated Table 6 3 Method Formula Interest Calculation Methods Compound Interest Old credit limit x 1 Adjustment 96 100 N Simple Interest Old credit limit x 1 N Adjustment 96 100 Fixed Interest Old credit limit x 1 Adjustment 100 Values entered here determine the method used to adjust credit limit amounts Table 6 4 identifies the settings required for each method Table 6 4 To Choose Set Cumulative Set Compound Calculation of This Method Fixed to Simple to Credit Limit Compound Interest Cumulative Compound Simple Interest Cumulative Simple Fixed Percentage Fixed Cumulative Fixed Specifies whether the adjustment percentage is a fixed percentage or a cumulative daily percentage applied to every day since the last credit limit update Update Credit Limit Enter Yes to update the customer s credit limit and set the last credit update date to the system date in Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 Enter No to review the report without updating the customer record QAD 192 User Guide Master Data b See Reserv
365. rice Break Category 1 i i End Item A End Item B Price Break Price Break Category 1 Category 1 There are two ways to take advantage of price break categories Accumulate quantities on related items by assigning the same price break category to each item Pricing 59 Fig 3 10 Analysis Code Copy 1 8 20 Fig 3 11 Cumulative Price Break Categories FAQAD 60 User Guide Master Data Fig 3 12 Price Break Categories and Accessory Items Fig 3 13 Price Break Cat Field of Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 FAQAD Offer discounts on accessory items by assigning a price break category to a price list to which the accessory item belongs and to the item master of the accessory item s principal item In the case illustrated in Figure 3 12 bicycle tire pumps belonging to the price break category Accessories qualify for Price List A Price List A uses the price break category Bicycles to determine the price for the pumps even though the pumps do not belong to that price break category Quantity Amount Data for Break Category Accessories Tire Pumps Item Master Break Category Accessories Price List A Break Category Bicycles Quantity Amount Data for Break Category Bicycles Enter break categories in Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 and Price List Maintenance 1 10 1 1 Item Master Maintenance Item Number 10 10000 Description OASI
366. ronto Computer Services Quality Products Inc 75 Queens Road Manufacturing Division One World Way San Diego United States of America Logistics Accounting Data Show Detail O o0 Terms of Trade StdShip Terms of Trade Enter the terms of trade code used to accrue logistics charges for this order This field defaults from the terms of trade code associated with the supplier in Supplier Maintenance When this field is blank logistics charges do not accrue for this order Show Detail Enter Yes to display details for the specified terms of trade Logistics Accounting Detail Description Log Supplier Name Freight 5017000 P Log Supplier Enter the supplier of the selected logistics charge After you enter a PO line item the system recalculates the PO line item unit cost to exclude logistics costs that are your responsibility since they are not payable to the item supplier except when one of the following is true A price list with an amount type of L list is attached to the PO The system uses the list price from the price table Price lists are defined in Price List Maintenance 1 10 2 1 A supplier quote price is available The PO line item unit cost defaults from the supplier quote price defined in Supplier Item Maintenance 1 19 for the item and supplier Logistics Accounting 241 Otherwise the system checks the GL cost set for any cost element in the Material category for that line item If a cos
367. roups of items on a regular or cyclic schedule A physical count involves counting all items usually once a year During cycle counting you enter manual count figures in the system The system then compares the manual count figures with its figures If there are discrepancies the system checks the error tolerances defined in Inventory Control If a count figure is within tolerance it is accepted and the system s figure is updated If a count figure is not within tolerance the item in question must be recounted The system accepts recount quantities that are out of tolerance ABC Class Code The ABC class code classifies items by their importance in a manufacturing system and determines count frequencies Class A items are counted more frequently than class B items Class B items are counted more frequently than class C items b See Chapter 10 Physical Inventory for details FAQAD 296 User Guide Master Data AQAD Use Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 or Item Inventory Data Maintenance 1 4 5 to assign ABC class You can also have the system calculate it automatically by running Item ABC Status Report Update 1 5 9 or 3 6 3 For each ABC class assign item tolerances percentage and amount in Inventory Control When count discrepancies arise the system checks item tolerances by class Cycle Counting Procedure Whether you select items for cycle counting or have the system select them the basic steps are as fo
368. routing detail Respond Yes to have the system copy FAQAD 118 User Guide Master Data Fig 4 15 PCR PCO Type Maintenance 1 9 1 9 AQAD approval routing details for each group from the source routing to the new routing If you respond No groups can still be added later using Routing Maintenance Defining Document Change Types Use PCR PCO Type Maintenance 1 9 1 9 to set up codes for PCR and PCO types The type code determines whether the change document is a PCR or a PCO and determines the routing slip distribution group prefix and number Defining document change types requires careful planning Some criteria to consider are Purposes of the PCO such as to enhance safety upgrade functionality reduce cost Product lines affected by the PCO Design areas affected by the PCO such as electrical mechanical or pneumatic Approvals required for the PCO PCR PCO Type Maintenance Type PCOTYPE1L Design Group mfgi RTI Distributionimfgi P Type Enter a code identifying this type of change document Design Group Enter a group defined in Group Maintenance that has design responsibility for this type of change document Description Enter up to 24 characters describing this document type Document Type Indicate whether this type is used for PCRs or PCOs Product Change Control 119 Prefix An optional three character prefix for document numbers used to distinguish different kinds of changes
369. rs who must approve the PCO can be notified by e mail or printed output that the PCO is ready for review PCOs that have been routed for approval can be revoked if necessary for revision or correction Approving PCOs Use PCR PCO Approval 1 9 6 1 to monitor the queue of submitted PCOs add comments and approve or reject each PCO Disapproved PCOs can be routed back to reviewers for reapproval The order of approvals is determined by the routing slip attached to each PCO Once the PCO has been approved electronically by all necessary personnel it is ready to be released Release and Distribution You can release only approved PCOs to manufacturing Use Release and Distribution 1 9 7 1 to monitor the queue of approved PCOs and choose PCOs to release If necessary you can revoke approval of a PCO before release and return it for revision or correction Once released and distributed the PCO can no longer be rejected or modified Any changes affecting the PCO must be released as separate PCOs At distribution time the system automatically generates either hard copy release notices or e mail for a defined group of users either immediately or through batch print queues Once a PCO has been officially released the manufacturing organization is responsible for implementing the changes Engineering can specify a mandatory date for changes or allow manufacturing to select a changeover date based on least cost minimum disruption or other
370. s and Price List Processing As each line item is priced the system determines if any lines need to be accumulated for price breaks If so the price calculated is based on the total quantity or amount on all qualifying line items A line qualifies if the item break category matches The break category on a selected price list and The break category of another line item on the same order Once all line items are completed the system reviews them to ensure that proper discounts are calculated For example if line item 4 affects the quantity discount for a prior line the system reviews that line and updates its pricing There may be times when an item should receive a discount based on the quantity ordered on other line items but should not add to the total break quantity Configured Products Pricing The system determines in two stages whether price lists apply across an entire configured product line or at the current level only Factor contestants Each component including the parent item of the configured product is priced independently and then totaled Best overall price The system calculates the net price for the entire configured item using the rolled up list price discounted by only those discounts that apply across the entire configuration The system then compares the net price with the best overall net price and chooses the better of the two Calculating Best Prices In best pricing multiple discounts are
371. s are assessed only on transaction amounts less than a specified maximum For example a 10 capped tax applies only to transaction amounts under 1 000 Two settings in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 govern setup of capped taxes Max Taxable This setting identifies the maximum amount subject to tax In the above example Max Taxable is 1 000 Tax Method For capped taxes set Tax Method to 02 Whenever the transaction taxable base amount exceeds the Max Taxable amount for the tax rate the final tax amount is zero Recoverable Taxes Taxes are recoverable whenever your company is eligible to offset a percentage of tax on purchases against tax collected on sales Recoverable taxes are common in Europe The following settings in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 govern setup of recoverable taxes Percent Recoverable The percentage of purchase tax that can be recovered for the tax rate QAD 348 User Guide Master Data FAQAD AP Tax Account GL account sub account and cost center for posting recoverable tax amounts This account is used by Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 PO Shipper Receipt 5 13 20 and confirmed accounts payable vouchers 28 1 28 6 28 7 A recoverable tax is an asset when debited for recoverable purchase and accounts payable taxes or a liability when treated as a contra account to sales tax payable The default accounts are specified in Domain Account Control 36 1 but you can override them
372. s are based on the weight of each unit or on the total weight of the items that use this freight list Valid entries are UNIT Freight charges are calculated for individual units based on each unit s shipping weight BULK Freight charges are calculated based on the total weight of applicable items Weight is calculated for each order line as the unit weight multiplied by the line item quantity Trailer Code This value links a freight list with the appropriate GL account to use when charging amounts on the sales quote sales order or pending invoice trailer FAQAD 208 User Guide Master Data Fig 6 19 Freight Zone Maintenance 2 20 4 FAQAD Note If the trailer codes you associate with freight lists are not the same as the default trailer codes in Sales Order Control you must set Use SO Freight List Trailer Code to Yes in Sales Order Control Otherwise errors display and freight is not calculated in order maintenance programs Freight Mode An optional code that can be used to describe the transportation method Define values in Generalized Codes Maintenance for field fr_mode Freight Zone Maintenance The distance an item is shipped can be an important factor in determining an order s freight charges Use Freight Zone Maintenance 2 20 4 to set up geographical areas related to freight lists Relate zones to sites by specifying values in the Site field Freight Zone Maintenance Freight List unIT P
373. s of text and associate it with a PCO Another submenu offers two options Add Modify Delete PCO Text Data Enables entry of transaction comments for a PCO Copy Text from Master Comments into PCO Enables master comments to be attached to the requested PCO You can enter the master reference and type in a pop up frame or leave the fields blank to display a selection list of existing master comments Select one or more of them for copying into the PCO Fig 4 19 PCO PCR Function Maintenance Menu Tip Define master comments with Master Comment Maintenance 1 12 FAQAD 124 User Guide Master Data Tip You cannot add new item numbers with this function Fig 4 20 Add Modify Delete PCO Item Data AQAD You can use master comments to create reusable text templates that can be pulled into change documents and then edited They might include legal disclaimers checklists standard operating procedures company policies or internal surveys Maintaining Item Records Select Item Data Maintenance to enter changes in item master data Item site data item planning data inventory data cost and price data cannot be updated Only data specified with Item Data Maintenance 1 4 3 can be modified Another submenu offers two selections Add Modify Delete PCO Item Data Enables you to change item master data fields for an existing item Standard validation prevents the same item master from being changed by mor
374. s that are subject to these tax groups Implementing GTM 325 You can simplify setup of tax environments If all shipments to or from a tax zone are taxed the same way leave the tax zone blank You may be able to specify a sums into tax zone that encompasses many lower level zones Finally you can leave the tax class blank if the tax types apply to all customers and suppliers in the indicated tax zones Each tax type in the environment has a calculation sequence and rounding method The sequence determines the priority for calculating taxes when there are multiple tax types in the environment The rounding method determines how the tax type is rounded Example Suppose that shipments that start and end in the U S state of Florida can be subject to 1 state tax only 2 state and county tax or 3 state county and city tax Sample tax environments are illustrated in Tables 12 3 through 12 5 The tax types apply to all tax zone combinations in the environments Table 12 3 Ship From Zone Ship To Zone Tax Class Tax Type Sequence Rounding Default Florida State Tax FL FL FL STATE 1 2 Envitonm nt 1 DRUG FOOD Table 12 4 Ship From Zone Ship To Zone Tax Class Tax Type Sequence Rounding Environment for Cities Subject to FL FL ALTSP amp FL STATE 1 2 Florida Tax and FL FL LMARY DRUG FL SEMCO 2 2 oo County FL FL LONGW FOOD FL FL SANFO FL FL WINSP Table 12 5 Ship From Zone Ship To Zone Tax Class Tax Type Sequence Rounding Environ
375. sactions on page 171 for more information Enter supplier lot numbers on purchase order receipts See Supplier Lot Numbers on page 171 for more information Make reports using lot numbers as an index When implementing lot control be aware of the following restrictions Lot control cannot enforce lot uniqueness across multiple databases Multiple database customers should integrate policies to maintain lot number uniqueness for each database Lot numbers cannot be reused If you make an error during lot number assignment delete the record for that lot number in Lot Master Maintenance 1 22 1 and then reassign it FAQAD 162 User Guide Master Data Fig 5 10 Lot Control Work Flow FAQAD The system cannot correct duplicate lot numbers assigned prior to lot control activation Delete duplicate lot numbers using Lot Master Delete Archive 1 22 23 Lot Control Work Flow Define lot control levels Figure 5 10 shows a typical work flow for setting up and managing lots t Delete duplicate lot numbers Assign lot groups to items Build lot master file records based on transaction history Define lot groups for automatic numbering Receive items on work orders Update inventory attributes and manage expired inventory as needed To implement lot control define defaults in Compliance Control for purchase orders work o
376. scribes how to implement them Situation Implementation Customers and or suppliers in a tax zone are subject to different tax types or tax exemption types Product lines and or items are subject to different tax types or tax exemption types On sales transactions trailer charges are subject to different tax types or tax exemption types Customers and or suppliers are subject to different tax rates for a tax type Set up tax classes for these customers and or suppliers Items are always subject to the tax types in the line item tax environment There is no way to override this You can set up tax classes for product lines and items However they are only used to select tax rates Trailer charges are always subject to the tax types in the transaction tax environment There is no way to override this You can set up tax classes for trailer charges however they are only used to select tax rates Set up tax usages for these customers and suppliers Fig 12 3 Tax Type Maintenance 2 13 1 1 Table 12 2 Tax Classes vs Tax Usages FAQAD 322 User Guide Master Data Fig 12 4 Tax Class Maintenance 2 13 1 5 Fig 12 5 Tax Usage Maintenance 2 13 1 9 FAQAD Situation Implementation Items are subject to different tax rates fora If items have the same rates on all tax type transactions set up tax classes However if rates can differ by transaction based on the intended usage of the
377. scription This works best when you ensure that descriptions are consistent with each other Browses can be easily customized to sort by any field FAQAD 16 User Guide Master Data FAQAD ltem Unit of Measure The item unit of measure pt_um is used for inventory balances product structures manufacturing orders planning and reporting Values can be defined with generalized codes Different areas of a company may handle an item using different units of measure For example an item may be moved in pallets but sold by the box For these cases set up alternate units of measure and conversion factors in Unit of Measure Maintenance 1 13 When items are handled in different units of measure on purchase orders sales orders and inventory transactions the system automatically converts the quantities from an alternate unit of measure to the item unit of measure using the predefined conversion factors In most cases either unit may be entered on transactions The formula for alternate unit of measure is Standard UM Conversion Alternate UM Grouping Fields If grouping items by product line does not satisfy the planning and reporting requirements of all company departments the item type and group fields can also be used to group items Both fields are used in the planning and sales modules The item type is also used for product costing functions and cycle count reporting The promo group indicates an item is priced usin
378. se internal and external references to help match invoices from logistics suppliers to pending vouchers Logistics Accounting Programs Table 7 3 lists the programs used in Logistics Accounting Menu Number Description Program Name 2 15 Logistics Accounting Menu 2 15 1 Logistics Charge Code Maintenance lalcmt p 2 15 2 Logistics Charge Code Inquiry lalciq p 2 15 4 Terms of Trade Maintenance latotmt p 2 15 5 Terms of Trade Inquiry latotiq p 2 15 7 Log Charge Pending Voucher Maint lapvomt p 2 15 13 Inbound Account Maintenance laiacmt p Menu Number Description Logistics Accounting 219 Program Name 2 15 14 Inbound Account Inquiry 2 15 16 Outbound Accrual Account Maint 2 15 17 Outbound Accrual Account Inquiry 2 15 19 Outbound Expense Account Maint 2 15 20 Outbound Expense Account Inquiry 2 15 24 Logistics Accounting Control 28 21 Logistics Charge Delete Archive 28 17 13 Logistics Charge Variance Report 28 17 14 Open Logistics Charges Report laiaciq p laoacrmt p laoacriq p laoexpmt p laoexpiq p lacpm p aplaup p laaprp01 p laaprp02 p Note For convenience the programs for defining and reporting logistics accounts are also located on the Logistics Charge Account Menu 1 2 21 with other product line detail accounts Modified Programs When Logistics Accounting is enabled additional fields and frames display in the programs listed in Table 7 4 The Inbound Outbound column in the table indicates if the progr
379. sed on the terms of trade assigned to the purchase order When the receiving site is responsible for a logistics charge payment the logistics charge is accrued since the charge is payable to a third party logistics supplier not the item supplier Logistics charges are not accrued when they are the responsibility of the item supplier Use Terms of Trade Maintenance 2 15 4 to define each logistics charge associated with a purchase and indicate whether you the customer or the item supplier is responsible for the logistics charge payment Each terms of trade record can include all of the logistics charges associated with a purchase with the responsible party assigned to each logistics charge FAQAD 238 User Guide Master Data Fig 7 13 Terms of Trade Maintenance 2 15 4 gt See Setting Up Supplier Addresses on page 192 FAQAD Terms of Trade Maintenance Terms of Trade EXW Description Ex Works Description Responsibility Inbound Duty Customer Freight Customer Insurance Customer Miscellaneous Charges Customer Description Responsibility Miscellaneous Charges Terms of Trade Enter an 8 character code identifying the terms of trade Description Enter a brief 24 characters description for the terms of trade Charge Enter a logistics charge code to include in these terms of trade Description This field displays the description defined in Logistics Charge Code Maint Responsibility Assig
380. sed with a freight charge Set up weight boundaries to include all potential shipping weights Normally the freight charges apply to the boundary weight However in two cases this is not true If you enter a minimum weight of 0 zero the freight calculation excludes the minimum boundary weight Freight is never calculated if the actual shipping weight is 0 If you set up overlapping ranges so that the maximum of one range is the same as the minimum of the next range the higher range takes priority For example if 1 5 pounds is charged 10 and 5 10 pounds is charged 15 15 is applied to a weight of 5 FAQAD 210 User Guide Master Data b See Updating Freight Terms on page 245 FAQAD Freight Charge Indicates a flat rate per shipment The amount to be charged per order or per item as determined by the Type field in Freight List Maintenance Freight Charges Per UM Over Minimum Indicates a surcharge over minimum The freight charge per unit of measure over the minimum listed for this freight list in the Minimum Weight field This is calculated per order or per item based on the Type field in Freight List Maintenance Freight Charge Per Freight List UM Indicates a weight based fee The freight charge for the unit of measure specified for the freight list in Freight List Maintenance Use any combination of these three types when defining freight charges You can charge a flat rate plus a rate based on weight
381. several Intrastat codes and an Intrastat control program These codes and settings are used during sales and purchase order processing Figure 8 1 shows a general work flow for Intrastat Fig 8 1 __ General Intrastat Y Work Flow Implement Intrastat Reprint Intrasta t declarations Record Intrastat data at order entry automatically creating Intrastat history records Optionally create Intrastat history records manually Print Intrastat declarations Look up Intrasat history information Delete archive obsolete records Data from this task flows into Intrastat History Data for this task comes from Intrastat History FAQAD 266 User Guide Master Data Fig 8 2 Intrastat Implementation Work Flow Fig 8 3 Intrastat Code Setup FAQAD Implementing Intrastat Set up Intrastat codes Set up addresses for declarants and agents Set parameters and defaults for Intrastat processing Set up commodity codes Setting Up Intrastat Codes Enter valid codes for flow indicators Enter valid codes for terms of delivery Enter valid codes for types of transactions Activate country codes for EU countries Figure 8 2 outlines typical steps for implementing Intrastat Lo d Associate Intrastat data with specific items Set up address records for each shipping and receiving site involved i
382. sses are used in Purchasing Accounts Payable Service Support Management and other functions Addresses 193 Supplier addresses like customer addresses determine default field values and affect how supplier transactions are processed in the system Remit to addresses are used when payments created in Accounts Payable must be sent to an address different from the supplier address Each supplier can have only one remit to address Fig 6 9 Supplier Maintenance Supplier Address 2 3 1 Supplier 50000000 Temporary Name Address Address Address B City jona State ca 1 Post 90028 Format o P Country United States of America lusa P County Telephone ext 222_ 2 Ext Fax Telex 2 Added Ez oov Supplier Data Sort Name Hydroxco Gas Processors Inc Type DIST Pur Acct 5100 AP Account 2100 Ship Via AMTRAK Remarks ONLY GRADE ZERO SHIPMENTS ACCEPTED Setting Up Employee Addresses Use Employee Maintenance 2 7 1 to enter employee address records At least one employee record is required for the Shop Floor Control and Repetitive modules Employee records must be created before defining engineers in the Service Support Management module FAQAD 194 User Guide Master Data Fig 6 10 Employee Maintenance 2 7 1 Fig 6 11 Country Code Maintenance 2 14 1 Tip The European Community EC and other areas may require numeric codes FAQAD Employee Address Employee JGW
383. ssion reports calculate amounts from net sales prices or gross margins net price less standard cost on posted invoices Commissions are not reported from debit credit memos Salesperson Address ij State P Post 75007 Formato P Country France Ci cony Sd Attention o 2 Telephone 2 22 24 11 ext v OoOO O ext rovro RR i ASE B D O Q Set up salesperson codes before setting up customer codes Up to four default salesperson codes and commission percentages can be associated with each customer These associations are used as defaults in Sales Quotations Sales Orders Invoices Service Support Management and Accounts Receivable Addresses 185 Tip Use Sales Analysis functions to establish monthly quotas and generate quota reports See User Guide Distribution A Fig 6 3 Salesperson Maintenance 2 5 1 FAQAD 186 User Guide Master Data b See Creating Reserved Locations on page 192 for information on setting up reserved locations for customers FAQAD Use Salesperson Payments Report 2 5 16 to review paid invoices and unapplied payments sorted by salesperson Setting Up Customer Addresses Customer addresses are used for sales quotations sales orders invoices and in accounts receivable They are also used for service support documents such as calls contracts and return material authorizations RMAs Values associated with customer addresses determine default valu
384. ssociated with this price structure This field can be left blank Since each item in the system belongs to a product line pricing by product line lets you set up price structures for a group of items so that you do not have to enter them individually Item Number Enter an item number if this price applies only to this item Leave blank to set up price structures by product line or for all items Price lists by item are often used to set up foreign currency prices enabling you to enter a specific base price for an item stated in terms of another currency This also lets you define different prices at each site Item prices are also used if you offer special pricing to a customer for only one or a few items whether specific prices discounts or markups FAQAD 92 User Guide Master Data FAQAD UM The unit of measure associated with this price list structure This field can be left blank if the pricing applies to any unit of measure Unit of measure is useful for defining special prices based on the unit of measure of the transaction Start Expire Enter dates if the list should only be considered effective for a defined period of time If blank the system considers the prices to be effective indefinitely Amount Type L P D M Determines whether the price list is a list price table or discount table L List price table P Discount table net price D Discount table discount M Discount table markup Item Mast
385. st update does not occur Logistics Accounting 237 Updating Item Costs Use Item Element Cost Maintenance 30 17 5 Item Cost Maintenance 1 4 9 Item Site Cost Maintenance 1 4 18 or Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 to add logistics cost elements associated with logistics charges to purchased items in the GL cost set and enter this level logistics costs for those items You must enter GL cost values in order to accrue logistics charges during purchase receipts Add the same cost elements to the current cost set when the last cost method is used for current costs The value of the current cost will be updated when logistics charges are vouchered if Current Cost from AP is Yes in Inventory Control Defining Terms of Trade Terms of trade define both the logistics charges associated with purchasing items from external suppliers and the party responsible for paying each These trade terms are specific to the purchase of items and define the obligations of the customer and seller for the delivery of goods Terms of trade are also referred to as Inco Terms Inco Terms are defined by the International Chamber of Commerce and used in international contracts Terms of trade only apply to the logistics charges associated with the delivery of goods not the terms of payment for those logistics charges Define payment terms in Credit Terms Maintenance 2 19 1 During purchase receipts the system determines which logistics charges to accrue ba
386. ster Data P See Inventory Status Codes on page 39 AQAD Reserved Locations and Inventory Status Codes The management of inventory in a reserved location depends on assigning an appropriate inventory status code to the location Important Since all inventory detail records in the location must have the correct status code you should create new locations for the reserved inventory Set up the status code in Inventory Status Code Maintenance 1 1 1 before assigning it to the new location in Location Maintenance e Set Available to Allocate to No This prohibits allocating inventory from reserved inventory to undesignated customers This setting does not affect customers who have been assigned a reserved location e Set Nettable to No This excludes reserved inventory from Materials Requirement Planning MRP functions Otherwise the system counts reserved inventory in its planning functions and inventory shortages for other customers may occur Set Overissue to Yes or No depending on your inventory management policy on issuing inventory from a location that has a Zero or negative inventory balance Set uprestricted transactions for all non sales order transactions This prohibits non sales order transactions for reserved locations inventory For example apply restrictions to work order component issue DRP shipments RMA shipments issue and receipt transactions and others that may allow other order functions to acc
387. ster Maintenance 1 4 1 Item Inventory Data Maintenance 1 4 5 Item Master Copy 1 4 12 Fig 5 15 M Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 Item Number 88 4000 Description PLASTIC PELLETS UM KG MIL 999 001 Item Data Prod Line 4000 Item Type RAW Drawing 88 4000 Added 11 14 1991 Status AC Rev AA Design Group Group RAW Drawing Loc Promo Group PG1 Price Break Cat Item Inventory Data Item must be ABC Class P ava mmp i Cyc Cnt Int 120 lot controlled aut ue 1 i P Allocate Single Lot Enable Location Tee P Key Item automatic Auto Lot Numbers PO Rept Status P Active numbers and LotGrowpjpUK P WoRctStaus P Active Article Number ooo define format oo Three fields affect automatic lot numbers Lot Serial Control Automatic lot numbering only works with lot controlled items set to L It does not work with serial controlled items Auto Lot Numbers Yes activates automatic lot numbering for this item if L is selected in Lot Serial Control FAQAD Compliance 169 Lot Group An optional lot group format If Lot Group is blank Lot See Automatic Serial Control is L and Auto Lot Numbers is Yes work orders are TEE ta assigned a lot number equal to the Work Order ID However lot numbers must be entered manually on purchase order and repetitive receipts in this case Creating Automatic Lot Numbers When receipts are created for purchase orders and work orders
388. story records that have not been reported on a final declaration FAQAD Reference Date and Site Enter a range of reference dates or sites for Intrastat history records to be included in the declaration Print Intrastat Declaration Arrivals and Dispatches Enter Yes in both fields to print both kinds of declarations Trial Final Enter Trial to print a draft of the declaration Enter Final to print the declaration in final form The system prompts you to confirm that the declaration printed correctly Choose No to reprint the document Choose Yes to update selected Intrastat history records so they are not included on another declaration Records are updated as follows Reference to the declaration on which the record was reported Period Submit Date and Declarant field Reported invoice value and statistical value Reported field is set to Yes Intrastat Declaration ID is added to each declared record Summary Detail Enter Summary to print a summary report organized by the following Commodity Code Terms of Delivery Nature of Transaction Country of Dest Disp Mode of Transport Country of Origin Port of Arr Disp Region of Origin Dest Port of Transshipment Statistical Procedure Enter Detail to print each record as an individual line item Year Period Declarant Agent Specify for which year period month of year submit date declarant and agent you are printing the Intrastat declaration In
389. stribution Orders When Logistics Accounting is not active you cannot associate freight data with distribution orders When Logistics Accounting is active you can specify freight terms and lists in an additional frame Figure 7 22 illustrates the frame that displays for input of freight data in Distribution Order Maintenance 12 17 14 Freight Data Freight ut 1P Freight Minimum weight BE Freight Terms IP Calculate Freight Display Weights 7 O S These fields are similar to the freight fields that display in Sales Order Maintenance When you set Display Weights to Yes the system displays a freight frame for each line item In this frame you can override the Freight Class and Freight Ship Weight that defaults from the item master The freight terms code determines whether you are prompted for a logistics supplier In distribution orders only some freight term types have significance Since freight terms only apply to distribution orders when freight accrual is involved type 4 Collect or type 6 WillCall have no meaning Type 5 include also has no meaning for DOs since no item pricing is involved When using Logistics Accounting in distribution orders select one of the following freight term types 1 ADD Freight is calculated and accrued by shipment 2 ALLOW Freight is calculated and a negative amount is accrued by shipment 3 PREPAID Freight is calculated and accrued by line Logistics Accoun
390. sts that cannot be combined with any other price lists The best discount the system arrives at is one of the following best base price plus all combinable discounts best base price plus the best base combinable price list and the best exclusive price list Markup and net price lists must be of combination type base or exclusive List price tables provide pricing history and set minimum maximum prices They are the foundation for the pricing logic For pricing structures with an Amount Type of list price the combination type does not apply They must be set up with a Comb Type of combinable Price List Candidates The system finds candidates by matching the customer number and the item number on a sales order with the customer code and the item code on the price lists A match is found if all of the following conditions are true Customer code on the price list equals The customer entered on the order Any customer analysis code associated with this customer Blank indicating the price list applies to all customers FAQAD 64 User Guide Master Data gt See Other Pricing Elements on page 62 FAQAD tem code on the price list equals The item number entered on the order Any item analysis code associated with this item number Blank indicating the price list applies to all items The order currency and price list currency are the same The start and end dates are effective Break Categorie
391. surance Miscellaneous Charges Log Supplier Enter the third party supplier for this logistics charge Logistics Accounting 243 Processing Purchase Receipts During purchase receipt processing in Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 or PO Shipper Receipt 5 13 20 a pending voucher record is created for each logistics charge associated with a purchase receipt that is your responsibility Note PO Fiscal Receiving 5 13 16 does not perform a PO receipt or create pending vouchers After using this program to set up a shipper you must use PO Shipper Receipt to actually receive the items on the shipper Receiving PO line items Creates pending vouchers for logistics charges Creates GL transactions for the logistics charge accrual amounts Calculates tax on logistics charges When a pending voucher is created in Purchase Order Receipts the receiver number is used as the internal reference and the packing slip number is used as the external reference Pending vouchers created in PO Shipper Receipt use the shipper number as the internal reference and the carrier shipment reference from the PO shipper as the external reference For each PO line received into inventory the system checks each cost element for that line item in the Material or Overhead category in the GL cost set If the cost element is linked to a logistics charge code belonging to the PO terms of trade and the charge is your responsibility a pending voucher is automati
392. t Enter 0 to have the postal code appear after the city state or province Enter 1 to have the postal code appear before the city state or province Multiple Enter Yes to enter up to four salesperson codes FAQAD 188 User Guide Master Data Fig 6 5 Customer Data Frame b See Chapter 3 Pricing for more details FAQAD Type Region Class Enter types and regions to be used for sales analysis reporting Enter classes to indicate customer priority as when not all orders can be filled Currency Language Associate currencies and languages with customers located in different countries Language codes enable you to access foreign language comments Define currency codes in Currency Maintenance 26 1 and exchange rates in Exchange Rate Maintenance 26 4 Site This is the default ship from site for this customer Typically enter the site closest to the customer Customer Data Set up additional data for each customer The system uses this information during order entry Customer Data Taxable Class Price wi 2 sic Disc Toi fto Partial OK 4 Fixed Price wu Su Price and Discount Table These provide defaults for scheduled orders only Sales orders use the best pricing model Fixed Price Enter Yes to indicate that prices negotiated with the customer are fixed Enter No to indicate that prices negotiated with the customer are not fixed Prices not fixed are subject to
393. t Control Level is 0 none of the lot control features work 2 1 Y Y Items with the same item number cannot have the same lot number orders are restricted to a single lot by default the lot number field in work order attributes is inaccessible and the item is auto numbered 3 2 Y Y Lot numbers across all items must be unique The remainder is the same as example 2 Compliance 165 Lot Auto Control Single Lot Lot Example Level Lot No No Effect 4 1 N Y Items with the same item number cannot have the same lot number orders are not restricted to a single lot by default the item is auto numbered and the lot number value in work order attributes is set by the system and cannot be changed 5 2 N N Lot numbers across all items must be unique orders are not restricted to a single lot by default the lot number field in work order attributes is accessible and the item is not auto numbered Building Lot Master Records You must run Lot Master Build 1 22 22 whenever Lot Control Level is changed from 0 to either 1 or 2 Archived records are loaded back into the inventory transaction history table Lot Master Build creates lot master records based on inventory transaction history These records represent a historical list of all lot and serial numbers used in the system Whenever you assign a new lot or serial number and Lot Control Level is 1 or 2 the system automatically updates the lot master Fig
394. t Tip results in PCRs and PCOs being rerouted to this group Lower ia er Pee numbers mean that minor defects are rerouted to this group If you are prevent needless not using severity levels enter zero review and 8 y 2 streamline the PCO The system reroutes a PCO to a group whenever the group in question approval process has approved the change document and The change document is rejected by another group on the routing slip that has reroute authority Can Re Route is Yes and The rejecting group sets the reroute level to a number greater than or equal to the severity level in this field Can Re Route Enter Yes to indicate that this group has the authority to reroute a PCO when they reject it To effectively disable rerouting enter No for all routing slips Important Disabling rerouting means that every group on a routing must reapprove a corrected document Notify When Next Check this box to have the system notify each group when it is next based on sequence number in an approval routing Users to notify should have valid e mail addresses Routing Slip Copy Create new routing slips based on existing routing slip templates in Routing Slip Copy 1 9 1 7 Fig 4 14 Routing Slip Copy 1 9 1 7 Description Severity List Users E mailed At Submit bern The list of users to notify at submission and approval defaults from the source routing and can be modified When you press Go you are prompted to copy the
395. t at implementation the restricted status is replaced with an active one e Direct Item Master Access Enables you to add a new item number and or enter item master data directly into the production database This is the only function in PCO Maintenance that directly affects production records All others build data for incorporation after an approval process Item numbers are created in real time rather than in the engineering work space since important functions may require that they exist before the PCO is released Impact analysis and the creation of a quotation request are examples of functions that depend on the existence of item numbers Maintaining Product Structure Records To use these functions Product Structures must be Yes in Enable PCC Structure Maintenance 13 13 22 Otherwise Structure Data Maintenance is not available from the Select PCR PCO Section submenu Select Structure Data Maintenance to enter product structure additions changes and removals Formula controlled items must be updated in Formula Data Maintenance Another submenu offers four selections Copy Product Structure into PCO Copies product structure records into the PCO to serve as a basis for further modification Displays the current indented bill of material for a given parent item through a Tip Revision levels can be skipped but cannot be specified in descending sequence Tip This function is just like Item Data Maintenance 1
396. t codes are entered consistently by entering the allowed codes into Generalized Codes Maintenance 36 2 13 for field so_stat Check Credit Hold If Yes the system checks the customer Hold field before clearing the Action Status of an order If the Hold field is Yes indicating the customer is on credit hold the Action Status of orders is not cleared Hold Over Credit Limit If Yes the system compares the customer balance to the customer credit limit The customer balance includes open invoices and optionally open sales order amounts If the customer balance is less than the predefined credit limit and the action status is blank the order is not placed on hold Check Past Due Invoices Used in combination with the Automatically Set Action Status field If both are Yes then sales orders for customer with credit problems are automatically placed on hold by setting the action status to the value specified Otherwise sales orders are simply listed with all the credit status information Include Sales Orders If Yes the system adds open sales order values to open invoice totals in determining the credit limit See the description for Hold Over Credit Limit Days The number of days after which the system considers an invoice past due when checking past due invoices Amount The maximum total invoice amount allowed to be overdue after which the system places orders on credit hold for past due invoices Combine Sales Orders If Yes th
397. t element is linked to a logistics charge code belonging to the PO terms of trade and the charge is your responsibility the value of the cost element is excluded from the PO unit cost If you change the terms of trade or assign a different code to the PO the system does not recalculate unit costs for existing line items You can manually update the PO unit cost of each line item or use Purchase Order Cost Update 5 19 to automatically recalculate and update the unit costs Example Table 7 9 shows how the unit cost of an item on a PO line is calculated when price lists are applied In this example the PO line item has a Material cost element with a value of 10 and a Freight cost element in the Material cost category with a value of 1 in the GL cost set The PO terms of trade indicate that the customer is responsible for freight Price Price List PO Net Unit List Amount Type Value PO Unit Cost PO Discount Cost PL1 L list 11 50 11 50 0 0 11 50 PL2 D discount 5 0 10 00 5 0 9 50 PL3 P price 6 66 10 00 33 4 6 66 PLA M markup 7 5 10 00 7 5 10 75 When PL1 is used the system uses the list price When PL2 PL3 or PL4 are used the system subtracts the value of the Freight cost element from the PO unit cost If Logistics Accounting is not enabled the PO unit cost is 11 PO Shippers When you use PO Shipper Maintenance 5 13 14 or PO Fiscal Receiving 5 13 16 to record PO line items and quantities listed
398. t parameters FAQAD 78 User Guide Master Data b See Pricing History on page 85 Fig 3 21 Pricing What If Inquiry 1 10 1 13 FAQAD Customer Orders by Price List Inquiry 1 10 1 15 displays the price lists used to price a customer s orders Sales Order Price Inquiry 1 10 1 17 displays pricing details for selected order lines Use Sales Order Pricing Report 7 15 7 to view pricing history records created for each change to an order line s pricing Pricing What If Inquiry Use Pricing What If Inquiry 1 10 1 13 to review what if pricing scenarios This inquiry does not apply to configured products with optionally configured components Customer Site Item Number 00 p Accum ayo Ord ayioo uM EA P Accum Amtiaoo Manual P Show Only Selected 7 Output terminal List Price 3 900 00 Discount 0 0 Net Price 3 900 00 Ext Amount 0 00 Customer Enter the customer address code or customer analysis code for price calculation Leave blank to calculate prices regardless of customer Site Enter the site code for price calculation Leave blank to calculate prices regardless of site Item Number Enter the item code or item analysis code for price calculation Leave blank to calculate prices regardless of item Unit of measure Enter the item unit of measure for price calculation or leave blank if price list applies to all units of measure Order Quantity Enter the number of line it
399. t price 61 discounted taxes 349 discounts 51 additive example 67 base 63 base combinable 63 cascading example 67 combinable 63 combination type 51 exclusive 63 pricing 80 quantity 81 sequence order 66 volume 51 81 volume discounts 51 distribution group 119 E EC Sales Listing 348 385 ECO See engineering change order ECO effective dates setting for PCOs 137 e mail during PCC routing 116 Employee Maintenance 194 employees 193 Enable PCC Formula Maintenance 107 Enable PCC Item Spec Maintenance 107 Enable PCC Routing Maintenance 107 Enable PCC Structure Maintenance 107 engineering change order ECO printing 107 replaced by PCC module 100 turning off functionality 107 entities general ledger GL 30 Site Maintenance 30 environments tax 324 error codes GTM environment 327 GTM tax zone 320 EU See European Union EU European Community EC 194 EC process work 336 EC sales list 336 348 European Union EU Country Code Maintenance 195 Intrastat reporting 263 exemptions 344 expire date changing 159 defined 153 inventory 151 expired inventory management 161 transactions 171 exploded nodes analysis codes 57 export PCR PCO 139 Export Control Classification Numbers 173 F factors 51 fixed interest credit limit calculation 191 fixed prices sales orders 81 Flow Indicator Maintenance 267 formats VAT registration 343 Formula Maintenance 100 formulas and assay 153 and grade 153 freezing inven
400. t price for the item using current data e You can review and modify the bill of material for an existing configured line item If you change the bill the cost and price are automatically recalculated You can update the discount account sub account cost center and project for an existing line item Table 3 4 summarizes the effect of the Reprice field on sales order lines Modify Sales Order For lines with manual For lines with automatically Line override price calculated price If Reprice Yes 1 No automatic calculation 1 Recalculate the best price 2 Allow update of price 2 Allow update of price If Reprice No No price updating No price updating Pricing 85 Reprice Field and the Sales Order Header Reprice works differently in the sales order header than in the sales order line When Reprice is Yes in the header Reprice is set to Yes for each line and cannot be changed Additionally setting Reprice to Yes in the header lets all order lines be candidates for repricing even if only one line item is entered or maintained This is useful where items are similar have the same break category or the same item number If Reprice is No in the header you can still reprice at the line level by setting Reprice to Yes for each relevant line Repricing and Manual Prices If you manually specify a price for a line item the system does not automatically change this price even if you request repricing To manually ad
401. t up shipping groups and inventory movement codes you can create formal shipping documents in distribution order shipping functions In this case you are not prompted for a shipment ID the shipper number is used instead Shippers During the confirmation process in Pre Shipper Shipper Confirm 7 9 5 or Pre Shipper Shipper Auto Confirm 7 9 7 a pending voucher is created and freight charges accrued based on the freight terms assigned to the first sales order attached to the shipper Each sales order attached to the shipper must have the same freight terms code otherwise an error displays Pending vouchers created during confirmation use the shipper number as the internal reference and the carrier shipment reference from the shipper as the external reference Unconfirming a shipper in Shipper Unconfirm 7 9 21 reverses the freight accrual created during confirmation FAQAD 252 User Guide Master Data b See User Guide Service Support Management B for details on RMAs FAQAD Return Material Authorizations RMAs RMAs are limited to the receipt of items returned by customers and the issue of replacement items In RMA Maintenance 11 7 1 1 you can receive items returned by a customer as well as ship replacement items back to the customer RMA Maintenance performs the functions of both RMA Receipts 11 7 1 13 and RMA Shipments 11 7 1 16 In all three programs you can define the logistics supplier and enter a shi
402. tat for details b See Chapter 9 Inventory Control for details b See Chapter 10 Physical Inventory for details gt See Section 2 Global Tax Management beginning on page 309 for details FAQAD Intrastat Intrastat offers data collection and reporting tools for companies doing business in European Union member countries and for companies requiring written documentation of inventory movement Intrastat collects history data whenever there is sales or purchasing activity then uses the data to generate Intrastat reports Inventory Control Inventory Control receives transactions from other system applications and provides balance and availability information where needed It tracks intersite transfers and their financial consequences such as cost variances and automatically posts intercompany transfers Physical Inventory Physical Inventory lets you conduct physical counts of all inventory items Global Tax Management GTM GIM offers precise tax calculations and flexible setup for calculating taxes for multiple countries With GI M you can set up an unlimited number of taxes and rates each associated with customers suppliers or items You can also define when taxes are calculated the formula used to calculate them and the amount subject to tax 10 User Guide Master Data FAQAD S two essentie Item records Sites 12 User Guide Master Data Fig 2 1 Items
403. tatus sales order repricing 82 activating compliance 147 Intrastat 268 additive discounts 51 Address Code Change 211 addresses 180 211 address relationships 181 banks 198 bill to 184 carriers 197 company 183 Index 389 GIM 341 customer 186 declarants and agents 267 employee 193 entity 183 Intrastat 272 list type 182 merging 212 printing on forms 184 salesperson 185 ship to 184 site GIM 341 supplier 192 tax reporting 184 advanced repetitive compliance effect 148 169 transactions inventory attributes 150 154 agent selecting for Intrastat print 280 aggregate taxes 344 allocate single lot 19 Allocated Inventory Inquiry 302 alternate product line accounts 27 amount type accrual 62 credit terms 62 discount 61 discount amt 61 freight list 62 freight terms 62 list price 61 list discount table pricing 92 markup 61 net price 61 Analysis Code Copy 59 Analysis Code Detail Build 57 Analysis Code Detail Inquiry 58 Analysis Code Detail Maintenance 58 Analysis Code Link Maintenance 56 Analysis Code Maintenance 54 Analysis Code Report 54 Analysis Code Selection Maintenance 55 Analysis Code Where Used Inquiry 58 analysis codes 52 59 Automatic AC Regen 51 automatic build 57 building 57 child 56 combining into groups 56 FAQAD 390 User Guide Master Data conditions 55 copying 59 customer conditions 55 item conditions 55 linking 56 parent codes 56 planning 50 rules 57 setting up 52 AP Tax b
404. tch is the tablet processing source Compliance 157 Fig 5 7 Inventory Status Example Tip If you have multiple batches on a single work order use a different receipt for each batch QAD 158 User Guide Master Data Fig 5 8 Batch Control Work Flow FAQAD that is packaged in various sized bottles each labeled with a lot number The lot number uniquely identifies the item in inventory traceable by work order receipt which in turn uniquely identifies the work order and its batch number Batch Control Work Flow Figure 5 8 shows a typical work flow for setting up and managing batches Activate compliance Receive work order updating transaction history Assign batch numbers to work orders Once compliance has been activated you can assign batch numbers to work orders directly in Work Order Maintenance or use Work Order Attribute Maintenance 1 22 4 When the work order is received the batch number is stored in inventory transaction history for later reporting Assigning Batch Numbers to Work Orders You will probably assign the batch number when you assign work order attributes during work order creation You can also use Work Order Attribute Maintenance 1 22 4 to assign numbers When you receive the items into inventory with Work Order Receipts 16 11 or Work Order Operation Backflush 16 19 batch numbers are recorded in transaction history You can review batch numbers using
405. te inventory sales work orders or purchasing by site All of the planning programs including product line planning resource planning MRP MPS and forecasting can be run by product line On sales purchasing and service support management transactions an item s taxable status defaults from the product line The system essentially operates on a standard cost basis although it can be used as an average cost system The product line GL accounts are oriented to standard cost accounting The values for these accounts default from Domain Account Control 36 1 The accounting department is usually responsible for approving these Product Line Maintenance Use Product Line Maintenance 1 2 1 to define product lines and their associated accounts Product Line Maintenance Product Line 100 Description pencil product Taxable 1 Tax Class Default Sub Account Override Default Cost Center Override Inventory Accounts Inventory Acct P Inv Discrep Acct p Scrap Acct Cost Revalue Acct 1550 P The Taxable and Tax Class fields determine how taxes are usually processed for items belonging to a product line GL accounts default from Domain Account Control You can accept the default values or enter different account sub account and cost center codes The Default Sub Account Cost Center and Override fields let you enter the same sub account or cost center code for all accounts in a product line These fields a
406. te the following fields Expired Inv Trans An inventory transaction type allowed for executing transactions on expired inventory for this item and lot number Lot UM An alternate unit of measure for this specific lot This field is for reference only Lot UM Conversion A factor for converting the Lot UM to the item unit of measure This field is for reference only Automatic Lot Numbering Use Lot Group Maintenance 1 22 13 to create lot groups defining the format for automatic lot numbering You can restrict lot groups to individual sites or they can apply to all sites Assign lot groups to items in Item Master Maintenance 1 4 1 Item Inventory Data Maintenance 1 4 5 or Item Master Copy 1 4 12 If a lot group record is altered or removed after lot numbers have been generated the continuity of lot numbers will be broken Additionally automatically generated lot numbers are not recycled if they are not used at the time they are assigned It is possible for gaps to appear in the sequencing of auto lot numbers if for example a receipt transaction is canceled before inventory is received Lot Group BULK Site 10000 Leading Characters BLK Sequence Length Sequence Numberii Trailing Characters Execution File gpauto01 p O Q Lot Group Assign a name to the automatic lot numbering format Name can be up to eight alphanumeric characters Site Enter a value if you want this lot group to be used at
407. tem Maintenance 175 Controlled Site Maintenance 175 controlled substances benefits 146 interaction with core QAD Enterprise Application modules 173 work flow 173 conversion Index 391 PCR to PCO 123 cooperative marketing 50 co products by products compliance 147 modifying receipts 147 copying analysis codes 59 PCOs from PCRs PCOs 122 PCOs to PCR PCO 122 price lists best prices 75 list discount table 94 tax rates 338 cost data 14 Cost Element Maintenance logistics charges 236 Country Code Browse 194 Country Code Maintenance 194 267 Country Code Report 194 country codes alternate 195 DEA country 195 defining for compliance 174 EC country 195 for company address 272 for customers and suppliers 273 GATT country 195 global tax management GTM 317 groups 195 NAFTA country 195 name 195 setting up 194 type 195 Country of Dest Disp field 268 county codes GTM 317 credit limit adjusting 191 calculating 191 checking in sales order repricing 82 methods of calculating 191 update 191 credit terms 200 adjusting entries not calculated 205 base date 201 base days 204 interest 201 price list 62 proximo 201 purchasing transactions 205 sales transactions 205 two levels 200 FAQAD 392 User Guide Master Data credit terms interest 203 204 default 204 Credit Terms Maintenance 200 204 proximo terms 202 currency price lists 69 Current Surplus Inventory Report 299 Customer C
408. tem has an expiration date you cannot issue the item after that date Item Inventory Data Avg int so 1P Cyc Cnt Int 120 00 Shelf Life 1 Allocate Single Lot O Location Type P Key Item Auto Lot Numbers PO Rept Status P Active Lot Grup 1P WO Rept Status P Active wu Q The following briefly explains how inventory control fields are used ABC Class This code classifies items by level of importance such as dollar value with class A being the most important The system uses the ABC class code with cycle counting You can add the code directly or leave it blank If left blank you can have the system calculate an item s ABC class code by running the Item ABC Status Report Update 1 5 9 or 3 6 3 Lot Serial Control This field determines whether the item must have a lot or serial number when you process receipts or issues for it If set to L Lot you cannot issue or receive the item without a lot number If set to S Serial you cannot issue or receive the item without a serial number If left blank lot serial numbers are not required for the item but you can record them if you want Note Additional lot serial control can be implemented if you are using the Compliance module Site Specify the site where you normally manufacture or store the item The site defaults from Inventory Control 3 24 but can be overridden Items Sites 19 Location This location displays as the default for i
409. ter To standardize presentation the documentation uses the following conventions Screen captures show the Desktop interface References to keyboard commands are generic For example choose Go refers to The Next button in NET UI The forward arrow in Desktop e F2 in the Windows interface Fl in the character interface In the character and Windows interfaces the Progress status line at the bottom of a program window lists the main Ul specific keyboard commands used in that program In Desktop alternate commands are listed in the right click context menu In the NET UI alternate commands are listed in the Actions menu For complete keyboard command summaries for each interface refer to the appropriate chapters of User Guide QAD NET User Interface User Guide QAD Desktop and User Guide Introduction This document uses the text or typographic conventions listed in the following table If you see It means monospaced text A command or file name italicized A variable name for a value you enter as part of an operating monospaced text system command for example YourCDROMDir indented A long command that you enter as one line although it command line appears in the text as two lines Note Alerts the reader to exceptions or special conditions Important Alerts the reader to critical information Warning Used in situations where you can overwrite or corrupt data unless you follow
410. ter tables using address codes as an index A cross reference table Is mstr describes the links between these tables and the centralized address table Address List Types Since addresses are stored in a common table the system automatically assigns each a list type code The list types in Table 6 2 are reserved for use by the system List Type Originating Function C S Bank Customer Supplier Bank Maintenance Carrier Carrier Maintenance Company Company Address Maintenance Customer Customer Maintenance Dock Dock Maintenance Enduser End User Address Maintenance Engineer Engineer Maintenance Our Bank Bank Maintenance Remit to Supplier Remit to Maintenance Ship to Customer Ship To Maintenance Slsprsn Salesperson Maintenance Supplier Supplier Maintenance To group addresses in other ways you can manually assign an unlimited number of additional list type codes to any address Use Address List Type Maintenance 2 9 to create your own address groups List types determine which addresses are included in look up browses and reports For example when presenting look up information in the Customer field of Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 the system includes only addresses with the list type Customer Addresses 183 Setting Up Company Addresses Use Company Address Maintenance 2 12 to set up addresses for each of your company sites Define at least one company bill to and ship to address for purchasing Fig 6 2 Compan
411. that contain items set up for automatic lot numbering the system generates a lot number according to the Lot Group format assigned to the item The lot number cannot be changed The following programs assign automatic lot numbers Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 RTS Receipts 11 7 3 13 Work Order Receipt 16 11 Work Order Receipt Backflush 16 12 Work Order Operation Backflush 16 19 Repetitive Labor Transaction 18 14 Backflush Transaction 18 22 13 Move Transaction 18 22 19 Note Rework and expense work orders cannot be assigned automatic lot numbers Single Lot per Receipt Receipts can be restricted to a single lot number by default on work Tip orders purchase orders and repetitive orders based on three settings in The single lot restriction can also Compliance Control 1 22 24 be selected during i order receipt Single Lot Per WO Receipt work order receipt regardless Pa the tting i Single Lot Per PO Receipt purchase order receipt Lope Control Single Lot Per REPET Receipt repetitive receipt To use single lot receipts Lot Control Level must be 1 or 2 and Lot Serial Control must be L or S for the item being received FAQAD 170 User Guide Master Data gt For more information see Automatic Lot Numbering on page 167 FAQAD If these criteria are met and Single Lot is Yes on the order or line being received Items received in the same transaction must have the sa
412. that of another user Available Groups Select a group to add the user to and choose Add Select multiple groups by holding down Shift during selection Selected Groups To deselect a group highlight it and choose Remove Product Change Control 113 Click Done when you are finished adding this user to groups Replacing Users in Groups Choose option 2 to replace users in groups The Replace User frame displays Fig 4 10 Maintain Users in Groups i Maintain Users in a Groups Replace ES 1 FS EE t User User ID tmd Tamara M Dillon Options 2 1 Add User 2 Replace User 3 Remove User Replace User Replace with User ID Expire Date Copies output Available Groups Selected Groups m i elecl Remove gt User ID Enter the user ID of the old user Heplace with User ID Enter the user ID of the new user Expire Date Copies Output Modify these user attributes as needed Tip You can modify a Available Groups The list box includes all groups to which the old pagis kv ue by user belongs Select a group and choose Add to move it to the a Son rg Selected Groups list Select multiple groups by holding down Shift ID fields during selection Selected Groups To deselect a group highlight it and choose Remove FAQAD 114 User Guide Master Data Removing Users from Groups Select option 3 to remove users from groups The Remove User
413. the instructions 7 l Tax Management GTM 8 6 User Guide Master Data Fig 1 1 Master Data b See Chapter 2 Ttems Sites for details b See Chapter 3 Pricing for details FAQAD Master data provide basic business information to other programs Figure 1 1 shows the programs discussed in this guide Global Tax Management Items Sites Pricing Product Change Control PCC Physical Inventory Inventory Base Module Control Compliance Addresses Logistics Accounting Items Sites Items and sites are the foundation of all system modules The master data in the Item Sites module define manufacturing and distribution sites inventory locations product lines and items Customer and supplier item numbers are also defined with pricing for each Unit of measure conversions defined here support entry of alternate units of measure in other transactions Pricing Pricing data supports automatic pricing by providing price lists during key transactions Two basic pricing models are used best pricing model and list discount pricing Introduction to Master Data 7 Product Change Control PCC Product Change Control PCC is a flexible information storage tool to control and monitor product changes from inception through implementation Item engineering data product structures routings formulas processes and item specifications can
414. the system e You can specify whether particular kinds of transactions can occur for individual items For example you typically inspect purchased items Use the PO Receipt Status field in Item Master Maintenance to assign items received on purchase orders a default status that restricts inventory transfers You can determine for sites and locations whether you can initiate particular transactions that affect them For example assign a scrap location an inventory status code that restricts issues You can also indicate whether particular transactions can be initiated using CIM load functions for items sites and locations Not every inventory transaction can be restricted Some system generated transactions are required to maintain data integrity Table 9 2 in Chapter 9 Inventory Control lists inventory transaction types and indicates which ones cannot be restricted Some transaction types are not listed in Table 9 2 These transaction types are used exclusively to prevent or allow actions in the system Since no inventory movement occurs a transaction history record is not created Table 2 3 lists these transaction type codes with a brief description and the name of one of the programs that creates the transaction Note Some of these transactions are created in more than one program In this case the table simply indicates a typical program associated with the transaction and is not intended to be a complete list
415. the tax rate applies equally to all item amounts Percent Recoverable Specify a recoverable tax percentage if you are able to offset some or all purchase tax amounts for this rate against the amounts for this rate that you collect on sales Otherwise leave set to 0 00 Tax Method Specify which calculation routine to use when this tax rate is applied The standard tax methods are 01 02 11 If you leave this field blank calculation method 01 is assumed If you are using the Sales and Use Tax Interface specify tax method 20 If you are importing tax amounts from an external system and do not want to recalculate them specify method 03 You can also define custom methods but be sure to follow the program naming convention b See Value Added Taxes VAT on page 348 b See Tax Based on Partial Item Amounts on page 345 b See Luxury Taxes on page 347 b See Capped Taxes on page 347 b See Recoverable Taxes on page 347 b See page 345 FAQAD 336 User Guide Master Data b See Correcting Transaction Tax Amounts on page 361 b See Reverse Calculated Taxes on page 351 b See Absorbed Taxes on page 351 FAQAD Update Tax Allowed Decide whether users can modify system calculated taxable base and tax amounts during transaction entry This feature is useful for overriding the system if there is a need to match amounts on manually issued documents However t
416. ting 249 Customer Scheduled Orders Logistics charges accrue on customer scheduled orders only when the ship to customer in Scheduled Order Maintenance 7 3 13 has a default freight list and freight terms code defined in Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 Charges accrue when the default freight terms indicate an accrual level of shipment or line Shippers When you use Container Workbench 7 7 1 or SO Container Maintenance 7 7 5 to create containers the first sales order line item sets the freight terms for the entire container The system verifies that items added from other order lines have the same freight terms as the first order line added These containers are then referenced on shippers using Sales Order Shipper Maintenance 7 9 8 or Pre Shipper Shipper Workbench 7 9 2 When you select sales order items for shipment you can update the logistics supplier associated with the attached sales order in the Logistics Accounting Detail frame shown in Figure 7 21 Each sales order attached to the shipper or container on a shipper must use the same freight terms otherwise an error displays The freight terms code assigned to the first sales order line is applied to the entire shipper Note You can combine sales order lines with and without freight lists on the same shipper or container Processing Shipments When you process a shipment the logistics charge code and the logistics supplier are displayed The supplier can be updated if
417. ting Tax Information on Documents 04 385 Tax Reports iones eer hey Er ety uere e er eee 8 385 Fixing Common Tax Problems 0 0 cece ee eee eee nee 386 i 387 xiii FAQAD xiv User Guide Master Data FAQAD About This 2 User Guide Master Data FAQAD This guide covers the modules and functions for setting up and managing date used throughout QAD 2008 Standard Edition Other QAD Documentation For software installation instructions refer to the appropriate installation guide for your system For conversion information refer to the Conversion Guide For instructions on navigating the Windows and character environments see User Guide Introduction For instructions on navigating and using the QAD NET User Interface see User Guide QAD NET User Interface For instructions on navigating and using the QAD Desktop interface see User Guide QAD Desktop For information on using the product refer to the User Guides For technical details refer to Entity Diagrams and Database Definitions To view documents online in PDF format see the Documents on CD and Supplemental Documents on CD Note Installation guides are not included on a CD Printed copies are packaged with your software Electronic copies of the latest versions are available on the QAD Web site For a complete list of QAD Documentation visit the QAD Support site Online He
418. tion Order Accrual Account Distribution Order Expense Account Distribution Order Variance Account 561 P Use Logistics Accounting Enter Yes to enable the functionality in the Logistics Accounting module When you enable Logistics Accounting additional logistics accounting fields are activated in other modules Match Blank Suppliers When No only pending vouchers with a defined logistics supplier display when logistics charges are selected for vouchering in Voucher Maintenance 28 1 The default is No Logistics Accounting 227 When set to Yes you can indicate during vouchering whether to See Include display pending vouchers with blank suppliers using the Include sha d Blank Suppliers field in Voucher Maintenance Accrual Account Expense Account Variance Account Enter the accounts sub accounts and cost centers used to track inbound logistics charge accruals expenses and variances These accounts provide the defaults in Logistics Charge Code Maint 2 15 1 Sales Order Shipment Sequence ID Enter the NRM sequence code used for sales order shipments The sequence code must have the target dataset la_so_ship_id Distribution Order Shipment Sequence ID Enter the NRM sequence code used for distribution order shipments The sequence code must have the target dataset la do ship id Sales Order Accrual Account Expense Account Variance Account Enter the accounts sub accounts and cost centers used to trac
419. tion for Sales Quote Maintenance 7 12 1 more information ders Pending Invoice Maintenance 7 13 1 SIDES RMA Maintenance 11 7 1 1 Distribution Order Workbench 12 17 13 Distribution Order Maintenance 12 17 14 and Distribution Order Processing 12 17 21 After you have finished entering order line items the logistics accounting detail frame displays when Logistics Accounting is enabled A freight terms code is specified on the order header The freight terms code indicates an accrual level of shipment or line A freight list is specified on at least one order line Fig 7 21 gt T 8 x Sales Order Sales Order Maintenance Maintenance Order 5010046 Sold To 1005000 Bill To 1006000 Ship To 1005000 Logistics Accounting Detail Frame Logistics Accounting Detail Description Log Supplier Name Domestic Freight Swift Transport Log Supplier Enter an address code identifying the freight carrier responsible for transporting this order This field cannot be blank If necessary you can change the supplier during shipment processing When logistics data exists on a sales quote or order this data is included by the following copy and release functions e Sales Quote Copy from Order 7 12 5 e Sales Quote Copy from Quote 7 12 6 e Sales Quote Release to Order 7 12 10 FAQAD 248 User Guide Master Data Fig 7 22 Distribution Order Maintenance Freight Data FAQAD Di
420. to PO 239 break categories 49 59 64 Break Category field 59 Build PO From Requisition 239 building analysis codes 57 lot master records 165 Bulk Tag Create 305 burden item cost category 22 Cc capped taxes 347 Carrier Maintenance 197 cascading discounts 51 category break 59 CIM interface inventory transfer 289 classes freight 208 tax 321 Closed AR Delete Archive temporary addresses 187 closing PCO to PCO 122 PCR PCO 139 codes vs master comments 17 combinable discounts 63 commissions 185 Commodity Code Maintenance 270 commodity codes 270 associating with a country 272 Company Address Maintenance 183 GTM requirements 341 Intrastat addresses 272 company addresses 1099 tax reporting 184 banks 183 converting tax info 341 country code field 272 purchase order 183 setting up for Intrastat 272 taxes 184 compliance 144 178 automatic lot numbers 167 Compliance Control 146 controlled substances 173 inventory attributes 149 lot control features 161 setting up 146 work order batch control 149 Compliance Control 146 Compliance Active field 147 component issue control benefits 145 restricting to BOM 172 compound interest credit limit calculation 191 configured items pricing 64 71 control program Compliance 146 Global Tax Management 339 Intrastat 268 Inventory 286 Logistics Accounting 225 Pricing 51 Controlled Authority Maintenance 174 Controlled Customer Maintenance 175 Controlled I
421. to as a parent code because Codes N and S are linked to it Codes N and S are referred to as child codes Fig 3 4 N Map of Example Region Codes Analysis code linking uses OR logic For example if code A links codes N and S any customer meeting the code N or code S criteria is included in code A Figure 3 5 outlines commonly used procedures for setting up and managing analysis codes Each procedure is discussed in detail in the sections that follow Fig 3 5 1 Analysis Code Work Flow Select analysis codes for deactivation Create and view analysis codes Create and view analysis code x View analysis code details conditions Create and view analysis code inke View analysis code reports Build tables based on analysis EFRA Copy analysis codes FAQAD 54 User Guide Master Data Fig 3 6 Analysis Code Maintenance 1 8 1 FAQAD Creating Analysis Codes Create analysis codes for customers and items in Analysis Code Maintenance 1 8 1 Use Analysis Code Inquiry 1 8 2 to view analysis codes Analysis Code Maintenance Type Customer Code DEM Description Original Equipment Manuf Active 4 Comments Type Valid values are item or customer Code Enter an alphanumeric code identifying a group of customers or items Description Enter a brief description of this particular code This displays in inquiry screens Active Ente
422. tory balances 305 freight charges 206 211 freight class 208 freight lists 207 freight terms 210 freight zones 208 logistics 250 Freight Charges Maintenance 209 Index 393 Freight Class Maintenance 209 Freight List Maintenance 207 freight lists price list 62 freight terms 210 price list 62 Freight Terms Maintenance logistics charges 245 Freight Zone Maintenance 208 G general ledger GL accrued tax at receipt 348 AP tax account 348 cost categories 22 GTM effects 362 tax accounts 331 General License Maintenance 177 general licenses defining 177 Generalized Codes Maintenance county codes 317 province codes 317 state codes 317 geographical area 50 Global Tax Management GTM addresses 184 calculating taxes custom methods 345 standard methods 345 concepts 313 correcting amounts 361 GL effects 362 implementing 315 limitations 313 logistics charges 233 partial item amounts 345 processing taxes 353 rounding methods 323 sample scenario 314 setup addresses 341 control program 339 country codes 194 customer tax data 342 customers 342 GL accounts 331 item tax class 343 tax bases 329 tax classes 321 tax environments 324 tax rates 332 FAQAD 394 User Guide Master Data tax types 320 tax usages 321 tax zones 317 tax calculation logic 354 tax data windows 356 tax exemptions 344 tax methods 345 troubleshooting 386 viewing tax amounts 359 Global Tax Management Control 339 country code 317 Tax Environment fi
423. trastat 281 Submit Date Defaults to the system date This date prints on the declaration Reprinting Intrastat Declarations Use Intrastat Declaration Reprint 2 22 20 to reprint declarations submitted in the past You have the option of reprinting in summary or detail regardless of how the original was printed Fig 8 15 Intrastat Declaration Reprint Mii Intrastat BUE AUR dee EUR LER a Declaration Reprint Declaration ip 2 22 20 Declarant Year Period Submit Date Flow Indicator Summary Detail Detail Form Code 01 Reporting Currency Output Batch ID Declaration ID Enter the ID of the declaration to be reprinted This is a unique identifier automatically assigned to all Intrastat history records included in a final Intrastat declaration This ID is printed on the Intrastat declaration Use Next Previous to scroll through history records to find the declaration you want to reprint Reviewing Intrastat History Information Four inquiries are available for reviewing Intrastat history information All show the same information but differ by search criteria and sort methods Use Intrastat Inquiry 2 22 14 to review Intrastat history records by transaction ID the sequence in which the system creates them Use Intrastat Inquiry by Invoice 2 22 15 to review Intrastat history records by invoice number Use Intrastat Inquiry by Voucher 2 22 16 to review Intrastat history records by voucher
424. trastat declarations 279 tax information 385 VAT registration numbers 340 processes PCR PCO update of 129 product change control PCC auto numbering 108 security 108 setting up 106 user IDs 107 product change order PCO adding modifying and deleting text data 123 FAQAD approval 105 133 auto numbering of 120 changing numbers 122 closing 139 closing PCO to PCO 122 copying from PCR PCO 122 copying to PCR PCO 122 data affected by 100 database 120 distribution 135 effective dates 102 137 evaluating impact on inventory 136 ID 120 implementation 106 138 importing and exporting 139 incorporating into production 138 incorporation 106 initializing 108 item data maintenance 124 item site data not maintained by 101 life cycle 103 104 master comment 123 multi database installations and 120 overview 101 prefixes for numbers 109 printers and batch IDs 108 process data maintenance 129 product structures in 125 release 135 release and distribution 105 reopening 130 rerouting 134 revision levels 125 routing for approval 105 132 security issues 140 text data maintenance 123 trailer maintenance 130 types of data in 119 viewing data 131 product change request PCR approval 104 life cycle 103 routing for approval 104 132 types of data in 119 product definition 5 11 Product Line Maintenance 27 productlines 24 28 accounts 25 alternate accounts 27 defining 24 Product Structure Maintenance 100 product structures maint
425. trol 2 ues bee ret ee eee oh Rack Rio ae es 161 Lot Control Work Flow 0 0 cece eee eee 162 Lot Control Relationships 0 0 cee eee eee ee eee 163 Deciding on Lot Control Level 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 164 Building Lot Master Records 00 0 e eee eee eee eee 165 Modifying Lot Master Records 0 0 0 ce eee eee eee 166 Automatic Lot Numbering 0 00 c eee eee eee eee 167 Single Lot per Receipt 0 0 eee eee 169 Supplier Lot Numbers 0 0 0 ee eee eee eee 171 Expired Inventory Transactions 0 0 c eee eee ee eee 171 Managing Component Issues 0 0st teens 172 Component Issue Control llle 172 Co product By product Component Issue Control 172 Managing Controlled Substances 0 0 0 eee eee eee 173 Entering Country Codes 0 0 eee eee eee eee 174 Entering Authority Codes 0 0 eee eee eee eee 174 Entering Control Numbers for Customers and Sites 175 Entering Control Numbers for Items 00 0 005 175 Entering General License Information 04 177 Entering Individual License Information 178 Chapter6 Addresses 00 0c cece ee eee eee 179 Introductio EE 180 Address List Types 2 cha cdaacdawwsowacaid classes ed 182 Setting Up Company Addresses 0 0 0 cece eee eee ee 183 Company Banks esee Eg ute ee oe ane a 18
426. txmethll p Same as method 01 but has a regressive calculation for reverse calculated taxes Tax Amount Tax Rate Item Amount 20 txmeth20 p Indicates that Quantum through the Sales and Use Tax API calculates taxes for each line item For custom programs the file naming convention is txmeth p where is the numeric identifier referenced in Tax Rate Maintenance Use an identifier from 50 to 99 identifiers 00 through 49 are reserved for QAD use To implement the custom tax method specify the identifier as the Tax Method in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 If the custom method is the default method for new tax rates also specify it in Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 Set up a value in generalized codes for the new method so that it displays in the look up on the Tax Method field in Tax Rate Maintenance Implementing GTM 347 Luxury Taxes Luxury taxes are assessed only on transaction amounts that exceed a specified minimum For example a 30 luxury tax may apply only to automobiles costing more than 30 000 Two settings in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 govern setup of luxury taxes Min Taxable This setting identifies the minimum amount subject to tax In the above example Min Taxable is 30 000 Tax Method For luxury taxes set Tax Method to 02 Whenever the transaction taxable base amount is less than the Min Taxable amount for the tax rate the final tax amount is zero Capped Taxes Capped taxe
427. u must use Purchase Order Returns to post the correct GL transactions to update the logistics charge accounts Accruing Outbound Logistics Charges After you have defined outbound accrual expense and variance accounts and assigned them to logistics charges you can begin the accrual process for outbound logistics charges Outbound logistics charges accrue during shipments Update freight terms Process shipments Updating Freight Terms Assign a logistics charge to each freight term with an accrual level in Freight Terms Maintenance 2 20 13 The system uses the type code to determine whether freight charges are accrued and if so at what level at the order line or for the entire shipment Fig 7 19 Outbound Accrual Work Flow b See Setting Up Freight Charges on page 206 for details on freight terms FAQAD 246 User Guide Master Data The level of accrual is determined as follows No Accrual When Type is 4 Collect or 6 Will Call logistics charges do not accrue A logistics charge cannot be assigned to either of these freight terms Accrue by Shipment When Type is 1 Add or 2 Allow logistics charges are accrued for the entire shipment Calculated freight amounts are tracked using the outbound accrual and expense accounts defined for the logistics charge code in Logistics Charge Code Maint 2 15 1 Accrue by Line When Type is 3 Prepaid or 5 Include logistics charges are accrued for e
428. ual price lists which might for example apply only once for a new customer Disc Sequence In conjunction with Comb Type specified a numerical value indicating the order in which the system applies price list discounts relative to other price list discounts with which it can be combined default is 10 0 A discount sequence can be decimal Print Enter Yes if the price list should be shown on associated sales order documents and invoices otherwise enter No The default is Yes Promotion Type Promotion These fields only have values if you are using the interface to Advanced Pricing Management Cost Set Applicable cost basis for markup price lists only Either blank if standard cost or the current cost set associated with the item being priced default is blank Comments Enter Yes to review or update remarks related to this price list Depending on the amount type of the price list you are editing the system displays a different frame Figure 3 16 illustrates the frame that displays when the amount type is Credit Terms Freight List or Freight Terms Min Qty Credit Terms 30 0 2 30 60 50 DUE 2 10N30 50 Ni Min Qty field Credit e EE Credit Terms 2 30 60 Terms field O Q Min Qty Enter a quantity or amount The Min Qty field changes to Min Amt if the Qty Type field is set to amount Credit Terms Choose a credit term The Cr Terms label changes to Frt Terms or Freight List depending on your selection in t
429. und logistics charges If the tax code associated with a logistics charge has Accrue Tax at Receipt set to Yes in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 the system creates the following GL transactions Debit AP Tax Recoverable for the logistics charge tax accrual amount Debit the inbound Variance account for the logistics charge tax variance amount Credit the inbound Accrual account for the tax accrual and tax variance amounts The tax accrual and tax variance values are calculated as follows Tax Accrual PO line receipt qty logistics charge cost element value tax rate percent recoverable Tax Variance PO line receipt qty logistics charge cost element value tax rate 1 percent recoverable Purchase Order Returns When a PO line item is returned for credit or replacement the system does not reverse the original accrued value of the logistics charges This is because some logistics charges like freight or insurance could be payable to a third party supplier regardless of whether the items are returned Logistics Accounting 245 When PO line items with associated logistics charges are returned using Purchase Order Returns 5 13 7 the system creates the following GL transactions Debit the inbound Expense account for the accrual value Credit Inventory for the same amount Important Do not return items with associated logistics charges by entering negative numbers in Purchase Order Maintenance Yo
430. unding method determines how tax amounts for the tax type are truncated The rounding method defaults from Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 but you can override it if the tax type requires a different method Type Description This field contains the tax type description In addition to the other tax environment codes set up an error code and specify it in Global Tax Management Control 2 13 24 When you enter a transaction GTM attempts to match the ship to ship from tax zones and customer or supplier tax class to a tax environment If it cannot find one it assigns the error environment To make it easier to identify error conditions set up a meaningful code such as ERROR ENVIRON Fig 12 8 Tax Environment Maintenance 2 13 5 1 Tax Types Sequences and Rounding Methods b See Tax on Tax on page 349 gt See Setting Up GTM Control on page 339 FAQAD 328 User Guide Master Data Fig 12 9 Trailer Tax Detail Maintenance 2 13 1 21 FAQAD Setting Up Trailer Charges Sales transactions often have additional charges such as freight service and labor that are independent of individual line items In the system these charges are known as trailer charges because they appear at the end of the transaction Each trailer charge has a default taxable status and an optional default tax class This information is defined in the trailer code record However in GIM you can also set up trailer charge
431. unt against sales tax payable Usually such taxes are already included in the item cost Purchasing transactions back calculate the tax from the item amount assuming you set up the supplier and tax rate records to support this The following section illustrates the GL entries if taxes were not included Inventory Items Figure 13 11 shows the GL entries for purchases of inventory items The tax point determines whether the update to AP Tax Recoverable occurs at goods receipt or invoice receipt Inventory items are items you purchase to use in manufacturing or to sell to customers FAQAD 370 User Guide Master Data Fig 13 11 eed GL Entries for Inventory Item Standard Cost Standard Cost Non Recoverable Tax Non Recoverable Tax Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Purchase Purchase Inventory Order Receipts Price Variance 100 00 1 100 00 10 00 10 00 Goods Receipt Entries created for received item cost 1 and tax 2 i me Purchase Accounts Mensa oe Order Receipts Payable niles pee E Hen 100 00 Ig 100 00 cost 3 and tax 4 10 00 H 10 00 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt Purchase Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts item cost 1 but not for tax 100 00 D 100 00 Purchase Accounts Voucher Confirmation Entries created for item Order Receipts Payable Inventor 00 10 cost 2 and tax 3 100 00 c err 0 0
432. unt pricing models to various orders QAD 48 User Guide Master Data Fig 3 1 Two Pricing Models FAQAD Supplier Purchase Return to Schedules Orders Supplier Customer Schedules RMA Receipts Sales Ord RMA Sales LJ Best Pricing Issues Quotes DA el J List Discount Pricing Using Best Pricing Best pricing or sales order pricing enables you to create price lists that accommodate a wide range of pricing situations Instead of matching price lists strictly through items or product lines the system can determine best prices using flexible categories of items and customers called analysis codes Figure 3 2 gives steps for setting up a typical sales order pricing operation Each step is discussed in detail in the sections that follow Pricing 49 Fig 3 2 Sales Order Pricing Plan analysis codes and price Work Flow lists mE Set up price lists Set pricing defaults Price orders Set up analysis codes Reprice orders Set up item price break categories Sales order pricing includes both the Analysis Code menu 1 8 and the gt For more SO SQ RMA Issues Pricing menu 1 10 1 Sales order price lists are eae ue used to price orders you create in Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 Sales User Guide SSM Quote Maintenance 7 12 1 and RMA Maintenance 11 7 1 1 Price B break categories allow volume price breaks for multiple items
433. unts 0 0 0 eee cece eee nee 295 ABC Class Code 2 sc eter a dees ba lee dyke Oe hye 295 Cycle Counting Procedure 0 0 0c eee eee eee 296 Creating Inventory Reports 0 0 0 c cece eee eens 298 Detail Allocation Inventory Report 0 0 00 200 0005 298 Stock Status Report 2 0 0 cee eee 298 Reorder Report Lose esce aao woe er edet UR cat 298 Item ABC Status Report Update 0 0 0 0 0 0020 298 Inventory Detail Report 0 0 eee eee 299 Inventory Detail by Location 0 0 eee eee eee ee 299 Current Surplus Inventory Report 0 0 00 eeeeeeeee 299 AQAD Contents Projected Surplus Inventory 0 cee eee ee eee eee 300 Inventory Valuation Reports 0 0 0 e eee eee ee eee 300 Stock Journal 2 2 1 5 tet dece peut wo due Mah tea 301 Device History Record Report 0 0 0 ee eee eee eee 301 Checking Inventory Availability 2 2 0 2 0 0 c cece eens 302 Chapter 10 Physical Inventory 0002 cece eee 303 Introduction ii seen bie en bee eue ach kb oe Ed ee ede ee ds 304 Deleting Archiving Old Tags 0 0 eee eee 304 Freezing Inventory Balances 0 0c cece eee ene 305 Creating Printing Tags 0 0 ee eects 305 Entering Initial Tag Counts 00 0 cee eee 306 Reviewing Results 1 5 2s sada cians darcivanddniad dad cian besa 307 Zeroing Voiding Unused Tags 0 0 cece eee eee 307 Updating In
434. up in Trailer Code Maintenance 2 19 13 You can set up trailer tax details for a maximum of 99 trailer codes However you can set up an unlimited number of trailer tax details per trailer code Tax Type Specify the tax type subject to special treatment for this trailer charge Taxable Specify whether amounts for this trailer code are taxable for the tax type tax class combination Tax Class If applicable enter the tax class subject to special treatment for this trailer charge Setting Up Tax Bases By default tax is based on 100 of the item amount exclusive of any other tax amounts However an item s tax can be based on some amount that is greater or less than the item amount In these situations set up a tax base record A tax base record is required whenever tax is based on a percentage of the item amount A tax base is also required whenever tax is based on the item amount plus a previously calculated tax amount This situation is sometimes called tax on tax Example In Brazil whenever you sell an old fixed asset and replace it with a new one tax is assessed on a percentage of the old asset s sale price In some Canadian provinces PST Provincial Sales Tax includes the GST Goods and Services Tax in the taxable base for PST Assign a tax base to multiple tax types and tax rates if the percentage of value is the same for all situations When you assign a tax type to a tax base the tax base becomes part of
435. urchase to use in manufacturing or to sell to customers Processing GTM 381 Fig 13 20 GL Entries for GL Entries for Inventory Item Inventory Item Average Cost Non Recoverable Tax Average Cost Non Recoverable Tax Accrual at Goods Receipt Tax 1 Purchase Inventory Order Receipts Inventory 100 00 D D 100 00 10 00 2 10 00 Goods Receipt Entries created for received item cost 1 and tax 2 m Purchase Accounts ica EE Order Receipts Payable ntries created for item 100 00 100 00 cost 3 and tax 4 10 00 4 amp 10 00 Tax Accrual at Invoice Receipt Goods Receipt t Purchase Entries created for received Inventory Order Receipts item cost 1 but not for tax 100 00 100 00 Voucher Confirmation p Purchase Accounts Entes created for mom Order Receipts Payable Inventory 10 cost 2 and tax 3 190 Jo ero 0 00 Variances Two kinds of variances occur during the purchasing accounts payable cycle AP usage variance and AP rate variance AP Hate and Usage Variances AP rate variance occurs when an item s invoice cost does not match its PO cost AP usage variance occurs when an item s invoice quantity does not match its PO quantity and you close the receiver line in the voucher Figure 13 21 and Figure 13 22 show GL entries for inventory items Entries for memo items update Expensed Item Rece
436. ution group data for a PCO in the trailer using the Trailer Maintenance menu The same information displays in PCR PCO Close 1 9 14 Fig 4 17 PCO Maintenance Section Menu FAQAD 122 User Guide Master Data Using PCR PCO Function Maintenance This program provides several utilities to support the copying and merging of PCOs and PCRs A submenu displays several choices Fig 4 18 PCO PCR Function Maintenance Menu Number PCO00007 ID Database PCO Type PCO Design Group ACCT1 Created By hme 06 12 2002 Title Major Redisgn of Coolers Reason major enhancement to the motor installed as part of the AASIS Cooler is required ta increase its comnetitive PCO PCR Function Maintenance Change PCO Number Close PCO To PCO Class Copy PCO From PCO PCR Originator Copy PCO To PCO PCR Change PCO Number Used to change the Number ID and or Domain fields of the PCO you are currently editing Enter new values for these fields to have the system execute the required change immediately Once completed the PCO can no longer be accessed using the old number ID domain values Close PCO to PCO Used to merge detail from the PCO currently being edited into another existing PCO then close the current PCO If the same item product structure or formula records exist in the target PCO the corresponding records are not copied Copy PCO from PCO PCR Used to copy all or part of the detail from anothe
437. ventory Balances 00 00 c ect e ees 307 Section 2 Global Tax Management 309 Chapter 11 Introduction to GTM Lleesssee 311 Global Tax Management 0 0c eee eee eee eee 312 Beatures ek ecb e Gear eta al sa OD PEG RR DR ee aor IU ERR a 312 Considerations see 222 ee CU en ore E Rer oe 313 lax Elements encres iii eni r E Hetero E RENE E ets 313 Chapter 12 Implementing GTM Llleesesee 315 Implementation Overview 0 cece eens 316 Setting Up Tax Jurisdictions llle 317 Setting Up Country Codes 0 0 eee eee ee 317 Setting Up State Province County Codes s usus 317 Setting Up Tax Zones slsseeeeee en 317 setting Up Tax Types us cere e p tee CRURA OIN a ae 320 Setting Up Tax Classes and Usages 0 0c cece eee eee 321 xi Xii User Guide Master Data Setting Up Rounding Methods seeeeeee eee 323 Setting Up Tax Environments 0 0 ccc ee 324 Setting Up Trailer Charges 20 0 0 eee eee eee 328 set ng Up Tax Bases sacris ea eds seed clan debo v dia wise canes 329 Setting Up GL Accounts 0 0 he 331 Setting Up Tax Rates cecene cerei deit eii tben ep eR eee RE EE 332 Tax Rate Maintenance seeesleeee es 333 Tax Rate Copy Update llle 338 Setting Up GTM Control leseeeeeee ee 339 Updating Other Records 0 eee eee eee 341 Company and Site
438. voucher if you processed the return after paying the supplier invoice Average Cost This section shows tax accruals for a simple purchase order and voucher first for recoverable taxes then for non recoverable taxes For average costing the system re averages item costs at both receipt and voucher confirmation If the tax point is goods receipt the cost basis for re averaging calculations includes tax at both receipt and voucher confirmation However if the tax point is invoice receipt the cost basis includes tax only at voucher confirmation Recoverable Tax Most European countries have a sales tax system that allows recovery of tax on purchases A recoverable purchase tax amount is one that you are allowed to offset against sales tax payable Such tax amounts are tracked separately in the GL For Global Tax Management they update the AP Tax account for the tax rate For recoverable taxes the tax point is normally invoice receipt However as a comparison the following examples show the entries for both tax points Inventory Items Figure 13 16 shows the GL entries for purchases of inventory items The tax point determines whether the update to AP Tax Recoverable occurs at goods receipt or invoice receipt Inventory items are items you purchase to use in manufacturing or to sell to customers b To review the entries for standard cost see Standard Cost on page 363 FAQAD 376 User Guide Master Data Fig 13 1
439. y ensuring that customers have adequate time to pay Specify the minimum number of days that must elapse between the invoice date and the payment due date Base Date Specify a base date as the start date for due date calculations Do this in situations where goods are shipped in advance of a negotiated invoice date but payment is made relative to the invoice date Credit Terms Interest Specify a credit terms interest percentage for recalculating line item prices You can also give favored customers a grace period on the payment due date by specifying the base days Both the Disc Date From and Due Date From fields support end of fortnight option 3 and end of week option 4 as well as invoice date option 1 and end of month option 2 Proximo Terms Define proximo terms if your company processes payments only on certain days of the month All payments may be due the same day for example the 10th of next month regardless of invoice date You specify this by setting Due Date From to 2 indicating the end of month In another example invoices for the first half of the month are due on the 15th of the following month Invoices for the second half of the month are due on the last day of the following month For these terms set Due Date From to 3 end of fortnight Similarly invoices for the first week are due at the end of the first week of the following month invoices for the second week are due at the end of the second week of t
440. y Address Maintenance Company Address LEN D Maintenance 2 12 Company Address Address 10000000 Name Qua Address E Address Soe Nord wer E State ca 1P Post 92130 Format 0 P Country United States of America usa P Comty og P Attention 0000000 Telephone ext 2 et Fax Telex 2 Tax Filing Tax Contro Last Filing oo A company address code must be assigned to each entity in Entity Code P See User Guide Maintenance 25 3 1 1 The details associated with the address code are oe printed on draft payments from that entity In the United States the and 1099 tax address code is also used to access the correct address information for reports 1099 MISC tax reports Your company name and address automatically prints on quotes orders and invoices To display your company name and address on menus and reports set up the following special address codes e screens defines the company name that appears on all menus reports defines the company name that is printed at the top of all reports Company Banks Use Company Address Maintenance to associate banks with company See Setting Up addresses Bank information prints on Accounts Receivable drafts and State tae Accounts Payable check forms Bank information includes mailing Addresses on address account type branch code and tax IDs If the account is for page 198 electronic funds transfer an electronic data interchange
441. y List Enter a code indicating the severity list to be used for this routing Severity lists are predefined lists of defects ranked according to how severe each defect is considered For example a severity list of hardware defects might appear as follows with higher numbers being more severe 5 Cosmetic typographical correction 10 Minor drawing layout change 20 Major drawing layout change 30 Wrong dimensions 40 Missing part Create severity lists in Reason Codes Maintenance 36 2 17 by defining typical defects and assigning them severity rankings Group reason codes by a type such as PCC When a member of a group with authority to reroute an approval rejects a change in PCR PCO Approval a prompt for severity level displays Users Notified at Submit or Approval A routing slip can include a list Tip of users to be notified at the beginning and end of the approval cycle ay aes Users notified must be defined as system users but do not have to be commas members of PCC groups The system determines the appropriate e mail address from data specified in User Maintenance FAQAD 116 User Guide Master Data Tip Check e mail addresses carefully to avoid errors This field cannot be validated Fig 4 13 Routing Slip Maintenance Detail Maintenance Table 4 1 Sample Approval Sequences b See page 109 FAQAD Users E mailed at Submit or Approval Enter e mail addresses of persons outside your organization such as
442. y QAD Inc QAD Inc 100 Innovation Place Santa Barbara California 93108 Phone 805 684 6614 Fax 805 684 1890 http www qad com Contents About This GUide Ls CR dde ARR RR CR AOE eRe Hae IRE d 1 Other QAD Documentation ssseeeee eee eens 2 Online Help onsite db head BERE ee bbe Ea MY bey dees 2 QAD Web Site Lies cx ed daa A CA ORO RORIS OD IU gen RH Re 3 Conventions bam cbe ep ba ea ea e c Tada d RR Rc eA 4 Chapter1 Introduction to Master Data L 5 Items Sites icsedue ec ak e ERR e eExad epE NR REX EUREN ad um 6 Prcig lll kes e die ed Ee IRE Td t tae tod bien Weder dee ned dson 6 Product Change Control PCC 2 2 2 0 0 ccc eee eens 7 Compl ance cos oa tinge ieee ea tee ae n emanare Hae eee dae 7 Adresses 24 ed e hed RR Mecca tan RU a a a ae a 7 Logistics Accounting 2 oees see ese em pasar ph E eph dena 7 Intrastat une Hed bee eed bbe edd hoa Ad RR XA RN E E Eur dis 8 Inventory Control dede oe ho eh S beach Re xa 8 Physical Inventoty ii 5iudusli3es bibl ap CR Rubr Ehe ee Era Ete a Lea ed 8 Global Tax Management GTM sssseseeee ees 8 Section 1 Master Dala isses ah e a nul ERRAT 9 Chapter 2 lNems SteS 22 26 c csccceswieawe ewes RE x RR Rd 11 IntrOdUctiOmn 4 2 occid m eet m opc tla acq oe pa cm 8a n 12 METIS ace ee etl en oa cese eol reete e arta Ue quale dauid qnd 13 iv User Guide Master Data General Item Data isses RE haa halen ee cents I dee 14 Codes an
443. y Tax Rate Report 385 AP Tax by Transaction Report 385 Apportion Method field 229 apportioning logistics charges 215 approval group for PCC 116 product change order 114 133 Approval Browse 131 AR Tax by Tax Rate Report 385 AR Tax by Transaction Report 385 archive delete Intrastat records 282 assay 151 changing 159 definition 153 attributes See inventory attributes authority codes 174 auto lot numbering 164 167 effects of 167 gaps in sequence of 167 lot groups 168 169 automatic analysis code regeneration 51 locations 36 lot numbers 19 average cost non recoverable tax 380 purchase variances 376 recoverable tax 375 tax accrual for memo items 379 tax accrual for returned items 380 tax calculation 375 tax for inventory items 375 average interval 19 B Backflush Transaction automatic lot numbers 169 banks addresses 198 company address 183 defining accounts 199 supplier 198 FAQAD base date 201 base days base date and 204 in inflationary environments 204 batch numbers assigning to work orders 158 benefits 145 concept 157 effects of using 157 example 157 work flow 158 Batchload Transfer With Lot Serial Change 289 best pricing 48 88 analysis codes 52 calculating 65 combining discounts 63 configured items 64 control defaults 51 discount types 61 planning 49 price lists 69 reports 77 repricing 80 Sales Order Maintenance 84 Blanket Order Maintenance 239 Blanket Order Release
444. y are never listed on the screen Fig 4 28 Release and Distribution 1 9 7 1 FAQAD 136 User Guide Master Data Tip This summary is similar to the Materials Summary Report 13 8 20 Table 4 2 Component Amounts AQAD Rels Enter Yes to release the PCO or No to unrelease it assuming the PCO has been released but not yet distributed Batch ID Specify a batch queue for printing release notices Leave blank to print notices immediately Since actual distribution of PCOs occurs only after reports are printed queuing may result in lag time between release and distribution Incorporation Planning Report Incorporation Planning Report 1 9 7 3 helps planning personnel evaluate the impact on inventory of implementing a PCO on a given effective date To run the report enter a specific PCO number ID and or database site effective date and cost method The report shows the summarized BOM formula of each parent item from all product structure formula records changed by the PCO It lists components from all levels of the item s BOM or formula The Qty Per values are extended to show the total quantity required per end item rather than per single level parent Table 4 2 summarizes the information displayed for each component Information Amount Original Qty Reqd Quantity per end item for the currently effective product structures formula records Final Qty Reqd Quantity per end item for product structu
445. y other price list Base Can combine with any price list that is not exclusive or another base Combinable Identifies an incremental price list that is intended to combine with other combinable and base price lists List price tables must be combinable Base Combinable Identifies an incremental price list that is intended to combine only with base price lists Minimum Order Specify a minimum quantity or currency amount to be enforced during order entry when this price list is selected Use of this field depends on the value of Quantity Type Quantity Specify the minimum order quantity that should be allowed on an order that selects this price list When you enter an order the system compares the cumulative line quantity of each item with this field If the order quantity is less a warning displays Additionally in Sales Order Maintenance only if you choose to continue ordering a below minimum quantity the system may prompt you to enter a reason code This occurs when Keep Booking History is Yes in Sales Order Control Amount Specify the minimum currency amount that needs to be on an order to use this price list If a price list is selected for an order this amount is compared with the total order amount If the Minimum Order value is greater a warning displays at the order trailer Note Even when a warning displays the price list is still applied to the order The warning lets you know that minimum requirements have

QAD ERP 2 User Guide Volume 6: Master Data

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents